InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
hey guys! give me a little bit of time, ill drop till chapter 42 in the next couple of hours so that we can be on the same chapter everywhere!
-
The site has now migrated to Xenforo 2. If you see any issues with the forum operation, please post them in the feedback thread.
-
Due to issues with external spam filters, QQ is currently unable to send any mail to Microsoft E-mail addresses. This includes any account at live.com, hotmail.com or msn.com. Signing up to the forum with one of these addresses will result in your verification E-mail never arriving. For best results, please use a different E-mail provider for your QQ address.
-
The rules regarding NSFW links have been updated. See here for details.
A Game of Thrones: A Stark Shard.
- Thread starter InfinityReads999
- Start date
Chapter 27: Start of a New Era.
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Winterfell.
As I took my seat in my father's solar, alongside Maester Luwin and Ser Rodrik, I prepared my notes on what I had discovered about the delegation during their stay in the North. With my insects, I spied on every moment of the crown's representatives, gathering a wealth of information about them and even learning what they had "discovered" about us.
The most significant points about the delegation were that the Northern economy had grown fivefold over two years, in addition to the increase in available military power, and that we were still focused on expanding that number with no intention of stopping. Lastly, there were over three scrolls filled with hypotheses and theories on how our new products would impact the other kingdoms, including Braavos.
"Tyrion is truly very intelligent," said the maester, his eyes shining with admiration.
"We can't deny that, Luwin. How do you think this report will affect our relationship with the crown?" asked my father, frowning.
"I don't know, Lord Stark. I can't be certain, but I hypothesize that it won't have much impact in the short term. Our new goods will take a significant amount of time before we see the profits we know they'll bring," said the maester, stroking his chin.
"We need to secure a good stock of goods to start selling them in the different kingdoms, Father," I said seriously. "I am completely sure that silk and honey will be a success with the other kingdoms. The clothing produced from this silk will become the new desire of all the highborns in the Seven Kingdoms and even beyond."
"As for the other two products, in my opinion, we should reserve the fertilizer for exclusive use by Northerners for the next two years. After two years, we can start selling it to the rest of the kingdoms, but I want the North to be self-sufficient before we distribute it," I said with determination.
"Why not share the fertilizer with others, Robb? It would be the honorable thing to do," said my father with a furrowed brow.
I had to struggle not to roll my eyes. I replied with the most deadpan voice, "What is our family's responsibility, Father?" Without waiting for a response, I continued, "Our people should be the first to benefit from our gains, not the rest of the kingdoms. We are Starks. We were the kings of the North, not the dogs of the South." I finished with a raised voice.
The silence in the solar was striking, and it made me realize the mistake I had made.
Before anyone could continue, I stood up and turned to the others.
"Forgive me for raising my voice. I shouldn't have lost my composure and allowed my feelings to enter the discussion," I said, a hint of shame in my voice.
My father looked intently into my eyes, which were expected to reveal my feelings about the situation. I was embarrassed for losing control, but that didn't mean I regretted saying it. It was high time my father stopped thinking and acting like anything other than a Stark.
Slowly, my father nodded his head, making me exhale with relief as I took my seat again.
"What do you think, Rodrik? Do you agree with Robb?" he asked, looking at the knight squarely in the eyes.
Ser Rodrik shifted uneasily for a moment under my father's gaze before becoming serious and making his decision. "Yes, Lord Stark. Ned... I've served this house since your father gave me the chance to be a guard here. I started from the bottom, and thanks to your father and then to you, I am who I am today. I understand your point of view, but Lord Robb is right. The North bled for Robert Baratheon, and we were left in this situation. The North deserves what the North sows."
My father said nothing, his face as hard as stone as he closed his eyes for a moment before turning to the maester. "And you, Luwin? What do you think about this?"
The maester sighed before rising and walking to the window. "I grew up in the North, Lord Stark. I've endured both wars, and I know that when a Northerner goes to help the South, it doesn't end well. I also agree with Robb on this. Moreover, the fact that we use it first for a while doesn't mean the South will never get this advantage; we're just waiting for a time."
My father stood up and began to walk around the solar. After a minute, his shoulders relaxed. "As I said yesterday, Robb, the North will be in good hands with the next generation." With a small smile, he continued, "We will do as you say, Robb. The fertilizer will be used by our people first. In the future, we will start selling it to the rest of the kingdoms."
"Thank you, Father. Your confidence in my plans means a lot to me," I said as I stood up and embraced him.
"Tyrion took samples of our new products to the capital. I hope it will bring us more clients by giving them an idea of what we offer. But I also hope the new taxes aren't intended to drain the North," I said with a smile that turned into a grimace at the end.
"According to these notes you provided, young Robb, Lord Tyrion was impressed with our new products," said the maester as he read the copies of the scrolls Tyrion had used while in Winterfell.
"He had nothing negative to say. The only point he mentioned frequently was how our exports might affect the other kingdoms when we start," I said with a furrowed brow.
"Do you think we'll have to watch out for assassins sent from Braavos or Qarth?" asked Ser Rodrik.
"We'll increase security. But at least for now, there isn't much risk. When we start exporting, that's when other countries will focus on us," said my father seriously.
"Let's keep a low profile for now. The delegation will return to the capital in a month. For the moment, we need to increase the training for recruits and start offering more incentives to encourage others to join our forces," said the maester.
"Many peasants have children who could start training to be guards in the future. If we offer food and pay, most families would choose to send their young ones. We can train them in their strengths, forming battalions of only squires, only archers, and so on," I said thoughtfully.
"That's a good idea, Lord Robb. I'll tell Vayon Poole to start drafting messages to post in the town centers," said Ser Rodrik, scratching his beard.
"Also, instruct him to ensure that each messenger carries extra coins to give to the merchants so they can spread the word about the opportunity as they travel. The more people hear about it, the better," I replied.
"Anything else we should know, Robb?" asked my father.
"Yes, Father. Tyrion tried to snoop where he shouldn't have," I said with a grimace. "He was investigating the formula for making vodka."
"He dares?!" exclaimed Ser Rodrik with a shout.
"I don't think it was because he wanted to do it," I said after he calmed down.
"What do you mean, young Robb?" asked the maester, raising an eyebrow.
"It seemed like he was doing it out of obligation, not because he wanted to. When I appeared in front of him, he stopped and didn't attempt it again during his stay," I responded mildly.
"Tywin," said my father and Ser Rodrik simultaneously.
"This is getting more complicated by the minute... If Tywin is interested in the North, he could do things to make our lives difficult," said my father after releasing a sigh.
"We will face it together, Father. The North remembers," I said calmly.
"The North remembers," the others said firmly.
"Another issue was one of the servants who came with the delegation. He had orders to interfere with the investigation and spy on our family," I said with a frown.
"Damn it, if it's not one thing, it's another," exclaimed Ser Rodrik.
"Do you know who he worked for, Robb?" asked my father seriously.
I nodded slightly. "A certain Peter Baelish. The Master of Coin of King's Landing."
The rest sighed with frustration. "What will we do about it?" asked the maester.
"Nothing for you. I've taken care of it, so there's no need to worry," I said mysteriously.
"What did you do, Robb?" asked my father seriously.
"Nothing that affects the North, trust me, Father. I would never break the rules of hospitality. The reason I'm not telling you is to avoid the risk of more people finding out," I said calmly.
My father exhaled slowly. "I'll have white hair before forty thanks to you, son," he said, shaking his head.
"Each one a new experience, right?" I laughed as I stood up.
"Before I leave, I'd like to hear your opinions on an idea I have," I said as I turned to the rest.
"I want my group and me to stay near the coast for a few months until we see the crown's sincerity and they deal with the Ironborn," I said seriously.
"We could start by going to Bear Island, then stay a few months in White Harbor to help protect the town from those damned pirates," I continued in a calm voice.
"Why should you go, Lord Robb?" exclaimed Ser Rodrik. "A messenger and a group of guards would be more than sufficient."
"Because the North will need to be united for what's coming. I want the other houses to know that the Starks of Winterfell have their backs and support them. Besides, the crown's decision will anger many of the lords, and if a Stark is explaining the situation, we might prevent many problems."
"It's a good idea, my lord," intervened the maester.
"I hate that you're right... our relationship with some houses isn't that close, and that could influence their attitude. Very well, Robb, head out at dawn with your group to Bear Island. Tomorrow I'll give you a letter to deliver to Maege Mormont. I don't know if the letter will help or make things worse, but I trust you can handle it," he said with a hearty laugh.
"If you encounter any pirates or bandits, you have my permission as Warden of the North to administer whatever justice you see fit. You've earned my trust, and I know you can do it. Be just, son, and remember… whoever dispenses justice must wield the sword," said my father, placing his hand on my shoulder.
"I won't let you down, Father," I said solemnly.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
As I took my seat in my father's solar, alongside Maester Luwin and Ser Rodrik, I prepared my notes on what I had discovered about the delegation during their stay in the North. With my insects, I spied on every moment of the crown's representatives, gathering a wealth of information about them and even learning what they had "discovered" about us.
The most significant points about the delegation were that the Northern economy had grown fivefold over two years, in addition to the increase in available military power, and that we were still focused on expanding that number with no intention of stopping. Lastly, there were over three scrolls filled with hypotheses and theories on how our new products would impact the other kingdoms, including Braavos.
"Tyrion is truly very intelligent," said the maester, his eyes shining with admiration.
"We can't deny that, Luwin. How do you think this report will affect our relationship with the crown?" asked my father, frowning.
"I don't know, Lord Stark. I can't be certain, but I hypothesize that it won't have much impact in the short term. Our new goods will take a significant amount of time before we see the profits we know they'll bring," said the maester, stroking his chin.
"We need to secure a good stock of goods to start selling them in the different kingdoms, Father," I said seriously. "I am completely sure that silk and honey will be a success with the other kingdoms. The clothing produced from this silk will become the new desire of all the highborns in the Seven Kingdoms and even beyond."
"As for the other two products, in my opinion, we should reserve the fertilizer for exclusive use by Northerners for the next two years. After two years, we can start selling it to the rest of the kingdoms, but I want the North to be self-sufficient before we distribute it," I said with determination.
"Why not share the fertilizer with others, Robb? It would be the honorable thing to do," said my father with a furrowed brow.
I had to struggle not to roll my eyes. I replied with the most deadpan voice, "What is our family's responsibility, Father?" Without waiting for a response, I continued, "Our people should be the first to benefit from our gains, not the rest of the kingdoms. We are Starks. We were the kings of the North, not the dogs of the South." I finished with a raised voice.
The silence in the solar was striking, and it made me realize the mistake I had made.
Before anyone could continue, I stood up and turned to the others.
"Forgive me for raising my voice. I shouldn't have lost my composure and allowed my feelings to enter the discussion," I said, a hint of shame in my voice.
My father looked intently into my eyes, which were expected to reveal my feelings about the situation. I was embarrassed for losing control, but that didn't mean I regretted saying it. It was high time my father stopped thinking and acting like anything other than a Stark.
Slowly, my father nodded his head, making me exhale with relief as I took my seat again.
"What do you think, Rodrik? Do you agree with Robb?" he asked, looking at the knight squarely in the eyes.
Ser Rodrik shifted uneasily for a moment under my father's gaze before becoming serious and making his decision. "Yes, Lord Stark. Ned... I've served this house since your father gave me the chance to be a guard here. I started from the bottom, and thanks to your father and then to you, I am who I am today. I understand your point of view, but Lord Robb is right. The North bled for Robert Baratheon, and we were left in this situation. The North deserves what the North sows."
My father said nothing, his face as hard as stone as he closed his eyes for a moment before turning to the maester. "And you, Luwin? What do you think about this?"
The maester sighed before rising and walking to the window. "I grew up in the North, Lord Stark. I've endured both wars, and I know that when a Northerner goes to help the South, it doesn't end well. I also agree with Robb on this. Moreover, the fact that we use it first for a while doesn't mean the South will never get this advantage; we're just waiting for a time."
My father stood up and began to walk around the solar. After a minute, his shoulders relaxed. "As I said yesterday, Robb, the North will be in good hands with the next generation." With a small smile, he continued, "We will do as you say, Robb. The fertilizer will be used by our people first. In the future, we will start selling it to the rest of the kingdoms."
"Thank you, Father. Your confidence in my plans means a lot to me," I said as I stood up and embraced him.
"Tyrion took samples of our new products to the capital. I hope it will bring us more clients by giving them an idea of what we offer. But I also hope the new taxes aren't intended to drain the North," I said with a smile that turned into a grimace at the end.
"According to these notes you provided, young Robb, Lord Tyrion was impressed with our new products," said the maester as he read the copies of the scrolls Tyrion had used while in Winterfell.
"He had nothing negative to say. The only point he mentioned frequently was how our exports might affect the other kingdoms when we start," I said with a furrowed brow.
"Do you think we'll have to watch out for assassins sent from Braavos or Qarth?" asked Ser Rodrik.
"We'll increase security. But at least for now, there isn't much risk. When we start exporting, that's when other countries will focus on us," said my father seriously.
"Let's keep a low profile for now. The delegation will return to the capital in a month. For the moment, we need to increase the training for recruits and start offering more incentives to encourage others to join our forces," said the maester.
"Many peasants have children who could start training to be guards in the future. If we offer food and pay, most families would choose to send their young ones. We can train them in their strengths, forming battalions of only squires, only archers, and so on," I said thoughtfully.
"That's a good idea, Lord Robb. I'll tell Vayon Poole to start drafting messages to post in the town centers," said Ser Rodrik, scratching his beard.
"Also, instruct him to ensure that each messenger carries extra coins to give to the merchants so they can spread the word about the opportunity as they travel. The more people hear about it, the better," I replied.
"Anything else we should know, Robb?" asked my father.
"Yes, Father. Tyrion tried to snoop where he shouldn't have," I said with a grimace. "He was investigating the formula for making vodka."
"He dares?!" exclaimed Ser Rodrik with a shout.
"I don't think it was because he wanted to do it," I said after he calmed down.
"What do you mean, young Robb?" asked the maester, raising an eyebrow.
"It seemed like he was doing it out of obligation, not because he wanted to. When I appeared in front of him, he stopped and didn't attempt it again during his stay," I responded mildly.
"Tywin," said my father and Ser Rodrik simultaneously.
"This is getting more complicated by the minute... If Tywin is interested in the North, he could do things to make our lives difficult," said my father after releasing a sigh.
"We will face it together, Father. The North remembers," I said calmly.
"The North remembers," the others said firmly.
"Another issue was one of the servants who came with the delegation. He had orders to interfere with the investigation and spy on our family," I said with a frown.
"Damn it, if it's not one thing, it's another," exclaimed Ser Rodrik.
"Do you know who he worked for, Robb?" asked my father seriously.
I nodded slightly. "A certain Peter Baelish. The Master of Coin of King's Landing."
The rest sighed with frustration. "What will we do about it?" asked the maester.
"Nothing for you. I've taken care of it, so there's no need to worry," I said mysteriously.
"What did you do, Robb?" asked my father seriously.
"Nothing that affects the North, trust me, Father. I would never break the rules of hospitality. The reason I'm not telling you is to avoid the risk of more people finding out," I said calmly.
My father exhaled slowly. "I'll have white hair before forty thanks to you, son," he said, shaking his head.
"Each one a new experience, right?" I laughed as I stood up.
"Before I leave, I'd like to hear your opinions on an idea I have," I said as I turned to the rest.
"I want my group and me to stay near the coast for a few months until we see the crown's sincerity and they deal with the Ironborn," I said seriously.
"We could start by going to Bear Island, then stay a few months in White Harbor to help protect the town from those damned pirates," I continued in a calm voice.
"Why should you go, Lord Robb?" exclaimed Ser Rodrik. "A messenger and a group of guards would be more than sufficient."
"Because the North will need to be united for what's coming. I want the other houses to know that the Starks of Winterfell have their backs and support them. Besides, the crown's decision will anger many of the lords, and if a Stark is explaining the situation, we might prevent many problems."
"It's a good idea, my lord," intervened the maester.
"I hate that you're right... our relationship with some houses isn't that close, and that could influence their attitude. Very well, Robb, head out at dawn with your group to Bear Island. Tomorrow I'll give you a letter to deliver to Maege Mormont. I don't know if the letter will help or make things worse, but I trust you can handle it," he said with a hearty laugh.
"If you encounter any pirates or bandits, you have my permission as Warden of the North to administer whatever justice you see fit. You've earned my trust, and I know you can do it. Be just, son, and remember… whoever dispenses justice must wield the sword," said my father, placing his hand on my shoulder.
"I won't let you down, Father," I said solemnly.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 28: Kingslanding Interlude.
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Kingslanding
Tyrion and the rest of the delegation entered the capital. The journey had been relatively smooth, but the difference was palpable once they left the North.
While in the North, the caravan had moved peacefully along the King's Road, with no attacks or incidents of note. The only unusual occurrence had been the illness contracted by one of the servants accompanying them. It started as a common cold; the servant felt weak and tired, but as days went by, they were unable to control it.
During their stay of a few days at the Dustyn ancestral home in Barrowton, the maester in charge of the fortress couldn't do anything to save him, predicting that the illness would worsen over time. As they continued their journey to the capital, the servant began to lose muscular control, and his health deteriorated until he passed away at Walder Frey's ancestral home.
Tyrion shook his head, trying to push the image out of his mind. The death had been agonizing and seemed painful. The only consolation was that no one else had been infected by whatever that was.
Tyrion emerged from the caravan, assisting Lady Elyse, and together they began walking toward the fortress, where the steward of the Red Keep approached them.
"I hope you had a pleasant journey, Lord Tyrion, Lady Elyse," said Reginald Hawke as he approached.
"Thank you, Reginald. I trust everything has been well since the delegation left?" Lady Elyse asked with a small smile, greeting her old friend.
"Not much has changed, Elyse," Reginald replied, giving her a brief hug. "The Small Council is gathered and awaits your report. In the short time since you left Winterfell, troubling news arrived."
Lady Elyse nodded. "Let's head straight there, then," she said, as she, Tyrion, and Reginald entered the fortress.
"Who is present, Reginald?" Tyrion asked, trying to keep their pace.
"Everyone is present, Lord Tyrion— even the King, Lord Renly, and Lord Stannis," Reginald responded calmly.
"And my sister?" Tyrion inquired.
"She is also present, my lord," Reginald said, opening the door to where the others were gathered.
Tyrion and Elyse entered the chamber where the most important figures in Kingslanding were assembled. The King sat on his throne with a goblet of wine, while his wife, the Queen, looked visibly irritated by the situation. Varys and Littlefinger spoke in hushed tones, and the rest of the attendees exuded an air of discomfort.
Lord Arryn looked worried as he read a message beside Maester Pycelle, sipping wine as he waited for the rest of the delegation to arrive.
When the leaders of the delegation—Tyrion, Ser Oakheart, and Lady Elyse—had entered with a few servants carrying various scrolls, the members of the Small Council gave them their full attention.
"Lord Tyrion, Lady Elyse, thank the Seven you arrived safely," said Jon Arryn with a smile that barely concealed his unease.
"Thank you, Lord Hand. The journey from the North was quite straightforward and peaceful. The Stark's bandit purge has yielded impressive results. The Riverlands, however, was a different story; the caravan encountered six different groups of bandits," Tyrion said with a carefree smile.
"Indeed… and what can you tell us about your investigation in the North, Lord Tyrion? My birds only sing in the Riverlands, so I haven't heard anything about your stay," Varys asked with his enigmatic smile.
"The situation is more complex than it appears, Lord Varys. The North is on track to becoming one of the most powerful realms in Westeros," Tyrion said, shrugging.
"Ha! That's my Ned," Robert Baratheon exclaimed with a hearty laugh.
"Why do you believe the North is on that path, Lord Tyrion?" Baelish asked.
"Everything they're doing, Lord Baelish. The North is training recruits en masse and has practically doubled its number of soldiers in peacetime. They may even have surpassed the gold cloaks here in Kingslanding," Tyrion replied, shaking his head in admiration.
"Really? That many? Why would they need so many soldiers?" Renly asked.
"They're preparing for an armed conflict with the Ironborn if the Crown doesn't compel them to stop their attacks on the North. Lord Stark told me with complete seriousness that the North will go to war if the Crown does not intervene," Tyrion said, his tone serious as he met the eyes of each of the kingdom's representatives.
"We can't allow that! The realm couldn't bear a war between two houses like the Starks and the Greyjoys!" Lord Arryn exclaimed, worried.
"Then I suggest we send a messenger to Pyke immediately… The North is ready, and I didn't notice any attempt to pressure me," Tyrion explained.
"I have a message from one of my little birds in the Iron Islands," Varys interjected. "It appears that young Robb Stark and the bastard of Winterfell defeated and beheaded Dagon Cod of House Cod and sent his head to Balon Greyjoy with a note demanding he cease his attacks on the North."
"Damn, we arrived too late," Tyrion murmured, shaking his head.
"This will complicate things," Jon Arryn said, worried.
"Complicate? The Iron Islands will cease attacking the North's ships by order of the King!" Robert exclaimed, banging the table with his fist.
"But, Your Grace… this offense…" the Maester began.
"Enough!" the King raised his voice, "I am the King, and I order those damn ironborn to stop acting like fools. They started these conflicts with their raids, and what they got is what they've sown!"
"They won't like that, dear. You should punish the scion of the Starks," the Queen intervened with a condescending smile.
"Silence, woman!" Robert roared, "My word is final. Maester, send a raven to Pyke demanding that they stop immediately, or the rest of the Seven Kingdoms will attack them until their bloodline is erased from history."
The Maester nodded quickly, eager to avoid the wrath of the drunken King. Rising, he began to walk towards his quarters as swiftly as possible.
"What other results did you obtain, Lord Tyrion?" Jon Arryn asked after a defeated sigh, knowing he couldn't change Robert's decision once he was in this mood.
"The North's products are starting to shake up many businesses of various houses, but I have no doubt that the North will continue to rise to the top," Tyrion replied.
"What wonderful products does the North bring us?" Renly asked, tilting his head.
"Honey, silk, and a way to dye their garments a very beautiful red," Lady Elyse said for the first time since the conversation began.
"And they also have another product they tried to keep secret. Despite my efforts, I couldn't find out what it was," Tyrion said with a frustrated look.
"And you have no idea what it could be, Lord Tyrion?" Varys asked softly.
"No… The Starks guarded it with all their might. Despite being permitted to visit any part of their magnificent castle, I saw nothing that gave me a clue as to what this secret product might be," Tyrion explained slowly.
"Curious…" Renly said.
"Did anything good come out of this investigation?" Stannis finally asked.
"I managed to persuade Lord Stark to continue buying supplies from the Tyrells and the Martells. This should placate those families by providing them with this concession," Tyrion said.
Tyrion then began explaining the details of his conversation with Lord Stark, and gradually the members of the Small Council began to understand how they could use the situation to the Crown's advantage and their own.
"And you, Ser Oakheart, have anything to add about your stay in the North?" Jon Arryn asked.
The knight exchanged a glance with Tyrion and Elyse before standing up and addressing Ser Barristan directly.
"There is a gem in the North, and I'm not ashamed to admit that he will be a better warrior than I in very little time," Ser Oakheart said.
Ser Barristan raised an eyebrow. "Oh? Who are you speaking of, Ser?" he finally asked.
"Lord Robb Stark has the potential to be one of the greatest swordsmen Westeros has seen since the Age of Heroes," Ser Oakheart said.
"Really? He must have impressed you," Littlefinger commented condescendingly.
"He defeated me in our first duel. I wasn't giving it my all, but for a twelve-year-old to beat me is no simple feat," the knight continued.
"He beat you? I expected more from a Kingsguard," Jaime Lannister said with a mocking laugh, accompanying his sister as her guard.
"Don't mock him, Kingslayer. You wouldn't have beaten a Kingsguard at twelve," Ser Barristan defended his friend.
"Ha!" The King laughed loudly. "The young wolf lives up to his name."
"Indeed, Your Majesty. He has truly impressed me. And as Varys mentioned earlier, he defeated Dagon Cod. Consider this… he is only twelve. His potential is truly impressive," Ser Oakheart agreed.
As the meeting and report concluded, the representatives began to leave one by one, until only Tyrion, Varys, and Littlefinger remained in the chamber.
"Lord Tyrion, do you know what happened to the servant Darion? He was with you to the North," Littlefinger asked.
"Yes… it's truly a shame what happened to him," Tyrion said with difficulty, the memories of his worsening condition resurfacing in his mind.
"Did something happen?" Baelish asked, feigning concern.
"He fell ill when we were passing through Torrhen's Square. Gradually his health deteriorated, and even the Dustyn maester couldn't save him. I'm sorry for his loss; Darion helped us greatly in the investigation, and it seemed he tried to assist at every opportunity," Tyrion said, meeting Baelish's gaze.
Baelish's eyebrow twitched nervously. Rubbing his throat, he said, "Yes, Darion was like that. Always wanting to help and be involved in everything. He was truly a good man. If you'll excuse me, I'll take my leave," he said, exiting the room.
"It seems he had sent a spy with the delegation," Varys murmured. "It's a pity he fell ill. He might have learned various things in the North. But I guess we'll never know."
Tyrion remained alone in the room, reflecting on what he had heard, before paling as he remembered that upon returning to Casterly Rock, he would have to face his father with bad news.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Tyrion and the rest of the delegation entered the capital. The journey had been relatively smooth, but the difference was palpable once they left the North.
While in the North, the caravan had moved peacefully along the King's Road, with no attacks or incidents of note. The only unusual occurrence had been the illness contracted by one of the servants accompanying them. It started as a common cold; the servant felt weak and tired, but as days went by, they were unable to control it.
During their stay of a few days at the Dustyn ancestral home in Barrowton, the maester in charge of the fortress couldn't do anything to save him, predicting that the illness would worsen over time. As they continued their journey to the capital, the servant began to lose muscular control, and his health deteriorated until he passed away at Walder Frey's ancestral home.
Tyrion shook his head, trying to push the image out of his mind. The death had been agonizing and seemed painful. The only consolation was that no one else had been infected by whatever that was.
Tyrion emerged from the caravan, assisting Lady Elyse, and together they began walking toward the fortress, where the steward of the Red Keep approached them.
"I hope you had a pleasant journey, Lord Tyrion, Lady Elyse," said Reginald Hawke as he approached.
"Thank you, Reginald. I trust everything has been well since the delegation left?" Lady Elyse asked with a small smile, greeting her old friend.
"Not much has changed, Elyse," Reginald replied, giving her a brief hug. "The Small Council is gathered and awaits your report. In the short time since you left Winterfell, troubling news arrived."
Lady Elyse nodded. "Let's head straight there, then," she said, as she, Tyrion, and Reginald entered the fortress.
"Who is present, Reginald?" Tyrion asked, trying to keep their pace.
"Everyone is present, Lord Tyrion— even the King, Lord Renly, and Lord Stannis," Reginald responded calmly.
"And my sister?" Tyrion inquired.
"She is also present, my lord," Reginald said, opening the door to where the others were gathered.
Tyrion and Elyse entered the chamber where the most important figures in Kingslanding were assembled. The King sat on his throne with a goblet of wine, while his wife, the Queen, looked visibly irritated by the situation. Varys and Littlefinger spoke in hushed tones, and the rest of the attendees exuded an air of discomfort.
Lord Arryn looked worried as he read a message beside Maester Pycelle, sipping wine as he waited for the rest of the delegation to arrive.
When the leaders of the delegation—Tyrion, Ser Oakheart, and Lady Elyse—had entered with a few servants carrying various scrolls, the members of the Small Council gave them their full attention.
"Lord Tyrion, Lady Elyse, thank the Seven you arrived safely," said Jon Arryn with a smile that barely concealed his unease.
"Thank you, Lord Hand. The journey from the North was quite straightforward and peaceful. The Stark's bandit purge has yielded impressive results. The Riverlands, however, was a different story; the caravan encountered six different groups of bandits," Tyrion said with a carefree smile.
"Indeed… and what can you tell us about your investigation in the North, Lord Tyrion? My birds only sing in the Riverlands, so I haven't heard anything about your stay," Varys asked with his enigmatic smile.
"The situation is more complex than it appears, Lord Varys. The North is on track to becoming one of the most powerful realms in Westeros," Tyrion said, shrugging.
"Ha! That's my Ned," Robert Baratheon exclaimed with a hearty laugh.
"Why do you believe the North is on that path, Lord Tyrion?" Baelish asked.
"Everything they're doing, Lord Baelish. The North is training recruits en masse and has practically doubled its number of soldiers in peacetime. They may even have surpassed the gold cloaks here in Kingslanding," Tyrion replied, shaking his head in admiration.
"Really? That many? Why would they need so many soldiers?" Renly asked.
"They're preparing for an armed conflict with the Ironborn if the Crown doesn't compel them to stop their attacks on the North. Lord Stark told me with complete seriousness that the North will go to war if the Crown does not intervene," Tyrion said, his tone serious as he met the eyes of each of the kingdom's representatives.
"We can't allow that! The realm couldn't bear a war between two houses like the Starks and the Greyjoys!" Lord Arryn exclaimed, worried.
"Then I suggest we send a messenger to Pyke immediately… The North is ready, and I didn't notice any attempt to pressure me," Tyrion explained.
"I have a message from one of my little birds in the Iron Islands," Varys interjected. "It appears that young Robb Stark and the bastard of Winterfell defeated and beheaded Dagon Cod of House Cod and sent his head to Balon Greyjoy with a note demanding he cease his attacks on the North."
"Damn, we arrived too late," Tyrion murmured, shaking his head.
"This will complicate things," Jon Arryn said, worried.
"Complicate? The Iron Islands will cease attacking the North's ships by order of the King!" Robert exclaimed, banging the table with his fist.
"But, Your Grace… this offense…" the Maester began.
"Enough!" the King raised his voice, "I am the King, and I order those damn ironborn to stop acting like fools. They started these conflicts with their raids, and what they got is what they've sown!"
"They won't like that, dear. You should punish the scion of the Starks," the Queen intervened with a condescending smile.
"Silence, woman!" Robert roared, "My word is final. Maester, send a raven to Pyke demanding that they stop immediately, or the rest of the Seven Kingdoms will attack them until their bloodline is erased from history."
The Maester nodded quickly, eager to avoid the wrath of the drunken King. Rising, he began to walk towards his quarters as swiftly as possible.
"What other results did you obtain, Lord Tyrion?" Jon Arryn asked after a defeated sigh, knowing he couldn't change Robert's decision once he was in this mood.
"The North's products are starting to shake up many businesses of various houses, but I have no doubt that the North will continue to rise to the top," Tyrion replied.
"What wonderful products does the North bring us?" Renly asked, tilting his head.
"Honey, silk, and a way to dye their garments a very beautiful red," Lady Elyse said for the first time since the conversation began.
"And they also have another product they tried to keep secret. Despite my efforts, I couldn't find out what it was," Tyrion said with a frustrated look.
"And you have no idea what it could be, Lord Tyrion?" Varys asked softly.
"No… The Starks guarded it with all their might. Despite being permitted to visit any part of their magnificent castle, I saw nothing that gave me a clue as to what this secret product might be," Tyrion explained slowly.
"Curious…" Renly said.
"Did anything good come out of this investigation?" Stannis finally asked.
"I managed to persuade Lord Stark to continue buying supplies from the Tyrells and the Martells. This should placate those families by providing them with this concession," Tyrion said.
Tyrion then began explaining the details of his conversation with Lord Stark, and gradually the members of the Small Council began to understand how they could use the situation to the Crown's advantage and their own.
"And you, Ser Oakheart, have anything to add about your stay in the North?" Jon Arryn asked.
The knight exchanged a glance with Tyrion and Elyse before standing up and addressing Ser Barristan directly.
"There is a gem in the North, and I'm not ashamed to admit that he will be a better warrior than I in very little time," Ser Oakheart said.
Ser Barristan raised an eyebrow. "Oh? Who are you speaking of, Ser?" he finally asked.
"Lord Robb Stark has the potential to be one of the greatest swordsmen Westeros has seen since the Age of Heroes," Ser Oakheart said.
"Really? He must have impressed you," Littlefinger commented condescendingly.
"He defeated me in our first duel. I wasn't giving it my all, but for a twelve-year-old to beat me is no simple feat," the knight continued.
"He beat you? I expected more from a Kingsguard," Jaime Lannister said with a mocking laugh, accompanying his sister as her guard.
"Don't mock him, Kingslayer. You wouldn't have beaten a Kingsguard at twelve," Ser Barristan defended his friend.
"Ha!" The King laughed loudly. "The young wolf lives up to his name."
"Indeed, Your Majesty. He has truly impressed me. And as Varys mentioned earlier, he defeated Dagon Cod. Consider this… he is only twelve. His potential is truly impressive," Ser Oakheart agreed.
As the meeting and report concluded, the representatives began to leave one by one, until only Tyrion, Varys, and Littlefinger remained in the chamber.
"Lord Tyrion, do you know what happened to the servant Darion? He was with you to the North," Littlefinger asked.
"Yes… it's truly a shame what happened to him," Tyrion said with difficulty, the memories of his worsening condition resurfacing in his mind.
"Did something happen?" Baelish asked, feigning concern.
"He fell ill when we were passing through Torrhen's Square. Gradually his health deteriorated, and even the Dustyn maester couldn't save him. I'm sorry for his loss; Darion helped us greatly in the investigation, and it seemed he tried to assist at every opportunity," Tyrion said, meeting Baelish's gaze.
Baelish's eyebrow twitched nervously. Rubbing his throat, he said, "Yes, Darion was like that. Always wanting to help and be involved in everything. He was truly a good man. If you'll excuse me, I'll take my leave," he said, exiting the room.
"It seems he had sent a spy with the delegation," Varys murmured. "It's a pity he fell ill. He might have learned various things in the North. But I guess we'll never know."
Tyrion remained alone in the room, reflecting on what he had heard, before paling as he remembered that upon returning to Casterly Rock, he would have to face his father with bad news.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 29: Back at Winterfell.
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Bear Island
"Jory!" I called out from the entrance of House Mormont's keep, accompanied by Maege Mormont, the lady of Bear Island.
Jory turned to look at us, leaving the handful of recruits we had brought to the coast for training—an opportunity for them to lose their hesitation about taking a life in defense of our realm.
"Robb, Lady Mormont. How are you both today?" Jory asked with a smile.
"We're well, and much better thanks to all the support from House Stark," Maege said with a grateful smile. "We had been suffering greatly from all the raiders that have been attacking lately."
"We Starks must protect our realm, Lady Mormont," I replied calmly. "Besides, all our recruits are gaining valuable experience here." I finished with a chuckle.
"We all benefit, don't we?" Lady Mormont said. "The best alliances are forged this way."
Thanks to my father's idea to bring 500 soldiers with us on this expedition to the coast—to let them get some real experience and see the life of a guard—we were able to enhance the training effectiveness through real battles against raiders and pirates.
These soldiers were from the first batches we graduated in Winterfell. They had the theoretical knowledge of how to fight and defend their lands, but over the months they had spent on the coast, they had gained practical experience and lost their sensitivity to taking lives when necessary.
The Mormonts had provided a small keep, which would be maintained by our soldiers. For their sustenance, both groups would work together to supply the population of Bear Island, from fishing practices that could be useful in the future to hunting the island's wild animals.
Moreover, with the message my father gave me before starting this expedition, the Mormont family began to increase their maritime power with the help of the Clover family, who stayed with another contingent of 300 guards. Each of the northern houses was ordered to start training large groups of soldiers from the beginning, it didn't matter if they were highborn or peasants, everyone started at the same level. Any peasant who wished to help or simply offer their services was accepted, as long as they did not break the law. Naturally, some houses could not provide large numbers of soldiers, but those who could were doing so.
Additionally, all families with coastal territories were required to increase their security and begin constructing keeps where garrisons of soldiers would be stationed. With this and the help of the Manderlys, they could start working on maritime trade and begin earning more gold for their families and the North.
The Clovers, the Flints, the Ryswells, and the Karstarks had the support of the Manderlys and the Starks in this effort. The Manderlys were building merchant and warships at no charge, and once each house had at least three ships—two merchant and one warship—they would begin seeking out trade opportunities for the goods produced by the other families. The Manderlys could continue assisting thanks to the profits they had accumulated over the years, and the Starks subsidized where we could, making the North stronger.
We were gradually preparing for the War of the Five Kings, and I was genuinely pleased with what we had achieved over the past two years. We were still waiting for the crown's response regarding the decision they would make with the research data, but as much as I wished otherwise, I had no power to change it, and we would have to endure these decisions for over a year. The advantage was that by troubling the Northerners with these sanctions, the separation or struggle for the throne would gain more traction, which would give the North better advantages in the future.
As I thought about the changes in the North, Jory and Maege finished their conversation and were looking at me, noticing I was distracted.
"Are you okay, Robb? You seemed lost in thought for a moment," Maege asked with a teasing tone.
"I think it's time to return to Winterfell. I'm sure your family will be able to continue the construction and other tasks," I said with a sheepish smile.
"Dacey will be sad to see you go, Robb," Maege said with a hearty laugh.
"Tell that little demon to give me some space, haha," I laughed with her. "She never stops fighting with me or Jon; all she thinks about is battles."
"Yes, it's a pity," Maege said, "I'd like to have grandchildren soon," she added with a suggestive wink.
"Ughh," I staggered back a couple of steps. "I need to go. Jory, prepare everything for our return to Winterfell. We leave at dawn."
Putting as much distance as possible between myself and the lady of Bear Island, I focused on the memories of my family. Realistically, I had been away from Winterfell for a very long time, but it was necessary. Preparing ourselves before Canon began would ensure the North could defend itself against the rest of the Seven Kingdoms. There were too many enemies and too few allies, so preparing ourselves could save our lives in the future.
Winterfell
Leaving the battalion on Bear Island was a decision made very carefully between my father and his advisors, but realistically it was the best option. We left one of Winterfell's veteran guards in charge of the keep at Bear Island; he would command the troops alongside Maege Mormont.
This way, my house wouldn't lose control of the troops, as it would be a joint command between both houses.
Approaching Winterfell, I saw the guards opening the castle gates. The sounds of the hundreds of guards present at all times, the clanging of their training weapons, could be heard from outside the castle. Their effort was at 110%; no matter the initial reason they joined the army, after months of training together, they had all gained a new family in each other.
Entering the Great Hall, I noticed that my family was not alone. Various lords were present with them.
"Robb. I apologize for not being able to receive you as always," my father said, a bit embarrassed.
Giving him a calm smile, I approached his seat at the table and hugged him. "No problem, Father. It's good to be back home."
My father responded with a small smile before returning to a conversation with Rickard Karstark.
"Mother, every time I see you, you look more beautiful," I said to Catelyn with an honest smile. My relationship with her was not like in canon; the distance that had grown between us was quite obvious, but that didn't mean I didn't love her. She was like a second mother to me. There wasn't total trust, and my maturity had led her to stop treating me like a child in front of others. But I couldn't deny that I felt good when she showed concern for me.
Catelyn smiled warmly at my compliment, stood up, and gave me a welcoming hug. "We've all missed you, and Jon," she whispered so only I could hear.
"We're happy to be here. And I think we'll be staying in Winterfell for a long time. There are many responsibilities I've had to neglect due to my travels, and it's time for me to return to them."
My mother's smile grew even wider upon hearing this. Kissing me on the brow, she followed my father's example and returned to her conversation with Lord Umber's wife.
My younger siblings also approached happily, even more so when they heard what I told my mother about staying in the castle for a long time.
Sansa and Arya were accompanied by the new septa, who was tasked with guiding them as best she could. At least Sansa listened to her teachings, but Arya couldn't care less about them. At least she attended and didn't try to run away, as she had permission to do as she wished in this life. For now, she just ran and played with some guards, but in the coming years, Arya would surely start learning how to defend herself.
My mother didn't seem to like this, but she overlooked it and continued teaching her other daughter how to be a proper lady.
Sitting down, I couldn't deny there was no way to express how happy I was to finally be home. Each day left less time for preparation, but I was confident I would achieve my goals. The War of the Five Kings, and then unifying the kingdoms under my command, all that work just to prepare for the long night.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
"Jory!" I called out from the entrance of House Mormont's keep, accompanied by Maege Mormont, the lady of Bear Island.
Jory turned to look at us, leaving the handful of recruits we had brought to the coast for training—an opportunity for them to lose their hesitation about taking a life in defense of our realm.
"Robb, Lady Mormont. How are you both today?" Jory asked with a smile.
"We're well, and much better thanks to all the support from House Stark," Maege said with a grateful smile. "We had been suffering greatly from all the raiders that have been attacking lately."
"We Starks must protect our realm, Lady Mormont," I replied calmly. "Besides, all our recruits are gaining valuable experience here." I finished with a chuckle.
"We all benefit, don't we?" Lady Mormont said. "The best alliances are forged this way."
Thanks to my father's idea to bring 500 soldiers with us on this expedition to the coast—to let them get some real experience and see the life of a guard—we were able to enhance the training effectiveness through real battles against raiders and pirates.
These soldiers were from the first batches we graduated in Winterfell. They had the theoretical knowledge of how to fight and defend their lands, but over the months they had spent on the coast, they had gained practical experience and lost their sensitivity to taking lives when necessary.
The Mormonts had provided a small keep, which would be maintained by our soldiers. For their sustenance, both groups would work together to supply the population of Bear Island, from fishing practices that could be useful in the future to hunting the island's wild animals.
Moreover, with the message my father gave me before starting this expedition, the Mormont family began to increase their maritime power with the help of the Clover family, who stayed with another contingent of 300 guards. Each of the northern houses was ordered to start training large groups of soldiers from the beginning, it didn't matter if they were highborn or peasants, everyone started at the same level. Any peasant who wished to help or simply offer their services was accepted, as long as they did not break the law. Naturally, some houses could not provide large numbers of soldiers, but those who could were doing so.
Additionally, all families with coastal territories were required to increase their security and begin constructing keeps where garrisons of soldiers would be stationed. With this and the help of the Manderlys, they could start working on maritime trade and begin earning more gold for their families and the North.
The Clovers, the Flints, the Ryswells, and the Karstarks had the support of the Manderlys and the Starks in this effort. The Manderlys were building merchant and warships at no charge, and once each house had at least three ships—two merchant and one warship—they would begin seeking out trade opportunities for the goods produced by the other families. The Manderlys could continue assisting thanks to the profits they had accumulated over the years, and the Starks subsidized where we could, making the North stronger.
We were gradually preparing for the War of the Five Kings, and I was genuinely pleased with what we had achieved over the past two years. We were still waiting for the crown's response regarding the decision they would make with the research data, but as much as I wished otherwise, I had no power to change it, and we would have to endure these decisions for over a year. The advantage was that by troubling the Northerners with these sanctions, the separation or struggle for the throne would gain more traction, which would give the North better advantages in the future.
As I thought about the changes in the North, Jory and Maege finished their conversation and were looking at me, noticing I was distracted.
"Are you okay, Robb? You seemed lost in thought for a moment," Maege asked with a teasing tone.
"I think it's time to return to Winterfell. I'm sure your family will be able to continue the construction and other tasks," I said with a sheepish smile.
"Dacey will be sad to see you go, Robb," Maege said with a hearty laugh.
"Tell that little demon to give me some space, haha," I laughed with her. "She never stops fighting with me or Jon; all she thinks about is battles."
"Yes, it's a pity," Maege said, "I'd like to have grandchildren soon," she added with a suggestive wink.
"Ughh," I staggered back a couple of steps. "I need to go. Jory, prepare everything for our return to Winterfell. We leave at dawn."
Putting as much distance as possible between myself and the lady of Bear Island, I focused on the memories of my family. Realistically, I had been away from Winterfell for a very long time, but it was necessary. Preparing ourselves before Canon began would ensure the North could defend itself against the rest of the Seven Kingdoms. There were too many enemies and too few allies, so preparing ourselves could save our lives in the future.
Winterfell
Leaving the battalion on Bear Island was a decision made very carefully between my father and his advisors, but realistically it was the best option. We left one of Winterfell's veteran guards in charge of the keep at Bear Island; he would command the troops alongside Maege Mormont.
This way, my house wouldn't lose control of the troops, as it would be a joint command between both houses.
Approaching Winterfell, I saw the guards opening the castle gates. The sounds of the hundreds of guards present at all times, the clanging of their training weapons, could be heard from outside the castle. Their effort was at 110%; no matter the initial reason they joined the army, after months of training together, they had all gained a new family in each other.
Entering the Great Hall, I noticed that my family was not alone. Various lords were present with them.
"Robb. I apologize for not being able to receive you as always," my father said, a bit embarrassed.
Giving him a calm smile, I approached his seat at the table and hugged him. "No problem, Father. It's good to be back home."
My father responded with a small smile before returning to a conversation with Rickard Karstark.
"Mother, every time I see you, you look more beautiful," I said to Catelyn with an honest smile. My relationship with her was not like in canon; the distance that had grown between us was quite obvious, but that didn't mean I didn't love her. She was like a second mother to me. There wasn't total trust, and my maturity had led her to stop treating me like a child in front of others. But I couldn't deny that I felt good when she showed concern for me.
Catelyn smiled warmly at my compliment, stood up, and gave me a welcoming hug. "We've all missed you, and Jon," she whispered so only I could hear.
"We're happy to be here. And I think we'll be staying in Winterfell for a long time. There are many responsibilities I've had to neglect due to my travels, and it's time for me to return to them."
My mother's smile grew even wider upon hearing this. Kissing me on the brow, she followed my father's example and returned to her conversation with Lord Umber's wife.
My younger siblings also approached happily, even more so when they heard what I told my mother about staying in the castle for a long time.
Sansa and Arya were accompanied by the new septa, who was tasked with guiding them as best she could. At least Sansa listened to her teachings, but Arya couldn't care less about them. At least she attended and didn't try to run away, as she had permission to do as she wished in this life. For now, she just ran and played with some guards, but in the coming years, Arya would surely start learning how to defend herself.
My mother didn't seem to like this, but she overlooked it and continued teaching her other daughter how to be a proper lady.
Sitting down, I couldn't deny there was no way to express how happy I was to finally be home. Each day left less time for preparation, but I was confident I would achieve my goals. The War of the Five Kings, and then unifying the kingdoms under my command, all that work just to prepare for the long night.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 30: So it begins.
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Winterfell.
A new day began at Winterfell Castle. The sound of metal against metal could be heard from outside. Soldiers were training, and blacksmiths used their hammers to create more tools and weapons.
I found myself once again with my father and mother in the Lord of Winterfell's solar, a warm scene of family affection. These years had been tough for us, but each member of the Stark family fulfilled their duties to help others whenever possible.
The sanctions imposed by the crown— and they were sanctions, despite their claims of acting for the good of the Seven Kingdoms— had created very negative feelings among the northern population. My father's friendship with the king and the Hand had been affected. Despite my father's affection for both, he could not defend them in front of the other northern lords without being affected.
The North was different from the South; lords preferred to be direct, as there was no time to waste on such matters. Thus, in the great assembly that followed the delegation's visit (over a year ago), the other lords and ladies were very displeased with the crown's decision. After five months, we received the first royal order: the taxes we paid to the capital would increase by 32% from what was previously paid before the delegation's visit.
Calls for the head of the Lannisters and the Master of Coin were the only things heard in the great hall of Winterfell for a couple of days. The lords— particularly those who had started earning extra gold due to our new industries— were the most upset. Lord Umber and Lord Karstark were the most vocal in the discussion.
Alcohol did not help at all, ending with Lord Umber questioning my father's decision to accept these new taxes instead of responding with war. My father quickly silenced the lord, as he had their respect. The worst part was that the other lords around also agreed with Jon Umber and wanted Southern Blood to calm down.
After some concessions and my father's promise to do everything possible to resolve the situation, the rest of the lords fell silent. We had the advantage that, not being winter, the North had become almost self-sufficient within a year. Thus, the other houses calmed down enough.
Food had become abundant, there were more guards than had existed in the written history of our kingdom, and the population was happy, sleeping in warm places with full stomachs. For the first time in decades, the population did not fear not being able to feed their children.
The North was stronger than ever, but the lords knew it was not enough to defeat the rest of the Seven Kingdoms, and it was too early to decide to separate from the rest of the realms. Therefore, the decision was made to wait a few years before making a decision.
My opportunity would come soon. Northerners were hard to offend, but we also forget slights slowly. Therefore, when the Lannisters take power in the capital, I would have the support of the other lords to claim the Iron Throne or our independence. We had already heard the news of a deserter from the Night's Watch, so I was just waiting for them to capture him and for my father to take us to the execution to know that the canon had begun.
In the War of the Five Kings, the North had sent approximately twenty thousand soldiers in support of the original Robb. Now, with all the effort we had put into the North's security in these five years, we could double that number without counting the soldiers who would remain in the North for its protection. We had focused on strengthening the North for any invasion, but since the South had no available spies, the news did not reach them; so, they only heard rumors they did not believe due to their perception of the Northerners.
Every Northerner was upset with the crown's decisions, from peasants and merchants to the lords of the great houses. Therefore, their loyalty to House Stark had increased like never before, as it was thanks to us that they could live without worries now. Unfortunately, I had to involve myself significantly with different lords to demonstrate that the Starks should be feared and respected.
Secret meetings with the lords who supported my view of the situation and knew that I would do whatever was necessary for the good of our kingdom consolidated their support for me. Lord Umber, Lord Karstark, Lord Hornwood, and Lady Mormont were the lords who, despite being unquestionably loyal to my father, also knew that if we wanted the North to come out of a war smelling like roses, my father was not the commander we wanted for our armies.
My father, for all his virtues, was very blind regarding his honor and would be the type of commander who would let his enemies go just because they surrendered, not realizing they would wait to stab him in the back.
The political situation was less complicated in the North, and with my powers, I had the advantage of being able to investigate any house without them realizing, so I could be sure of their loyalties.
While I was lost in my thoughts, a hurried knock sounded at the door of the solar.
"Enter," my father said authoritatively.
Ser Rodrick hurried in but was happy with the news he brought.
"My lord, the deserter from the Night's Watch has been captured," said the knight, standing at the entrance, knowing how his liege would respond.
"Good," my father said before standing up. "Prepare the horses, Rodrick. We will leave in ten minutes and send a servant to get Bran ready. It's time he sees the reality of our world."
My mother frowned before intervening. "Are you sure, Ned? Bran is just a boy."
"At his age, my father had already taken me to my first execution. Relations with the rest of the realms are not so good. Bran needs to stop being coddled, Cat," my father said with understanding but certainty in his decision.
"I'll be with him if he needs comfort, Mother. As will Jon and Theon," I said with a smile before becoming serious. "For days, I've been having bad premonitions. I think it would be best if Bran comes with us."
My father and Ser Rodrick grew serious upon hearing what I said. Over the years, I had used my supposed premonitions to explain knowledge I should not have, so the people of Winterfell took it seriously when I said such things.
"Do you know what they are about, dear?" asked Catelyn worriedly.
I simply shook my head and, hugging her, withdrew to prepare for the journey.
Writing on a piece of parchment, I composed a message for Jon, explaining the situation and instructing him to prepare. Tying it to the leg of a beetle, I directed it to where Jon was to deliver it. This was a practice I had with him, partly for ease of communication and partly because his reactions were quite amusing.
Jon never adapted to my insects, though he no longer feared or disgusted them as he did at first; he still felt strange when I used them.
Taking a light armor from the armory and a simple sword, I headed towards the entrance of Winterfell, where the rest of the party was waiting.
Smiling at Sansa and Arya, I hugged them quickly and ran my hand through Rickon's hair, who was in my mother's arms.
Sansa became second in command after Mother when my father, Jon, and I were away from the castle. Convincing the maester to teach her about the responsibilities of a lord was relatively easy— just a few ideas about how it could be beneficial, and the maester took care of her education.
Sansa was less on board at first until I explained that no man worth having would want a decorative wife, and knowing how to help her husband would be a great advantage for her.
"Take care of the castle while we're away," I said with a small smile, which all four returned affectionately. "And make sure Arya doesn't burn down a room," I joked.
Arya pouted at me. "It was only once, Robb. And I've already apologized for my actions," she said, her eyes looking at the ground.
"I'm just teasing you, little sister," I said with a kiss on her head. "I trust you'll protect Mother and the rest of the family if something happens," I whispered in her ear.
"Yes!" Arya shouted excitedly while reaching for a dagger hidden at her waist, a gift from Jon and me.
Taking her hand before she revealed the weapon to avoid my mother's scolding, I joined the group to start the journey.
Nodding to my father, he motioned for the rest of the guards to join us, and with haste, we started the trip to the execution.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
A new day began at Winterfell Castle. The sound of metal against metal could be heard from outside. Soldiers were training, and blacksmiths used their hammers to create more tools and weapons.
I found myself once again with my father and mother in the Lord of Winterfell's solar, a warm scene of family affection. These years had been tough for us, but each member of the Stark family fulfilled their duties to help others whenever possible.
The sanctions imposed by the crown— and they were sanctions, despite their claims of acting for the good of the Seven Kingdoms— had created very negative feelings among the northern population. My father's friendship with the king and the Hand had been affected. Despite my father's affection for both, he could not defend them in front of the other northern lords without being affected.
The North was different from the South; lords preferred to be direct, as there was no time to waste on such matters. Thus, in the great assembly that followed the delegation's visit (over a year ago), the other lords and ladies were very displeased with the crown's decision. After five months, we received the first royal order: the taxes we paid to the capital would increase by 32% from what was previously paid before the delegation's visit.
Calls for the head of the Lannisters and the Master of Coin were the only things heard in the great hall of Winterfell for a couple of days. The lords— particularly those who had started earning extra gold due to our new industries— were the most upset. Lord Umber and Lord Karstark were the most vocal in the discussion.
Alcohol did not help at all, ending with Lord Umber questioning my father's decision to accept these new taxes instead of responding with war. My father quickly silenced the lord, as he had their respect. The worst part was that the other lords around also agreed with Jon Umber and wanted Southern Blood to calm down.
After some concessions and my father's promise to do everything possible to resolve the situation, the rest of the lords fell silent. We had the advantage that, not being winter, the North had become almost self-sufficient within a year. Thus, the other houses calmed down enough.
Food had become abundant, there were more guards than had existed in the written history of our kingdom, and the population was happy, sleeping in warm places with full stomachs. For the first time in decades, the population did not fear not being able to feed their children.
The North was stronger than ever, but the lords knew it was not enough to defeat the rest of the Seven Kingdoms, and it was too early to decide to separate from the rest of the realms. Therefore, the decision was made to wait a few years before making a decision.
My opportunity would come soon. Northerners were hard to offend, but we also forget slights slowly. Therefore, when the Lannisters take power in the capital, I would have the support of the other lords to claim the Iron Throne or our independence. We had already heard the news of a deserter from the Night's Watch, so I was just waiting for them to capture him and for my father to take us to the execution to know that the canon had begun.
In the War of the Five Kings, the North had sent approximately twenty thousand soldiers in support of the original Robb. Now, with all the effort we had put into the North's security in these five years, we could double that number without counting the soldiers who would remain in the North for its protection. We had focused on strengthening the North for any invasion, but since the South had no available spies, the news did not reach them; so, they only heard rumors they did not believe due to their perception of the Northerners.
Every Northerner was upset with the crown's decisions, from peasants and merchants to the lords of the great houses. Therefore, their loyalty to House Stark had increased like never before, as it was thanks to us that they could live without worries now. Unfortunately, I had to involve myself significantly with different lords to demonstrate that the Starks should be feared and respected.
Secret meetings with the lords who supported my view of the situation and knew that I would do whatever was necessary for the good of our kingdom consolidated their support for me. Lord Umber, Lord Karstark, Lord Hornwood, and Lady Mormont were the lords who, despite being unquestionably loyal to my father, also knew that if we wanted the North to come out of a war smelling like roses, my father was not the commander we wanted for our armies.
My father, for all his virtues, was very blind regarding his honor and would be the type of commander who would let his enemies go just because they surrendered, not realizing they would wait to stab him in the back.
The political situation was less complicated in the North, and with my powers, I had the advantage of being able to investigate any house without them realizing, so I could be sure of their loyalties.
While I was lost in my thoughts, a hurried knock sounded at the door of the solar.
"Enter," my father said authoritatively.
Ser Rodrick hurried in but was happy with the news he brought.
"My lord, the deserter from the Night's Watch has been captured," said the knight, standing at the entrance, knowing how his liege would respond.
"Good," my father said before standing up. "Prepare the horses, Rodrick. We will leave in ten minutes and send a servant to get Bran ready. It's time he sees the reality of our world."
My mother frowned before intervening. "Are you sure, Ned? Bran is just a boy."
"At his age, my father had already taken me to my first execution. Relations with the rest of the realms are not so good. Bran needs to stop being coddled, Cat," my father said with understanding but certainty in his decision.
"I'll be with him if he needs comfort, Mother. As will Jon and Theon," I said with a smile before becoming serious. "For days, I've been having bad premonitions. I think it would be best if Bran comes with us."
My father and Ser Rodrick grew serious upon hearing what I said. Over the years, I had used my supposed premonitions to explain knowledge I should not have, so the people of Winterfell took it seriously when I said such things.
"Do you know what they are about, dear?" asked Catelyn worriedly.
I simply shook my head and, hugging her, withdrew to prepare for the journey.
Writing on a piece of parchment, I composed a message for Jon, explaining the situation and instructing him to prepare. Tying it to the leg of a beetle, I directed it to where Jon was to deliver it. This was a practice I had with him, partly for ease of communication and partly because his reactions were quite amusing.
Jon never adapted to my insects, though he no longer feared or disgusted them as he did at first; he still felt strange when I used them.
Taking a light armor from the armory and a simple sword, I headed towards the entrance of Winterfell, where the rest of the party was waiting.
Smiling at Sansa and Arya, I hugged them quickly and ran my hand through Rickon's hair, who was in my mother's arms.
Sansa became second in command after Mother when my father, Jon, and I were away from the castle. Convincing the maester to teach her about the responsibilities of a lord was relatively easy— just a few ideas about how it could be beneficial, and the maester took care of her education.
Sansa was less on board at first until I explained that no man worth having would want a decorative wife, and knowing how to help her husband would be a great advantage for her.
"Take care of the castle while we're away," I said with a small smile, which all four returned affectionately. "And make sure Arya doesn't burn down a room," I joked.
Arya pouted at me. "It was only once, Robb. And I've already apologized for my actions," she said, her eyes looking at the ground.
"I'm just teasing you, little sister," I said with a kiss on her head. "I trust you'll protect Mother and the rest of the family if something happens," I whispered in her ear.
"Yes!" Arya shouted excitedly while reaching for a dagger hidden at her waist, a gift from Jon and me.
Taking her hand before she revealed the weapon to avoid my mother's scolding, I joined the group to start the journey.
Nodding to my father, he motioned for the rest of the guards to join us, and with haste, we started the trip to the execution.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 31: Execution and messages.
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Robb Stark.
As we galloped towards the place where they had the Night's Watch deserter detained, my father explained to Bran how the situation worked and why it was necessary to execute him.
"Why is it necessary to execute him, father?" Bran asked while tilting his head.
"He made an oath, son. And by becoming a deserter, he broke it and needs to pay for that," my father explained.
"But what if he had his reasons?" asked Bran innocently.
"It does not matter, son. He broke his oath and deserves death; a man cannot live without honor," he answered with his face set in a grim line.
Bran nodded, lowering his eyes, thinking he had made Father mad with all his questions.
My father sighed, and getting his horse closer to Bran's, he rubbed his head affectionately. "This is no easy decision, my son. But I am the one who has to give him justice; it is my duty as the Lord Paramount, and Robb will inherit this when he is older."
"I understand, father," Bran said. "Will you at least ask him why he ran away from the Watch?"
My father kept silent for a moment before answering. "Yes, my son. From what I've heard, he was a good lad and was with the Night's Watch for a while. He deserves some last words, at the very least."
Keeping our silence after a brief lull in the conversation, I got closer to Bran to keep him company. Jon, knowing what I was doing, did the same on the other side.
"Everything will be fine, Bran," Jon said with a small smile.
"You just need to pay attention while Father delivers justice. He will know if you look away," I warned him.
"Does he deserve death, Robb?" Bran asked me.
"I don't know, little brother, but even if he doesn't, he will die today," I said after a moment, before adding, "And it is our job to find out and maybe do what he asks of us before the execution."
Before long, we arrived where a bunch of the Night's Watch brothers were in a circle, and in the middle of it was Willas, the deserter.
Father dismounted his horse, and the rest of us followed his example. Getting closer, we heard them asking why he did it.
"They were there! I swear, I saw the White Walkers; they decimated our group," he tried to explain.
His only answer was the jeers of his ex-companions, saying that they didn't exist and he was lying to get out of the execution.
My father and Ser Rodrik didn't believe him, so they proceeded with the execution.
Theon grabbed Ice, the ancestral Valyrian steel greatsword my family had owned for generations, and he gave it to my father.
"Do you have any last words, Willas of the Night's Watch?" he asked while raising his sword.
"I swear I saw them, milord. They are real and awake, but I know you won't believe me. Just tell my family that I died with honor," he said with his head held high, looking directly into my father's eyes.
Before he could decapitate him, I stepped forward and asked my father to give me a moment.
"What exactly did you see, Willas? Explain in detail, and I'll make sure your family hears about your deeds."
A couple of the Night's Watch members got pissed that I even wanted to waste their time with nonsense.
"Why do you want to ask this coward about his lies?" asked one.
"Silence," I said calmly, only giving him a look that made him nervous before going back to Willas.
"Don't tell me to..." the Night's Watch member started moving, but before he could get closer to me, Jon already had a dagger across his throat.
"Let him be, Jon. I'm sure he learned to keep silent before I do something," I told Jon with a shake of my head.
I had made sure Jon didn't get only the embellishments about the present Night's Watch; they did deserve respect for protecting us from the wildlings, but that didn't mean most of them were there just to escape executions and were scummy characters.
The Night's Watch member took a couple of steps back, dragging his hand across his neck where he could feel a thin line made by the dagger, and looked horrified at Jon.
"Start explaining, Willas. You will die today, I can't change that, but that doesn't mean you have to die like a coward. If you truly saw what you said, I'll make sure that your family hears about this," I told Willas calmly.
"Thank you, milord. I swear I'm not lying. The White Walkers are north of the Wall. When we were in the forest, I got away from my team, and I saw a bunch of body parts thrown in a circle, but they were way too orderly for it to be possible an animal attack or something, and wildlings don't do that."
"Continue," I asked him.
"Then..." he stammered while gathering his courage. "I got scared to go alone... it felt wrong to be there, so I went back to my group to tell them so that we could investigate together."
"And then what?" asked Jon with an eyebrow raised.
"We went back, but the bodies were gone, there was no blood either, and the snow was pouring like something I've never seen," he stopped for a moment. "They called me a coward, but I was sure I wasn't hallucinating.
"Then we heard something, someone was standing behind us; he appeared out of nowhere," he gasped, his trembling showing that he was scared of the memory.
"That thing destroyed Coleen. He grasped his throat and ripped it off with his bare hands."
"What else happened, Willas?" I probed him.
"The rest of us attacked him, but we couldn't harm him," he kept trembling. "Jonas cut his arm off, but that thing wasn't even alive, I swear," he shouted.
"He didn't seem to feel that and kept fighting like he didn't lose an arm a moment prior, we stabbed it but that thing didn't even budge," he was spitting now, his rage clear for all to see.
"That thing is the enemy of the living, it's an anomaly. I swear that I'm speaking the truth, milord," he ended up whispering.
Everyone present was silent. Willas was speaking and showing signs that he truly believed what he saw. The pain, stress, and fear were too real, but even then, a few people started shouting that it was a lie.
I nodded at him and mouthed that I believed him. Hopefully, he would die knowing that I would keep my promise. He shed a few tears before looking back at my father and telling him that he had said everything he could.
My father was somewhat disturbed by the deserter's tale. He took Ice back, raised it into the air, and then brought it down.
Willas's head rolled for a moment before coming to a stop. His face was set with grim satisfaction, not fear of death. At that moment, I regretted that I couldn't save him, but I would make sure his family was rewarded for this.
"Ptui!," one of the guards spat on the ground. "Good riddance. That's the end every deserter deserves."
My father handed Ice to Theon to clean and secure before walking toward us.
"What do you think of this, Robb?" he asked me seriously.
"I don't know, Father, but I don't like this," I told him, as it wouldn't change anything if I told him the truth.
My father nodded after a moment before looking at Bran. "I'm proud of you, Bran. You kept your composure until the end."
"Do you think he was telling the truth, Father? About the White Walkers?" Bran asked timidly and somewhat scared.
My father was silent for a moment. "No, son. I think it was a ruse. The wildlings are known for committing atrocities; I wouldn't put something like this past them."
Bran nodded in understanding, having heard of the things wildlings have done when they manage to get past the Wall.
"Are we going back home now?" he asked after a while.
"Yes, son. We're going back. Everyone, get ready to depart," my father said.
While we were on our way back, I continued using my powers to pinpoint the location of the direwolves. Seeing that we would reach them soon, I was ecstatic. I had always loved the direwolves in the series and, to be honest I cried over the fate of some of them. I promised myself that those deaths wouldn't happen here.
"Lord Stark, there's something ahead," a vanguard said.
As we got closer, I saw the corpse of the mother, feeling a pang in my heart at the sight.
"By the Old Gods…" Ser Rodrik mumbled, "There hasn't been any direwolf south of the Wall for years. And this one was killed by a stag."
"And it seems it isn't the only one now," I said, cradling a direwolf pup. I couldn't deny feeling excited to see one in real life. I grabbed the largest of the pups, took it into my arms, and then slowly picked up the others.
"Help me with this, Jon," I asked him.
Jon moved closer, and I kept taking the pups and handing them to him. After a while, I had extracted all of them from the mother. Even Ghost was in Jon's arms, and I could see that he was already in love with him.
"Their mother died; they should be put down," Theon said, and some guards nodded in agreement.
"No one will harm the pups," I said with a level of emotion I didn't even know I was capable of. My bugs sensed my emotions and started buzzing in response.
Everyone became alert to the strange sound, and the only ones who knew about my powers looked at me oddly.
I rubbed the back of my neck sheepishly. Maybe hormones were already affecting this body, and I had become somewhat emotional.
Ordering my insects to disperse and trying to look innocent, I said, "That was weird… We should get out of the forest fast, I don't want to find out what that was." I encouraged my horse to start moving.
"What about the pups?" Ser Rodrik asked.
"What else? One pup for each Stark child. We'll take care of them, and they will be our companions. They are, after all, our sigil," I said with finality as if asking them to drop the topic.
After a brief moment, everyone started moving, and my father approached me.
"I always wonder how you command this level of respect from our guards, Robb," he said with a smile before frowning but then chuckling. "It's a shame it won't help you escape your mother's wrath."
"I'll take care of her," I said confidently before frowning. "At least I hope so."
Winterfell at Dawn
Arriving at Winterfell with the rest in tow, we found the rest of the family waiting for us. Sansa was smiling demurely, Arya was jumping with excitement, eager to hear about our adventure, and Rickon was in my mother's arms, trying to wriggle free.
My mother had a small frown on her face, showing that she was preoccupied with something, but she managed a strained smile to welcome us.
"Winterfell is yours, my husband," she said with a small gesture. Once all the formalities were done, everyone gathered around us, but they all stopped when they saw the movement in the bundles of cloth Jon and I were carrying.
"What is that?" Arya asked excitedly, jumping on the spot.
"The Old Gods have sent us some companions," I said dramatically before opening the bundle.
Six small heads popped up and started wagging their tails. Excited squeals erupted from the girls, and even Rickon moved closer to them.
My mother grabbed the scruff of my neck while pretending to hug me.
"We'll talk later, young man."
"In private, I hope," I said nervously.
"You can thank me later for that, but we need to speak as a family about one more thing." She said this jokingly at first but finished seriously.
I nodded and waited for them to choose which pup they wanted. Maybe it was fate, but each one chose the same as in the series.
"Follow us, Robb," my father told me after finishing a hushed conversation with Catelyn.
As we walked in silence to the solar, I wondered how my father would react to the news. In this life, his relationship with the King and the Hand was strained due to their decisions. I wondered if his "honor" for their friendship would prevail or if he would stay loyal to the North if the King asked for his help.
When we arrived at the solar, Mother served a large measure of vodka in one glass and two cups of watered wine for herself and me. After giving them to us, she took a seat.
"I hate to be the bearer of bad news, my love, but the Hand of the King, Jon Arryn, is dead," she said, sad to be the one delivering the news but with some apathy because she truly disliked him due to the sanctions, even though he was her sister's husband.
My father drank the entire glass of vodka in one shot before standing up and walking in circles. He was mourning his foster father.
"There is more, isn't there, Mother?" I asked.
"No, it's not," she said, pursing her lips. "The King is bringing a royal caravan to Winterfell. And both of you know why he would do this."
"Fucking hypocrites," I said with a frown. "They start by taking our money, and now they want to take the lord of our house? Well, fuck them," I snarled.
"Robb…" my father began. "It would be a great honor. Maybe they now think differently about the sanctions, and making me the Hand is their way of apologizing."
I looked at him with the most deadpan expression I could manage. "I truly find it concerning if you believe that, Father."
"I'm sorry, my love, but Jon is right. They need you right now, and they are going to ask for your help even after all they've done to the North," said my mother, shaking her head.
"We'll hear what Robert has to say. We need to prepare to receive the royal family either way; it's not like we can tell them they are not welcome," said my father with a defeated sigh.
"And send a letter to all the lords who own lands near the Kingsroad to be on their best behavior. We know they are not happy; let's make sure they remember to be on their best behavior," I told him seriously, knowing some northern lords might be tempted to tell the King to go to hell.
"I'll go to the Maester right now," my father said, nodding and starting toward Lewin's room.
"He seems excited," I told my mother. "Hopefully, he will think of the North and not his sense of honor."
Catelyn shook her head. "I wouldn't bet gold on it, dear."
Getting closer to me to embrace me, she said, "For your father, his honor is the most important thing, I would hope for him to tell the king a resounding no, but we both know that not might be possible, from what I've heard of the king, he does not ask, he commands people to do things"
I let out a sigh while kissing her brow, "Well fix everything as a family. I hope he only asks for that."
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
As we galloped towards the place where they had the Night's Watch deserter detained, my father explained to Bran how the situation worked and why it was necessary to execute him.
"Why is it necessary to execute him, father?" Bran asked while tilting his head.
"He made an oath, son. And by becoming a deserter, he broke it and needs to pay for that," my father explained.
"But what if he had his reasons?" asked Bran innocently.
"It does not matter, son. He broke his oath and deserves death; a man cannot live without honor," he answered with his face set in a grim line.
Bran nodded, lowering his eyes, thinking he had made Father mad with all his questions.
My father sighed, and getting his horse closer to Bran's, he rubbed his head affectionately. "This is no easy decision, my son. But I am the one who has to give him justice; it is my duty as the Lord Paramount, and Robb will inherit this when he is older."
"I understand, father," Bran said. "Will you at least ask him why he ran away from the Watch?"
My father kept silent for a moment before answering. "Yes, my son. From what I've heard, he was a good lad and was with the Night's Watch for a while. He deserves some last words, at the very least."
Keeping our silence after a brief lull in the conversation, I got closer to Bran to keep him company. Jon, knowing what I was doing, did the same on the other side.
"Everything will be fine, Bran," Jon said with a small smile.
"You just need to pay attention while Father delivers justice. He will know if you look away," I warned him.
"Does he deserve death, Robb?" Bran asked me.
"I don't know, little brother, but even if he doesn't, he will die today," I said after a moment, before adding, "And it is our job to find out and maybe do what he asks of us before the execution."
Before long, we arrived where a bunch of the Night's Watch brothers were in a circle, and in the middle of it was Willas, the deserter.
Father dismounted his horse, and the rest of us followed his example. Getting closer, we heard them asking why he did it.
"They were there! I swear, I saw the White Walkers; they decimated our group," he tried to explain.
His only answer was the jeers of his ex-companions, saying that they didn't exist and he was lying to get out of the execution.
My father and Ser Rodrik didn't believe him, so they proceeded with the execution.
Theon grabbed Ice, the ancestral Valyrian steel greatsword my family had owned for generations, and he gave it to my father.
"Do you have any last words, Willas of the Night's Watch?" he asked while raising his sword.
"I swear I saw them, milord. They are real and awake, but I know you won't believe me. Just tell my family that I died with honor," he said with his head held high, looking directly into my father's eyes.
Before he could decapitate him, I stepped forward and asked my father to give me a moment.
"What exactly did you see, Willas? Explain in detail, and I'll make sure your family hears about your deeds."
A couple of the Night's Watch members got pissed that I even wanted to waste their time with nonsense.
"Why do you want to ask this coward about his lies?" asked one.
"Silence," I said calmly, only giving him a look that made him nervous before going back to Willas.
"Don't tell me to..." the Night's Watch member started moving, but before he could get closer to me, Jon already had a dagger across his throat.
"Let him be, Jon. I'm sure he learned to keep silent before I do something," I told Jon with a shake of my head.
I had made sure Jon didn't get only the embellishments about the present Night's Watch; they did deserve respect for protecting us from the wildlings, but that didn't mean most of them were there just to escape executions and were scummy characters.
The Night's Watch member took a couple of steps back, dragging his hand across his neck where he could feel a thin line made by the dagger, and looked horrified at Jon.
"Start explaining, Willas. You will die today, I can't change that, but that doesn't mean you have to die like a coward. If you truly saw what you said, I'll make sure that your family hears about this," I told Willas calmly.
"Thank you, milord. I swear I'm not lying. The White Walkers are north of the Wall. When we were in the forest, I got away from my team, and I saw a bunch of body parts thrown in a circle, but they were way too orderly for it to be possible an animal attack or something, and wildlings don't do that."
"Continue," I asked him.
"Then..." he stammered while gathering his courage. "I got scared to go alone... it felt wrong to be there, so I went back to my group to tell them so that we could investigate together."
"And then what?" asked Jon with an eyebrow raised.
"We went back, but the bodies were gone, there was no blood either, and the snow was pouring like something I've never seen," he stopped for a moment. "They called me a coward, but I was sure I wasn't hallucinating.
"Then we heard something, someone was standing behind us; he appeared out of nowhere," he gasped, his trembling showing that he was scared of the memory.
"That thing destroyed Coleen. He grasped his throat and ripped it off with his bare hands."
"What else happened, Willas?" I probed him.
"The rest of us attacked him, but we couldn't harm him," he kept trembling. "Jonas cut his arm off, but that thing wasn't even alive, I swear," he shouted.
"He didn't seem to feel that and kept fighting like he didn't lose an arm a moment prior, we stabbed it but that thing didn't even budge," he was spitting now, his rage clear for all to see.
"That thing is the enemy of the living, it's an anomaly. I swear that I'm speaking the truth, milord," he ended up whispering.
Everyone present was silent. Willas was speaking and showing signs that he truly believed what he saw. The pain, stress, and fear were too real, but even then, a few people started shouting that it was a lie.
I nodded at him and mouthed that I believed him. Hopefully, he would die knowing that I would keep my promise. He shed a few tears before looking back at my father and telling him that he had said everything he could.
My father was somewhat disturbed by the deserter's tale. He took Ice back, raised it into the air, and then brought it down.
Willas's head rolled for a moment before coming to a stop. His face was set with grim satisfaction, not fear of death. At that moment, I regretted that I couldn't save him, but I would make sure his family was rewarded for this.
"Ptui!," one of the guards spat on the ground. "Good riddance. That's the end every deserter deserves."
My father handed Ice to Theon to clean and secure before walking toward us.
"What do you think of this, Robb?" he asked me seriously.
"I don't know, Father, but I don't like this," I told him, as it wouldn't change anything if I told him the truth.
My father nodded after a moment before looking at Bran. "I'm proud of you, Bran. You kept your composure until the end."
"Do you think he was telling the truth, Father? About the White Walkers?" Bran asked timidly and somewhat scared.
My father was silent for a moment. "No, son. I think it was a ruse. The wildlings are known for committing atrocities; I wouldn't put something like this past them."
Bran nodded in understanding, having heard of the things wildlings have done when they manage to get past the Wall.
"Are we going back home now?" he asked after a while.
"Yes, son. We're going back. Everyone, get ready to depart," my father said.
While we were on our way back, I continued using my powers to pinpoint the location of the direwolves. Seeing that we would reach them soon, I was ecstatic. I had always loved the direwolves in the series and, to be honest I cried over the fate of some of them. I promised myself that those deaths wouldn't happen here.
"Lord Stark, there's something ahead," a vanguard said.
As we got closer, I saw the corpse of the mother, feeling a pang in my heart at the sight.
"By the Old Gods…" Ser Rodrik mumbled, "There hasn't been any direwolf south of the Wall for years. And this one was killed by a stag."
"And it seems it isn't the only one now," I said, cradling a direwolf pup. I couldn't deny feeling excited to see one in real life. I grabbed the largest of the pups, took it into my arms, and then slowly picked up the others.
"Help me with this, Jon," I asked him.
Jon moved closer, and I kept taking the pups and handing them to him. After a while, I had extracted all of them from the mother. Even Ghost was in Jon's arms, and I could see that he was already in love with him.
"Their mother died; they should be put down," Theon said, and some guards nodded in agreement.
"No one will harm the pups," I said with a level of emotion I didn't even know I was capable of. My bugs sensed my emotions and started buzzing in response.
Everyone became alert to the strange sound, and the only ones who knew about my powers looked at me oddly.
I rubbed the back of my neck sheepishly. Maybe hormones were already affecting this body, and I had become somewhat emotional.
Ordering my insects to disperse and trying to look innocent, I said, "That was weird… We should get out of the forest fast, I don't want to find out what that was." I encouraged my horse to start moving.
"What about the pups?" Ser Rodrik asked.
"What else? One pup for each Stark child. We'll take care of them, and they will be our companions. They are, after all, our sigil," I said with finality as if asking them to drop the topic.
After a brief moment, everyone started moving, and my father approached me.
"I always wonder how you command this level of respect from our guards, Robb," he said with a smile before frowning but then chuckling. "It's a shame it won't help you escape your mother's wrath."
"I'll take care of her," I said confidently before frowning. "At least I hope so."
Winterfell at Dawn
Arriving at Winterfell with the rest in tow, we found the rest of the family waiting for us. Sansa was smiling demurely, Arya was jumping with excitement, eager to hear about our adventure, and Rickon was in my mother's arms, trying to wriggle free.
My mother had a small frown on her face, showing that she was preoccupied with something, but she managed a strained smile to welcome us.
"Winterfell is yours, my husband," she said with a small gesture. Once all the formalities were done, everyone gathered around us, but they all stopped when they saw the movement in the bundles of cloth Jon and I were carrying.
"What is that?" Arya asked excitedly, jumping on the spot.
"The Old Gods have sent us some companions," I said dramatically before opening the bundle.
Six small heads popped up and started wagging their tails. Excited squeals erupted from the girls, and even Rickon moved closer to them.
My mother grabbed the scruff of my neck while pretending to hug me.
"We'll talk later, young man."
"In private, I hope," I said nervously.
"You can thank me later for that, but we need to speak as a family about one more thing." She said this jokingly at first but finished seriously.
I nodded and waited for them to choose which pup they wanted. Maybe it was fate, but each one chose the same as in the series.
"Follow us, Robb," my father told me after finishing a hushed conversation with Catelyn.
As we walked in silence to the solar, I wondered how my father would react to the news. In this life, his relationship with the King and the Hand was strained due to their decisions. I wondered if his "honor" for their friendship would prevail or if he would stay loyal to the North if the King asked for his help.
When we arrived at the solar, Mother served a large measure of vodka in one glass and two cups of watered wine for herself and me. After giving them to us, she took a seat.
"I hate to be the bearer of bad news, my love, but the Hand of the King, Jon Arryn, is dead," she said, sad to be the one delivering the news but with some apathy because she truly disliked him due to the sanctions, even though he was her sister's husband.
My father drank the entire glass of vodka in one shot before standing up and walking in circles. He was mourning his foster father.
"There is more, isn't there, Mother?" I asked.
"No, it's not," she said, pursing her lips. "The King is bringing a royal caravan to Winterfell. And both of you know why he would do this."
"Fucking hypocrites," I said with a frown. "They start by taking our money, and now they want to take the lord of our house? Well, fuck them," I snarled.
"Robb…" my father began. "It would be a great honor. Maybe they now think differently about the sanctions, and making me the Hand is their way of apologizing."
I looked at him with the most deadpan expression I could manage. "I truly find it concerning if you believe that, Father."
"I'm sorry, my love, but Jon is right. They need you right now, and they are going to ask for your help even after all they've done to the North," said my mother, shaking her head.
"We'll hear what Robert has to say. We need to prepare to receive the royal family either way; it's not like we can tell them they are not welcome," said my father with a defeated sigh.
"And send a letter to all the lords who own lands near the Kingsroad to be on their best behavior. We know they are not happy; let's make sure they remember to be on their best behavior," I told him seriously, knowing some northern lords might be tempted to tell the King to go to hell.
"I'll go to the Maester right now," my father said, nodding and starting toward Lewin's room.
"He seems excited," I told my mother. "Hopefully, he will think of the North and not his sense of honor."
Catelyn shook her head. "I wouldn't bet gold on it, dear."
Getting closer to me to embrace me, she said, "For your father, his honor is the most important thing, I would hope for him to tell the king a resounding no, but we both know that not might be possible, from what I've heard of the king, he does not ask, he commands people to do things"
I let out a sigh while kissing her brow, "Well fix everything as a family. I hope he only asks for that."
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 32: Arrivals and offers.
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Winterfell.
Preparing for the arrival of the royal caravan was more tedious than difficult. With all the gold we had saved over the years, despite Littlefinger's and the Lannisters' attempts to diminish it, we had enough to give them a grand welcome.
Aside from waiting, there wasn't much I could do, as most of the logistics were handled by Mother and Sansa, who were most knowledgeable about what the royal party might require. Taking extra food from our supplies wouldn't hurt, as they didn't bring many people.
According to the message we received last night, the royal caravan consisted of eighty people, mostly guards, with the rest being personal servants and the smallest group being the royal family.
Taking my time, I walked toward my father, who was in the Godswood trying to calm himself. He probably needed to pray and seek wisdom. There was only one reason for the King to come personally to Winterfell, and he didn't know how to address it. The most obvious response would be to refuse the King's request, but that wouldn't be easy, and he probably wouldn't do it. My father had been taught to live with honor, and if his friend, the King, were to ask for his help like in the series, he would likely go with him, leaving the North in my hands.
Since I arrived in this world, I knew I wouldn't be able to change his decision to go to King's Landing. Still, I could change enough to make it easier to spirit him away alone, so the betrothal of Sansa and the bastard Joffrey couldn't happen. This was the most pressing matter for me to discuss with him before the arrival of the royal family.
Heading directly toward him with my mother in tow was easy, thanks to my insects pinpointing his location. Seeing him torn with his thoughts sent a pang to my heart. I'm sure he considered different ways to act, but none seemed entirely possible.
"Father, there are things we need to discuss before their arrival," I said directly, believing that being blunt was the best approach.
"Yes, we must plan," my father said, but I could see he had already decided how he would proceed.
"Have you already made your decision, Father?" I asked knowingly.
My father looked torn for a moment, gazing at me and my mother before finally speaking. "Yes, son. I have. I will follow Robert to King's Landing."
I shook my head. I didn't agree with him, but there was little I could do to change this.
"I understand, Father," I told him. "It must have been difficult to make this decision."
"Aye, it was. But I can leave knowing that the North is in capable hands, Robb. Continue making me proud," my father said, patting my head.
"I will, Father," I nodded firmly.
"What about the rest of the family, Ned?" Mother asked.
"I will make time to return, dear," he told her.
There were many tears in my mother's eyes as she nodded, but she understood better than anyone how my father thought.
After giving them some time in semi-privacy, I cleared my throat to attract their attention.
"There's one thing I want to discuss right now, Father," I said.
"What is it, son? If I can, I'll do whatever I can to make it happen," he answered.
"The King was obsessed with Aunt Lyanna, wasn't he?" I asked, taking a seat near the weirwood and touching it. I always felt at peace being near one, and it was a welcome sensation.
"She was his intended, son. He went to war for her, as you know," my father nodded.
"But she didn't feel the same way," I added.
Father looked me straight in the eyes before sighing and agreeing. "Aye, she disliked him and was very angry with your grandfather for a long time."
"It must have been difficult for you, Father. That your little sister didn't want to marry your best friend," I said lightly.
"Where are you going with this, Robb?" he asked impatiently.
"If the King asks for the hand of any of my sisters or mine in a betrothal with his family, I want you to tell him that you won't arrange marriages for us," I said seriously. "I don't want history to repeat itself, and if the prince is anything like his father, I would kill him to protect my sisters' feelings."
My father looked grim. "That's traitorous talk, Robb."
"I would say the same to his face, so please do this for me. I don't ask much from you, but I won't budge on this. I want them to marry for love, and I want the same for myself. The North is strong; there's no need for arranged marriages for our family," I concluded.
"I'll discuss it later with your mother and Luwin, but if it's possible, I will make it happen," he nodded slowly.
"That's all I ask, Father."
One Month Later
Waiting with the rest of my family for the arrival of the royal caravan was nerve-wracking. Thanks to the changes I made, Bran and Arya were somewhat calmer than their canon counterparts, so they were with us, waiting for the Royal caravan.
As we saw the first few guards leading the caravan enter the courtyard, I felt myself getting excited at the start of one of my favorite series ever. When the King arrived and dismounted his horse, everyone was silent.
Due to the Crown's actions, they weren't greeted with much enthusiasm by the populace. They were always respected, but there wasn't a palpable excitement at seeing the King of the Seven Kingdoms in our ancestral home.
The King approached and noticed that people didn't look at him with devotion, but he ignored it and walked up to my father.
The rest of the royal family approached in the same manner. Joffrey, with his usual attitude of preferring to be elsewhere, cast glances at Sansa, who completely ignored him. Thank the old gods that the new education she had received from the maester and the new septa had kept her from fantasizing about a fictional romance with someone she didn't know.
Myrcella and Tommen looked like good children, and I had nothing against them. If the opportunity arose, I would see how I could help them survive, but I wouldn't go out of my way if they didn't happen before me.
Cersei, likewise, looked at everyone with a critical eye, her gaze lingering on me and Sansa. She had probably heard about me and wanted to learn more to see if I could be manipulated or if I should be eliminated for her son's future. Despite being a detestable person, one thing that couldn't be denied was her absolute love for her children, especially the firstborn.
Moreover, she probably noticed Sansa because of her beauty. As they said in this world, my sister hadn't "bloomed" yet, but it was easy to see that she would be beautiful in the future. Thanks to her intelligence, I was sure her future husband would be very lucky to have her, after many threats from Jon and me, of course.
"You've grown fat," the King said seriously.
My father only looked back at the King's enormous stomach without saying anything until he finished, "Winterfell is yours, King Robert Baratheon."
The King noticed that my father wasn't pleased with him, but he ignored it.
"Take me to the crypts, Ned. I want to pay my respects," the King continued seriously.
"Darling, the journey has been long. Wouldn't it be better to rest? You can pay your respects another day," Cersei said calmly.
The King looked at her indifferently. "Ned? Take me to the crypts," the King repeated.
My father nodded before turning to my mother. "Cat, take the rest to the welcome banquet. We'll join you when we're done."
My mother nodded and then turned to the Queen, leading her inside with the rest of the important people in the caravan.
While my mother focused on her task, I observed those who had arrived at Winterfell. I could see Jaime Lannister in the distance with a cocky smile on his face. Most of the people who came were the same as in the series, with one exception: a bald head was among the caravan.
Trying to hide my shock at Varys being here, I maintained a fixed smile.
"Welcome back to Winterfell, Ser Oakheart," I said to the knight who had sparred with me last time. "How is life in King's Landing?"
"Nice to see you again, Lord Robb," the knight greeted. "Same old boring job; there's not much to do," he said lightly.
I noticed that Varys had gotten close enough to hear us but pretended to be busy ordering some servants to help with the luggage.
"That's nice to hear. At least you're doing a good job with King Robert's security," I told him somewhat sarcastically.
A snort was heard behind me where the Kingslayer was located. "You would know about working hard, wouldn't you?" he japed.
"You would be the expert at protecting kings, Ser Jaime. Why don't you tell me what you think of the security on the Kingsroad?" I japed.
Ser Barristan, who had moved closer to us while we talked, snorted, showing his disdain for the oathbreaker.
Jaime's smile faltered for a moment before disappearing as he remained silent.
"It is nice to meet you, Robb Stark," Ser Barristan said, extending his hand.
"It's an honor to meet you too, Ser Barristan," I said respectfully, shaking his hand.
"I think we should join the rest of the royal family. Please follow me," I told them before heading inside the castle.
The Crypts
Ned Stark walked with the King in silence, but soon the King broke it in front of Lyanna's tomb.
After paying his respects to his original intended and obsession, the King touched the statue before looking at Ned.
"I need your help, Ned," he started. "I want you to be my Hand in King's Landing."
"It is a great honor, Robert, and I will do it only because you asked," Ned accepted after a moment.
"I don't think you'll thank me with all the vipers in King's Landing," Robert chuckled.
"Another thing, I want us to unite our families by blood," he continued.
Ned lifted his hand to stop him. "With all due respect, Robert, no. I won't arrange marriages for my family."
"Excuse me?" Robert said, irate and huffing.
"You heard what I said, Robert," Ned repeated. "I told you that I won't make my children marry someone they don't want. If your son can woo any of my daughters and they reciprocate the feeling, we could proceed with it. But if that doesn't happen, you can forget about it."
"And if I decree that it will happen?" the King asked.
"Then it will be the same as Lyanna, Robert. And our friendship won't save you from the North," Eddard said seriously.
"Do not make that mistake, Robert. The people are angry at you for everything the capital has demanded of us in the last couple of years," Eddard explained.
"Ha," Robert chuckled. "You Northerners are nuts, but that's what I like about you. It's better than the snakes in the South."
"I'll tell my firstborn to try and court your eldest, Sansa, was it?" the King asked.
"Then I hope he's intelligent because she wants the best for herself, and her brothers will screen everyone who tries, haha," Ned laughed.
"Aye, your eldest… There are bards singing songs about him in the South. What I wouldn't give to have one like that," the King said mournfully.
"Lyanna and my sons would have been like that, you know?" the King asked. "All my strength and her willpower in one body."
"Reality is cruel, Robert," Eddard said. "But we must work for the future. Now, let's go. We've kept them waiting long enough."
"Aye, I'm famished," the King laughed, slapping his stomach.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Preparing for the arrival of the royal caravan was more tedious than difficult. With all the gold we had saved over the years, despite Littlefinger's and the Lannisters' attempts to diminish it, we had enough to give them a grand welcome.
Aside from waiting, there wasn't much I could do, as most of the logistics were handled by Mother and Sansa, who were most knowledgeable about what the royal party might require. Taking extra food from our supplies wouldn't hurt, as they didn't bring many people.
According to the message we received last night, the royal caravan consisted of eighty people, mostly guards, with the rest being personal servants and the smallest group being the royal family.
Taking my time, I walked toward my father, who was in the Godswood trying to calm himself. He probably needed to pray and seek wisdom. There was only one reason for the King to come personally to Winterfell, and he didn't know how to address it. The most obvious response would be to refuse the King's request, but that wouldn't be easy, and he probably wouldn't do it. My father had been taught to live with honor, and if his friend, the King, were to ask for his help like in the series, he would likely go with him, leaving the North in my hands.
Since I arrived in this world, I knew I wouldn't be able to change his decision to go to King's Landing. Still, I could change enough to make it easier to spirit him away alone, so the betrothal of Sansa and the bastard Joffrey couldn't happen. This was the most pressing matter for me to discuss with him before the arrival of the royal family.
Heading directly toward him with my mother in tow was easy, thanks to my insects pinpointing his location. Seeing him torn with his thoughts sent a pang to my heart. I'm sure he considered different ways to act, but none seemed entirely possible.
"Father, there are things we need to discuss before their arrival," I said directly, believing that being blunt was the best approach.
"Yes, we must plan," my father said, but I could see he had already decided how he would proceed.
"Have you already made your decision, Father?" I asked knowingly.
My father looked torn for a moment, gazing at me and my mother before finally speaking. "Yes, son. I have. I will follow Robert to King's Landing."
I shook my head. I didn't agree with him, but there was little I could do to change this.
"I understand, Father," I told him. "It must have been difficult to make this decision."
"Aye, it was. But I can leave knowing that the North is in capable hands, Robb. Continue making me proud," my father said, patting my head.
"I will, Father," I nodded firmly.
"What about the rest of the family, Ned?" Mother asked.
"I will make time to return, dear," he told her.
There were many tears in my mother's eyes as she nodded, but she understood better than anyone how my father thought.
After giving them some time in semi-privacy, I cleared my throat to attract their attention.
"There's one thing I want to discuss right now, Father," I said.
"What is it, son? If I can, I'll do whatever I can to make it happen," he answered.
"The King was obsessed with Aunt Lyanna, wasn't he?" I asked, taking a seat near the weirwood and touching it. I always felt at peace being near one, and it was a welcome sensation.
"She was his intended, son. He went to war for her, as you know," my father nodded.
"But she didn't feel the same way," I added.
Father looked me straight in the eyes before sighing and agreeing. "Aye, she disliked him and was very angry with your grandfather for a long time."
"It must have been difficult for you, Father. That your little sister didn't want to marry your best friend," I said lightly.
"Where are you going with this, Robb?" he asked impatiently.
"If the King asks for the hand of any of my sisters or mine in a betrothal with his family, I want you to tell him that you won't arrange marriages for us," I said seriously. "I don't want history to repeat itself, and if the prince is anything like his father, I would kill him to protect my sisters' feelings."
My father looked grim. "That's traitorous talk, Robb."
"I would say the same to his face, so please do this for me. I don't ask much from you, but I won't budge on this. I want them to marry for love, and I want the same for myself. The North is strong; there's no need for arranged marriages for our family," I concluded.
"I'll discuss it later with your mother and Luwin, but if it's possible, I will make it happen," he nodded slowly.
"That's all I ask, Father."
One Month Later
Waiting with the rest of my family for the arrival of the royal caravan was nerve-wracking. Thanks to the changes I made, Bran and Arya were somewhat calmer than their canon counterparts, so they were with us, waiting for the Royal caravan.
As we saw the first few guards leading the caravan enter the courtyard, I felt myself getting excited at the start of one of my favorite series ever. When the King arrived and dismounted his horse, everyone was silent.
Due to the Crown's actions, they weren't greeted with much enthusiasm by the populace. They were always respected, but there wasn't a palpable excitement at seeing the King of the Seven Kingdoms in our ancestral home.
The King approached and noticed that people didn't look at him with devotion, but he ignored it and walked up to my father.
The rest of the royal family approached in the same manner. Joffrey, with his usual attitude of preferring to be elsewhere, cast glances at Sansa, who completely ignored him. Thank the old gods that the new education she had received from the maester and the new septa had kept her from fantasizing about a fictional romance with someone she didn't know.
Myrcella and Tommen looked like good children, and I had nothing against them. If the opportunity arose, I would see how I could help them survive, but I wouldn't go out of my way if they didn't happen before me.
Cersei, likewise, looked at everyone with a critical eye, her gaze lingering on me and Sansa. She had probably heard about me and wanted to learn more to see if I could be manipulated or if I should be eliminated for her son's future. Despite being a detestable person, one thing that couldn't be denied was her absolute love for her children, especially the firstborn.
Moreover, she probably noticed Sansa because of her beauty. As they said in this world, my sister hadn't "bloomed" yet, but it was easy to see that she would be beautiful in the future. Thanks to her intelligence, I was sure her future husband would be very lucky to have her, after many threats from Jon and me, of course.
"You've grown fat," the King said seriously.
My father only looked back at the King's enormous stomach without saying anything until he finished, "Winterfell is yours, King Robert Baratheon."
The King noticed that my father wasn't pleased with him, but he ignored it.
"Take me to the crypts, Ned. I want to pay my respects," the King continued seriously.
"Darling, the journey has been long. Wouldn't it be better to rest? You can pay your respects another day," Cersei said calmly.
The King looked at her indifferently. "Ned? Take me to the crypts," the King repeated.
My father nodded before turning to my mother. "Cat, take the rest to the welcome banquet. We'll join you when we're done."
My mother nodded and then turned to the Queen, leading her inside with the rest of the important people in the caravan.
While my mother focused on her task, I observed those who had arrived at Winterfell. I could see Jaime Lannister in the distance with a cocky smile on his face. Most of the people who came were the same as in the series, with one exception: a bald head was among the caravan.
Trying to hide my shock at Varys being here, I maintained a fixed smile.
"Welcome back to Winterfell, Ser Oakheart," I said to the knight who had sparred with me last time. "How is life in King's Landing?"
"Nice to see you again, Lord Robb," the knight greeted. "Same old boring job; there's not much to do," he said lightly.
I noticed that Varys had gotten close enough to hear us but pretended to be busy ordering some servants to help with the luggage.
"That's nice to hear. At least you're doing a good job with King Robert's security," I told him somewhat sarcastically.
A snort was heard behind me where the Kingslayer was located. "You would know about working hard, wouldn't you?" he japed.
"You would be the expert at protecting kings, Ser Jaime. Why don't you tell me what you think of the security on the Kingsroad?" I japed.
Ser Barristan, who had moved closer to us while we talked, snorted, showing his disdain for the oathbreaker.
Jaime's smile faltered for a moment before disappearing as he remained silent.
"It is nice to meet you, Robb Stark," Ser Barristan said, extending his hand.
"It's an honor to meet you too, Ser Barristan," I said respectfully, shaking his hand.
"I think we should join the rest of the royal family. Please follow me," I told them before heading inside the castle.
The Crypts
Ned Stark walked with the King in silence, but soon the King broke it in front of Lyanna's tomb.
After paying his respects to his original intended and obsession, the King touched the statue before looking at Ned.
"I need your help, Ned," he started. "I want you to be my Hand in King's Landing."
"It is a great honor, Robert, and I will do it only because you asked," Ned accepted after a moment.
"I don't think you'll thank me with all the vipers in King's Landing," Robert chuckled.
"Another thing, I want us to unite our families by blood," he continued.
Ned lifted his hand to stop him. "With all due respect, Robert, no. I won't arrange marriages for my family."
"Excuse me?" Robert said, irate and huffing.
"You heard what I said, Robert," Ned repeated. "I told you that I won't make my children marry someone they don't want. If your son can woo any of my daughters and they reciprocate the feeling, we could proceed with it. But if that doesn't happen, you can forget about it."
"And if I decree that it will happen?" the King asked.
"Then it will be the same as Lyanna, Robert. And our friendship won't save you from the North," Eddard said seriously.
"Do not make that mistake, Robert. The people are angry at you for everything the capital has demanded of us in the last couple of years," Eddard explained.
"Ha," Robert chuckled. "You Northerners are nuts, but that's what I like about you. It's better than the snakes in the South."
"I'll tell my firstborn to try and court your eldest, Sansa, was it?" the King asked.
"Then I hope he's intelligent because she wants the best for herself, and her brothers will screen everyone who tries, haha," Ned laughed.
"Aye, your eldest… There are bards singing songs about him in the South. What I wouldn't give to have one like that," the King said mournfully.
"Lyanna and my sons would have been like that, you know?" the King asked. "All my strength and her willpower in one body."
"Reality is cruel, Robert," Eddard said. "But we must work for the future. Now, let's go. We've kept them waiting long enough."
"Aye, I'm famished," the King laughed, slapping his stomach.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 33: The New Lord of Winterfell
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Spending time with Shadow while he devoured some deer legs with his brothers and sisters under the table, I started thinking about how things would change if nothing out of the ordinary happened during this royal visit. Thankfully, I nipped Bran's desire to climb in the bud. I had enough respect and hero worship from him that he listened to me about it. Either way, I would be cautious with him during this visit. I didn't want anyone in the North to find out things they shouldn't—at least not now.
Sharing a look with Jon, I gave him a sad smile that he could see from one of the lower tables. Thanks to the royal visit, we had to present a front regarding him. They didn't have a say in the matter, but it would be better not to give them ammunition to cause strife within our family. Thankfully Jon understood and was happy to pass the time with other visitors.
I also spotted Uncle Benjen at the entrance of the hall. He was probably confused about why Jon was inside but didn't comment on it while he took his seat to celebrate with the rest. It was the first time I had ever seen him since I transmigrated here, and I only had a few memories of him from Robb's childhood.
Expanding my senses with my bugs, I overheard the conversation between my father and the King. Nodding to myself that everything was going according to plan, I also ordered them to find hard-to-reach spots in every important room to spy. With all these years, I already had millions of insects ready to act at any moment, and I had more than enough to have an extra pair of eyes and ears on every single person currently in the castle and the town combined.
While scratching the ear of one of the pups, I shifted my focus from the insects to the conversation happening in the Great Hall.
"What do you think of the North, my queen?" my mother asked Cersei while eating.
Ignoring them since just seeing Cersei made me think of ways to destroy her, I stood up to meet our uncle, sending a servant toward Jon to do the same.
"Uncle Benjen," I nodded at him with a smile.
"Robb, Jon. You have grown so much over the years, and tales of your accomplishments have even reached Castle Black," Benjen laughed and hugged us both.
"I'm so happy you were allowed to dine with us, nephew," Benjen told Jon.
Jon had a small smile on his face. "Things have changed a lot in these past couple of years, uncle."
"I can see that. I'm just glad Catelyn has gotten past her dislike of you; I never thought you deserved that," Benjen said lightly.
"To be honest, I was thinking of asking you to come with me to the Wall, but I can see that you do have a place here in Winterfell," he told us.
"If nothing had changed, I would have probably gone with you, uncle," Jon admitted. "But now I have things to do here," Jon told him sincerely. "Also, the North would probably burn if I left it alone with Robb," he joked.
"Ha!" Benjen snorted. He then took a sip of vodka and let out a sigh. "Thanks to all the help you have provided over the years, the Wall is manned and taken care of, but I have a bad feeling," he admitted.
I tried to hide a snort of dark humor. The situation was dire, and there was nothing we could do other than prepare for the long night.
Over the years, my father had been in talks with Commander Mormont about using some land from the New Gift and Brandon's Gift to get more food and training. After many promises and negotiations, the commander allowed us to start using them.
The food produced there was mainly used for the Night's Watch, but the extras were then sent to the towns or holdfasts to sell. With the money earned, the Night's Watch was able to afford a lot of equipment and renovations.
Aside from land, we also arranged joint training sessions with our recruits. I wanted an enormous number of battle-ready soldiers for the war, and their training helped both of us.
I planned to send Jon with Benjen to the Wall—not to join the Watch, since he was my right-hand man—but to learn about the happenings on that side of the North. After a while, I wanted him to leave that place and stay with the Umbers or the ex-Dreadfort until the war started.
"Afraid of the reports from the execution, uncle?" I asked him.
"White Walkers… It's hard to believe, but I must investigate," he answered solemnly.
"Then be careful, uncle. And seek me out before you depart; there are some things we need to discuss," I nodded. "Now, if you'll excuse me, I have to keep the royal family company."
Over the years, I had accumulated a good amount of dragonglass—not enough for an army, since there wasn't much in the North, but enough for a small party. I encouraged people to bring us the stones as if my mother collected them, and since women's love for shiny things is universal, people didn't think much of it in "small" quantities.
As I spotted Tyrion stumbling near the entrance, I had a small laugh at his expense. His hair lay in disarray, and his clothes looked like he had just thrown them on without thinking. I stopped and noticed how different he looked now from the first episode of the series.
He looked like he was done caring what people thought of him—almost defeated but with a backbone only someone as disdained as he could have. Pondering for a moment, I could only imagine that his failure to obtain the vodka recipe for his father must have changed his situation in the Westerlands. I would probably need to check that out, as he was a vital part of the series.
"A sad situation for everyone," a voice murmured behind me.
I hid a smirk that threatened to appear on my face. Thanks to my insects, I already knew Varys was approaching from the back. It was true what Littlefinger said in the series: the bastard truly moved silently when he walked. I had no idea if he was trying to scare me or if that was simply how he walked all the time.
"Lord Varys," I said without turning my back. "I didn't expect you to come with the royal family."
"I've never been this far north, Lord Robb, and I was curious about some things I've heard over the years," Varys said with such a soft voice it irritated me. I think he genuinely did it so that people wouldn't hear everything he said, and thankfully I had advantages over that.
"Oh? What were you curious about, Lord Varys?" I asked, finally looking him in the eyes.
"Mainly the stability of the kingdom. I've heard that Northerners are unhappy with the Crown's decisions," Varys said while taking a seat next to me.
"Of course, we're not happy. Would you be after the Crown left you to rot until you could make it alone and then suddenly took an interest in us?" I asked somewhat strongly.
"No, I would not. And I'm here to make sure such a situation doesn't get worse," Varys nodded in understanding.
"Here comes the King and my father. It looks like he has something to say," I nodded toward the entrance.
Varys got to his feet when he saw the determined look on the King's face and went ahead to talk to him. To most people, it would have seemed odd, but I was able to overhear what they said.
I should have seen this coming, and it would probably affect some of my plans but not by much.
"Silence, the King has words!" my father bellowed.
The King nodded and tried to look somewhat regal, which, in my opinion, didn't help much.
"I have spoken with my friend Ned, and he has accepted the position of Hand of the King!" Robert said firmly.
Some of the Northerners present were unhappy since it meant losing the Lord of Winterfell, but they knew they could not change anything.
Seeing the lackluster reception to his words, the King's face twisted for a moment before continuing.
"As a gift, in thanks for the services provided," he started, raising his voice, "the elevated taxes from these past years will return to the previous amount!" he said with a smile.
Stunned silence was the initial response, but soon exclamations of surprise and thanks were heard in the hall from the Northerners.
The Queen's face twisted into a somewhat fierce expression before returning to normal, and Tyrion's face showed a hint of surprise at the King's move.
To be honest, it was a really good plan. It lessened the negative feelings the North had towards the Crown, but it didn't fix everything, and I could work with this. With the new surplus of coins we would get after today, we could start investing more in different venues toward the endgame.
My father rose to his feet and put an arm around Robert before addressing the rest of us.
"I know that I'll have to leave, but I know the North will be in capable hands." Looking me in the eyes, he continued, "To Robb Stark, the new Lord of Winterfell." He raised his cup in a toast.
"The Ghost of the North!" Lord Manderly exclaimed, having come with the royal caravan.
"Ghost of the North!" "Ghost of the North!"
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Sharing a look with Jon, I gave him a sad smile that he could see from one of the lower tables. Thanks to the royal visit, we had to present a front regarding him. They didn't have a say in the matter, but it would be better not to give them ammunition to cause strife within our family. Thankfully Jon understood and was happy to pass the time with other visitors.
I also spotted Uncle Benjen at the entrance of the hall. He was probably confused about why Jon was inside but didn't comment on it while he took his seat to celebrate with the rest. It was the first time I had ever seen him since I transmigrated here, and I only had a few memories of him from Robb's childhood.
Expanding my senses with my bugs, I overheard the conversation between my father and the King. Nodding to myself that everything was going according to plan, I also ordered them to find hard-to-reach spots in every important room to spy. With all these years, I already had millions of insects ready to act at any moment, and I had more than enough to have an extra pair of eyes and ears on every single person currently in the castle and the town combined.
While scratching the ear of one of the pups, I shifted my focus from the insects to the conversation happening in the Great Hall.
"What do you think of the North, my queen?" my mother asked Cersei while eating.
Ignoring them since just seeing Cersei made me think of ways to destroy her, I stood up to meet our uncle, sending a servant toward Jon to do the same.
"Uncle Benjen," I nodded at him with a smile.
"Robb, Jon. You have grown so much over the years, and tales of your accomplishments have even reached Castle Black," Benjen laughed and hugged us both.
"I'm so happy you were allowed to dine with us, nephew," Benjen told Jon.
Jon had a small smile on his face. "Things have changed a lot in these past couple of years, uncle."
"I can see that. I'm just glad Catelyn has gotten past her dislike of you; I never thought you deserved that," Benjen said lightly.
"To be honest, I was thinking of asking you to come with me to the Wall, but I can see that you do have a place here in Winterfell," he told us.
"If nothing had changed, I would have probably gone with you, uncle," Jon admitted. "But now I have things to do here," Jon told him sincerely. "Also, the North would probably burn if I left it alone with Robb," he joked.
"Ha!" Benjen snorted. He then took a sip of vodka and let out a sigh. "Thanks to all the help you have provided over the years, the Wall is manned and taken care of, but I have a bad feeling," he admitted.
I tried to hide a snort of dark humor. The situation was dire, and there was nothing we could do other than prepare for the long night.
Over the years, my father had been in talks with Commander Mormont about using some land from the New Gift and Brandon's Gift to get more food and training. After many promises and negotiations, the commander allowed us to start using them.
The food produced there was mainly used for the Night's Watch, but the extras were then sent to the towns or holdfasts to sell. With the money earned, the Night's Watch was able to afford a lot of equipment and renovations.
Aside from land, we also arranged joint training sessions with our recruits. I wanted an enormous number of battle-ready soldiers for the war, and their training helped both of us.
I planned to send Jon with Benjen to the Wall—not to join the Watch, since he was my right-hand man—but to learn about the happenings on that side of the North. After a while, I wanted him to leave that place and stay with the Umbers or the ex-Dreadfort until the war started.
"Afraid of the reports from the execution, uncle?" I asked him.
"White Walkers… It's hard to believe, but I must investigate," he answered solemnly.
"Then be careful, uncle. And seek me out before you depart; there are some things we need to discuss," I nodded. "Now, if you'll excuse me, I have to keep the royal family company."
Over the years, I had accumulated a good amount of dragonglass—not enough for an army, since there wasn't much in the North, but enough for a small party. I encouraged people to bring us the stones as if my mother collected them, and since women's love for shiny things is universal, people didn't think much of it in "small" quantities.
As I spotted Tyrion stumbling near the entrance, I had a small laugh at his expense. His hair lay in disarray, and his clothes looked like he had just thrown them on without thinking. I stopped and noticed how different he looked now from the first episode of the series.
He looked like he was done caring what people thought of him—almost defeated but with a backbone only someone as disdained as he could have. Pondering for a moment, I could only imagine that his failure to obtain the vodka recipe for his father must have changed his situation in the Westerlands. I would probably need to check that out, as he was a vital part of the series.
"A sad situation for everyone," a voice murmured behind me.
I hid a smirk that threatened to appear on my face. Thanks to my insects, I already knew Varys was approaching from the back. It was true what Littlefinger said in the series: the bastard truly moved silently when he walked. I had no idea if he was trying to scare me or if that was simply how he walked all the time.
"Lord Varys," I said without turning my back. "I didn't expect you to come with the royal family."
"I've never been this far north, Lord Robb, and I was curious about some things I've heard over the years," Varys said with such a soft voice it irritated me. I think he genuinely did it so that people wouldn't hear everything he said, and thankfully I had advantages over that.
"Oh? What were you curious about, Lord Varys?" I asked, finally looking him in the eyes.
"Mainly the stability of the kingdom. I've heard that Northerners are unhappy with the Crown's decisions," Varys said while taking a seat next to me.
"Of course, we're not happy. Would you be after the Crown left you to rot until you could make it alone and then suddenly took an interest in us?" I asked somewhat strongly.
"No, I would not. And I'm here to make sure such a situation doesn't get worse," Varys nodded in understanding.
"Here comes the King and my father. It looks like he has something to say," I nodded toward the entrance.
Varys got to his feet when he saw the determined look on the King's face and went ahead to talk to him. To most people, it would have seemed odd, but I was able to overhear what they said.
I should have seen this coming, and it would probably affect some of my plans but not by much.
"Silence, the King has words!" my father bellowed.
The King nodded and tried to look somewhat regal, which, in my opinion, didn't help much.
"I have spoken with my friend Ned, and he has accepted the position of Hand of the King!" Robert said firmly.
Some of the Northerners present were unhappy since it meant losing the Lord of Winterfell, but they knew they could not change anything.
Seeing the lackluster reception to his words, the King's face twisted for a moment before continuing.
"As a gift, in thanks for the services provided," he started, raising his voice, "the elevated taxes from these past years will return to the previous amount!" he said with a smile.
Stunned silence was the initial response, but soon exclamations of surprise and thanks were heard in the hall from the Northerners.
The Queen's face twisted into a somewhat fierce expression before returning to normal, and Tyrion's face showed a hint of surprise at the King's move.
To be honest, it was a really good plan. It lessened the negative feelings the North had towards the Crown, but it didn't fix everything, and I could work with this. With the new surplus of coins we would get after today, we could start investing more in different venues toward the endgame.
My father rose to his feet and put an arm around Robert before addressing the rest of us.
"I know that I'll have to leave, but I know the North will be in capable hands." Looking me in the eyes, he continued, "To Robb Stark, the new Lord of Winterfell." He raised his cup in a toast.
"The Ghost of the North!" Lord Manderly exclaimed, having come with the royal caravan.
"Ghost of the North!" "Ghost of the North!"
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 34: Departure and New Responsibilities
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Author's Note: Sorry for the delay with this chapter, guys. It's longer than usual since I don't have to invent everything, but it's harder to write because I need to think about different plotlines and whatnot. Either way, here you have it! Robb has already started his plans and is finally starting to feel that things will get harder in the future
Winterfell
Next Day
While reviewing every parchment containing information I had gained through the banquet and some pillow talk in certain cases, my insects noticed that Uncle Benjen was walking toward my solar. When Father leaves with the royal family to return to the capital, the lord's solar would be mine. But at least for a few weeks, I would have to stay here and prepare my things to move them later.
Without waiting for him to knock, I told him to enter.
"That feels so weird, nephew," Benjen smiled when he saw me.
"It's a gift, Uncle," I joked back.
"So, I'm here. What did you want to talk about before I depart?" he asked seriously.
I let out a sigh. "Of what is coming for us, Uncle. Have you heard of my gifts?" I asked him.
"That you are the champion of all the gods?" he asked.
"Ha!" I snorted. "It's not that simple. But that rumor has some truth in it."
"Oh?" Benjen looked at me skeptically.
I shook my head slightly, hoping to change his perspective. "I have dreams—glimpses of what is to come. That's why I have been working so hard to change the situation in the North," I admitted.
Benjen was startled for a moment, but soon he was able to calm down. Looking me directly in the eyes, he let out a deep sigh. "I knew something was happening. I love Ned, but I knew he wasn't capable of this many changes." He shook his head. "So it was you all along then, nephew?"
I nodded grimly. "Aye, it was me. War is coming, Uncle, and we haven't done enough to prepare."
"Two different fronts," I accepted shamefully. "I'm the only one who knows at the moment, and I haven't told my father because you know how he is… he would do the most honorable thing instead of what needs to be done."
Benjen opened his mouth to defend his brother, but I raised my hand to stop him.
"Uncle Benjen, I understand your concern about not telling Father. It might seem like I'm putting him in danger, but believe me, he shouldn't know. Please, hear me out first," I told him pleadingly.
Benjen watched me with firm eyes and slowly nodded his head. "Go on, Robb. I'm listening."
I took a deep breath before continuing, knowing the importance of this conversation. "Father is an honorable man, and his sense of duty is unwavering. If he knew about the impending wars, he would feel compelled to act immediately. That would place him directly in the path of danger; it would be even worse than the rebellion," I finished grimly.
Benjen accepted my point of view with a nod. "True, Ned would never shy away from his responsibilities. But isn't that more reason to tell him? To fix the problem before it happens?"
I shook my head, considering whether to rip off the bandage. "Promise me as your liege that you will keep this secret until I tell you otherwise, Uncle. I promise that the information I give you will show you how dire the situation is."
Uncle Benjen remained silent for a moment before giving me a firm nod. "I swear by the Old Gods that I won't say a word about what you tell me, Lord Stark."
I sighed, hoping I was making the best decision. "I'm trusting you a lot with this information, Uncle. Please, don't let me down."
Checking with my insects to ensure we were alone and that no one was close to my solar, I began the explanation.
"The children of the King are bastards… As you may have heard about how these dreams work, I don't get told everything I need to know, I only get glimpses. But yesterday, I was able to find out about this," I explained, defeated.
"What?!" Uncle Benjen stood up and started pacing around the room, considering the repercussions.
"Who knows about this?" he asked.
"For now, only us from this side of the Kingdom, aside from us, the perpetrators, the Queen, her brother Jaime Lannister, and the late Hand of the King, Jon Arryn," I answered.
Uncle Benjen stopped cold in his tracks. "Incest?" he murmured. "And now Ned is the Hand of the King; he will be in danger, Robb. We need to tell him!" He turned around to search for my father.
Raising my voice momentarily, I called out, "Uncle Benjen! Think about this rationally. What would Father do if he were to learn about this?"
Benjen froze for a second, letting out some curses in desperation.
"Now you understand, Uncle? Father would tell the Queen that he knows about this and he would die because of it," I said quietly.
"Damn it… you are right. What can we do?" he asked desperately.
"You won't do anything about this. Leave the problems of the Kingdom to me. I swear on my life that I won't let him die because of his stupidity," I assured him.
Benjen looked directly into my eyes, searching for deceit. After finding only conviction, he nodded. "You said it was a war on two fronts, nephew. What's the other one?" he asked with trepidation.
"The White Walkers are real," I told him simply. "We are in the middle of two wars capable of destroying all life in Westeros and beyond. We must remain united if we hope to win, and even then, millions will die to make it happen," I sighed, feeling the weight of the world on my shoulders.
"Damn!" Benjen bellowed, starting to punch the wall hysterically.
Letting him vent for a moment, I waited for him to calm down a little.
"What can we do, Robb? This is way more than I expected right now; it's too early, and I'm too sober for this," he admitted, feeling out of his depth.
"We are in a really bad spot, Uncle. I won't lie about that, but we can win. For that, I need you to trust me and follow my suggestions," I began.
Opening a drawer, I pulled out a box I had prepared for this conversation. Inside were six daggers made of dragonglass. I also took out a package of arrowheads made of the same material.
"I want you to take these. Keep the arrows with you and two daggers," I started explaining. "The White Walkers are vulnerable to this, Valyrian steel, and fire. You won't be able to damage them at all with normal steel. The rest of the daggers I want you to give one to Commander Mormont, and the rest are for some of the Wildlings."
"The Wildlings? Are you crazy, Robb?" asked Benjen.
"Do you remember the stories of the Long Night that old Nan tells us? What abilities do you remember the White Walkers having?" I asked him.
"They can raise the dead? What about it?" he asked, oblivious.
I rolled my eyes. "And how many Wildlings are there north of the Wall?" I asked him.
He was silent for a moment before his eyes widened when he realized what I was talking about. "Over a hundred thousand," he murmured.
I nodded grimly. "Can you imagine an army of undead numbering a hundred thousand? An army of that size that doesn't tire, doesn't feel pain, and can keep fighting without stopping?"
Benjen paled immediately, understanding the problem.
"Old Gods save us," he prayed. "What do you want me to do, Robb?"
With an encouraging smile, I began explaining all my plans to him.
Three Weeks Later
Going over every single scrap of information I had gathered over the weeks since the arrival of the royal family, I organized it by factions. It seemed Littlefinger had learned his lesson and hadn't sent anyone else with them. Aside from the Master of Coins, there were spies sent by the Reach, who were trying to gather information about us for the Queen of Thorns.
They were easy enough to identify thanks to my power, but the number of spies sent by different factions was overwhelming. I couldn't fathom why they would spend so much on something so trivial. It wasn't as if they hadn't tried in the past few years, and I had no idea why they thought using the royal visit as an excuse would make them successful this time.
At least Varys had learned his lesson after a couple of false starts. Before the Crown's arrival, we were very explicit with our orders: our subjects were to accept every single attempt to buy their allegiance and then report to us. The Starks would double what they were offered if they provided evidence of who tried to buy them. But thanks to the loyalty we had from them, none accepted the "double it" part we offered. They were allowed to keep what they were paid, but everyone insisted we keep our gold and continue helping the North as a whole.
Of course, there were a couple who tried to lie to me; humanity tends to get greedy no matter what they have already gained. But with a few examples of what happens when someone tries to cheat me, such cases were kept to a minimum.
Uncle Benjen left over three weeks ago to start with my plans at the Wall and with the Wildlings. He took a message for the Commander, and in it, I said I would send someone I trust to the Wall to help with everything. Jon would leave Winterfell a few days later after the royal family departed with my father. He would have orders to prepare the Wall for what is to come.
The royal family was already preparing for departure, and with this move, every single one of my plans would start to take effect. I would begin by sending messages to every keep on the shores of the North to ramp up the training of recruits and to be ready to close our borders when the war starts.
I knew it wouldn't be the same as in the canon timeline, as the small changes had altered everything. There would be no reason for my mother to detain Tyrion, so, Tywin wouldn't attack the Riverlands, at least for that reason, who knew what the Warhawk thought. The war would start when my father, in his honorable self, learned about the bastards of the royal family and gave Cersei time to prepare for her small rebellion. After that, it would be almost the same. If I remember correctly, it took several months for my father to find out the truth, but I wouldn't leave it to chance.
Thankfully, I had two wonderful advisors who could take care of things here in the North while I completed my plans: Mother and Sansa. They had become brilliant in politics and respected for their beauty and openness over the past couple of years. I could leave the North in their capable hands while I went incognito to stay alert for any important changes.
First, I would search for allies in the Riverlands, starting with our uncle, Brynden Tully. After that, I would go to King's Landing and live there for a while, focusing on obtaining useful information. When the war started, we would invade the South, destroy House Frey, and take control of the Twins to maximize the protection of the North going forward.
I knew plans could change on the fly, so I didn't bother with more than that until I knew what changes to the canon timeline were made thanks to my moves. I would try to adapt as necessary.
Stopping for a moment, I reflected on the events of the royal visit, from amusing moments to rage-inducing ones. In particular, the Crown Prince's attempts to woo Sansa were painful to watch. When my sister rejected him, he showed his true colors. He was harshly punished by the King, which earned the ire of the Queen. But it didn't matter; she didn't have the power to harm us at the moment, and she would try in the future even if nothing happened during her stay in Winterfell.
I had gathered so much information over these weeks that it would take a long time to go through it all, even with the help of Jon, the Maester, and Mother. But it would be worth it as it could help us with blackmail and other strategies.
I also had an enlightening conversation with Tyrion and learned about how Tywin made his life miserable in the Westerlands, leading him to live in the capital. Thanks to his familiarity with Lady Elyse, the former Hand of the King helped him secure a job with her.
Two Days Later
The whole family was sad to see Father leave for the South. We all had sentimental farewells in private. At the entrance of Winterfell, we projected an unflappable front, but even so, a couple of tears were shed by most of us.
Telling him to take care, I hugged him and whispered in his ear, "I'll take care of the North while you are gone, Father."
"I know, Robb. I trust you," he answered, hugging me harder.
"Be very careful in the capital, Father. I want you to know that aside from the guards who accompany you, you have no allies there. Trust me on this, Father. No one will help you, and if they offer to do so, you must know that they want something in return," I told him solemnly.
My father was taken aback, but after a moment, he nodded firmly, showing that he understood.
I would take care of him when I was done with my plans here, but before that, I had to trust Jory, who would go with him and the rest of the guards. They were some of the best we had to offer, and I trusted them completely.
Seeing them leave, I felt a moment of dread. Everything felt real now, and I knew that a simple mistake could make me lose a member of my family. But with the growing dread came a sense of determination. I would win, and no one could stop the rise of the North anymore.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Winterfell
Next Day
While reviewing every parchment containing information I had gained through the banquet and some pillow talk in certain cases, my insects noticed that Uncle Benjen was walking toward my solar. When Father leaves with the royal family to return to the capital, the lord's solar would be mine. But at least for a few weeks, I would have to stay here and prepare my things to move them later.
Without waiting for him to knock, I told him to enter.
"That feels so weird, nephew," Benjen smiled when he saw me.
"It's a gift, Uncle," I joked back.
"So, I'm here. What did you want to talk about before I depart?" he asked seriously.
I let out a sigh. "Of what is coming for us, Uncle. Have you heard of my gifts?" I asked him.
"That you are the champion of all the gods?" he asked.
"Ha!" I snorted. "It's not that simple. But that rumor has some truth in it."
"Oh?" Benjen looked at me skeptically.
I shook my head slightly, hoping to change his perspective. "I have dreams—glimpses of what is to come. That's why I have been working so hard to change the situation in the North," I admitted.
Benjen was startled for a moment, but soon he was able to calm down. Looking me directly in the eyes, he let out a deep sigh. "I knew something was happening. I love Ned, but I knew he wasn't capable of this many changes." He shook his head. "So it was you all along then, nephew?"
I nodded grimly. "Aye, it was me. War is coming, Uncle, and we haven't done enough to prepare."
"Two different fronts," I accepted shamefully. "I'm the only one who knows at the moment, and I haven't told my father because you know how he is… he would do the most honorable thing instead of what needs to be done."
Benjen opened his mouth to defend his brother, but I raised my hand to stop him.
"Uncle Benjen, I understand your concern about not telling Father. It might seem like I'm putting him in danger, but believe me, he shouldn't know. Please, hear me out first," I told him pleadingly.
Benjen watched me with firm eyes and slowly nodded his head. "Go on, Robb. I'm listening."
I took a deep breath before continuing, knowing the importance of this conversation. "Father is an honorable man, and his sense of duty is unwavering. If he knew about the impending wars, he would feel compelled to act immediately. That would place him directly in the path of danger; it would be even worse than the rebellion," I finished grimly.
Benjen accepted my point of view with a nod. "True, Ned would never shy away from his responsibilities. But isn't that more reason to tell him? To fix the problem before it happens?"
I shook my head, considering whether to rip off the bandage. "Promise me as your liege that you will keep this secret until I tell you otherwise, Uncle. I promise that the information I give you will show you how dire the situation is."
Uncle Benjen remained silent for a moment before giving me a firm nod. "I swear by the Old Gods that I won't say a word about what you tell me, Lord Stark."
I sighed, hoping I was making the best decision. "I'm trusting you a lot with this information, Uncle. Please, don't let me down."
Checking with my insects to ensure we were alone and that no one was close to my solar, I began the explanation.
"The children of the King are bastards… As you may have heard about how these dreams work, I don't get told everything I need to know, I only get glimpses. But yesterday, I was able to find out about this," I explained, defeated.
"What?!" Uncle Benjen stood up and started pacing around the room, considering the repercussions.
"Who knows about this?" he asked.
"For now, only us from this side of the Kingdom, aside from us, the perpetrators, the Queen, her brother Jaime Lannister, and the late Hand of the King, Jon Arryn," I answered.
Uncle Benjen stopped cold in his tracks. "Incest?" he murmured. "And now Ned is the Hand of the King; he will be in danger, Robb. We need to tell him!" He turned around to search for my father.
Raising my voice momentarily, I called out, "Uncle Benjen! Think about this rationally. What would Father do if he were to learn about this?"
Benjen froze for a second, letting out some curses in desperation.
"Now you understand, Uncle? Father would tell the Queen that he knows about this and he would die because of it," I said quietly.
"Damn it… you are right. What can we do?" he asked desperately.
"You won't do anything about this. Leave the problems of the Kingdom to me. I swear on my life that I won't let him die because of his stupidity," I assured him.
Benjen looked directly into my eyes, searching for deceit. After finding only conviction, he nodded. "You said it was a war on two fronts, nephew. What's the other one?" he asked with trepidation.
"The White Walkers are real," I told him simply. "We are in the middle of two wars capable of destroying all life in Westeros and beyond. We must remain united if we hope to win, and even then, millions will die to make it happen," I sighed, feeling the weight of the world on my shoulders.
"Damn!" Benjen bellowed, starting to punch the wall hysterically.
Letting him vent for a moment, I waited for him to calm down a little.
"What can we do, Robb? This is way more than I expected right now; it's too early, and I'm too sober for this," he admitted, feeling out of his depth.
"We are in a really bad spot, Uncle. I won't lie about that, but we can win. For that, I need you to trust me and follow my suggestions," I began.
Opening a drawer, I pulled out a box I had prepared for this conversation. Inside were six daggers made of dragonglass. I also took out a package of arrowheads made of the same material.
"I want you to take these. Keep the arrows with you and two daggers," I started explaining. "The White Walkers are vulnerable to this, Valyrian steel, and fire. You won't be able to damage them at all with normal steel. The rest of the daggers I want you to give one to Commander Mormont, and the rest are for some of the Wildlings."
"The Wildlings? Are you crazy, Robb?" asked Benjen.
"Do you remember the stories of the Long Night that old Nan tells us? What abilities do you remember the White Walkers having?" I asked him.
"They can raise the dead? What about it?" he asked, oblivious.
I rolled my eyes. "And how many Wildlings are there north of the Wall?" I asked him.
He was silent for a moment before his eyes widened when he realized what I was talking about. "Over a hundred thousand," he murmured.
I nodded grimly. "Can you imagine an army of undead numbering a hundred thousand? An army of that size that doesn't tire, doesn't feel pain, and can keep fighting without stopping?"
Benjen paled immediately, understanding the problem.
"Old Gods save us," he prayed. "What do you want me to do, Robb?"
With an encouraging smile, I began explaining all my plans to him.
Three Weeks Later
Going over every single scrap of information I had gathered over the weeks since the arrival of the royal family, I organized it by factions. It seemed Littlefinger had learned his lesson and hadn't sent anyone else with them. Aside from the Master of Coins, there were spies sent by the Reach, who were trying to gather information about us for the Queen of Thorns.
They were easy enough to identify thanks to my power, but the number of spies sent by different factions was overwhelming. I couldn't fathom why they would spend so much on something so trivial. It wasn't as if they hadn't tried in the past few years, and I had no idea why they thought using the royal visit as an excuse would make them successful this time.
At least Varys had learned his lesson after a couple of false starts. Before the Crown's arrival, we were very explicit with our orders: our subjects were to accept every single attempt to buy their allegiance and then report to us. The Starks would double what they were offered if they provided evidence of who tried to buy them. But thanks to the loyalty we had from them, none accepted the "double it" part we offered. They were allowed to keep what they were paid, but everyone insisted we keep our gold and continue helping the North as a whole.
Of course, there were a couple who tried to lie to me; humanity tends to get greedy no matter what they have already gained. But with a few examples of what happens when someone tries to cheat me, such cases were kept to a minimum.
Uncle Benjen left over three weeks ago to start with my plans at the Wall and with the Wildlings. He took a message for the Commander, and in it, I said I would send someone I trust to the Wall to help with everything. Jon would leave Winterfell a few days later after the royal family departed with my father. He would have orders to prepare the Wall for what is to come.
The royal family was already preparing for departure, and with this move, every single one of my plans would start to take effect. I would begin by sending messages to every keep on the shores of the North to ramp up the training of recruits and to be ready to close our borders when the war starts.
I knew it wouldn't be the same as in the canon timeline, as the small changes had altered everything. There would be no reason for my mother to detain Tyrion, so, Tywin wouldn't attack the Riverlands, at least for that reason, who knew what the Warhawk thought. The war would start when my father, in his honorable self, learned about the bastards of the royal family and gave Cersei time to prepare for her small rebellion. After that, it would be almost the same. If I remember correctly, it took several months for my father to find out the truth, but I wouldn't leave it to chance.
Thankfully, I had two wonderful advisors who could take care of things here in the North while I completed my plans: Mother and Sansa. They had become brilliant in politics and respected for their beauty and openness over the past couple of years. I could leave the North in their capable hands while I went incognito to stay alert for any important changes.
First, I would search for allies in the Riverlands, starting with our uncle, Brynden Tully. After that, I would go to King's Landing and live there for a while, focusing on obtaining useful information. When the war started, we would invade the South, destroy House Frey, and take control of the Twins to maximize the protection of the North going forward.
I knew plans could change on the fly, so I didn't bother with more than that until I knew what changes to the canon timeline were made thanks to my moves. I would try to adapt as necessary.
Stopping for a moment, I reflected on the events of the royal visit, from amusing moments to rage-inducing ones. In particular, the Crown Prince's attempts to woo Sansa were painful to watch. When my sister rejected him, he showed his true colors. He was harshly punished by the King, which earned the ire of the Queen. But it didn't matter; she didn't have the power to harm us at the moment, and she would try in the future even if nothing happened during her stay in Winterfell.
I had gathered so much information over these weeks that it would take a long time to go through it all, even with the help of Jon, the Maester, and Mother. But it would be worth it as it could help us with blackmail and other strategies.
I also had an enlightening conversation with Tyrion and learned about how Tywin made his life miserable in the Westerlands, leading him to live in the capital. Thanks to his familiarity with Lady Elyse, the former Hand of the King helped him secure a job with her.
Two Days Later
The whole family was sad to see Father leave for the South. We all had sentimental farewells in private. At the entrance of Winterfell, we projected an unflappable front, but even so, a couple of tears were shed by most of us.
Telling him to take care, I hugged him and whispered in his ear, "I'll take care of the North while you are gone, Father."
"I know, Robb. I trust you," he answered, hugging me harder.
"Be very careful in the capital, Father. I want you to know that aside from the guards who accompany you, you have no allies there. Trust me on this, Father. No one will help you, and if they offer to do so, you must know that they want something in return," I told him solemnly.
My father was taken aback, but after a moment, he nodded firmly, showing that he understood.
I would take care of him when I was done with my plans here, but before that, I had to trust Jory, who would go with him and the rest of the guards. They were some of the best we had to offer, and I trusted them completely.
Seeing them leave, I felt a moment of dread. Everything felt real now, and I knew that a simple mistake could make me lose a member of my family. But with the growing dread came a sense of determination. I would win, and no one could stop the rise of the North anymore.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 35: Discussions and Preparations
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Author's note: It seems 2k+ is the new normal, lol. I'll see if I can maintain the pace of five chapters a week, but I'll let you know if anything changes.
Also, the next chapter will feature different POVs, showing what has been happening during this time and all that jazz.
Another thing, kids gloves are off, there no need to hide with the start of canon, a couple of chapters to the war to start and we get our fill with violence.
Winterfell
It had been more than a week since I became the new Lord Paramount of the North. Thanks to the confidence my father had in me, it was even more formalized than in the canon timeline. Having forged my reputation through years of hard work, I commanded the respect of the various clans in the North.
For that reason, all the lords from the North followed my orders without much fuss. The Reeds of Greywater Watch, a vassal house and one of the most loyal in the North, were particularly trustworthy. Even though I hadn't met them in this timeline, I knew I could rely on them with my life.
What was suspicious was the message we received in response to our order to close the border. Howland Reed, the lord of the house, was sending his heir and son, Jojen, along with his daughter, Meera, to Winterfell with urgent news. Thanks to the series, I knew Jojen was a Greenseer with visions of the future. However, I knew little about Howland—he might be a Greenseer even more powerful than his son, or perhaps he simply trusted Jojen as much as my father trusted me.
Regardless, both of them would be valuable assets. Given how far the canon timeline had diverged, I couldn't be sure of much more than that. With Bran safe and retaining his mobility, I was unsure how this would affect the Three-Eyed Raven's plans.
I was certain he already knew who was responsible for the changes, but I wasn't sure how he would react. Depictions of him in various fanfics varied widely, from a benevolent old man making poor decisions to a ruthless figure willing to do anything to win his game. If he resembled the former, I wouldn't mind having another ally since his power was extremely useful. However, if he was like the latter, he would need to hide from me to avoid my wrath for interfering with my family and my plans.
Taking a moment to review my plans, I noticed that the people I had invited to my new solar were approaching. I had summoned the key figures in the castle to begin planning for what lay ahead.
Mother and Sansa were present, as Sansa was being taught about politics and other complex matters. Since she had taken a liking to it and was becoming quite adept, I discussed with Mother the importance of helping her reach her full potential. The Maester and Ser Rodrik were invited for their expertise in politics and warfare, and Jon, who was tasked with overseeing the Wall in the future, was also present.
I had spoken with Jon, and while he wasn't thrilled about the idea, he understood that I needed him more here than with me, at least for a while. If I needed to move incognito for a few months, I couldn't take him with me, and I was capable of defending myself if necessary. I could fight with no holds barred if I was alone and without worrying about my companions.
Reflecting on this, I remembered the advantage I had gained from the royal visit. From the series, I recalled that the Red Priestess Melisandre mentioned the usefulness of royal blood in many ways. I used my insect-creation power to make several bedbugs with increased potency in their anesthetic and larger sizes to store more blood. After three weeks of my bedbugs working while the royals slept, I collected royal blood, excluding Myrcella and Tommen, whom I rather liked, from four flasks filled with blood from King Robert, two from the Queen, and six from Crown Prince Joffrey, whose blood was harvested more intensely after he shouted at Sansa when she rejected him.
I also asked Jon for a flask of his blood, which he gave me willingly, showing his trust in me. I tried ingesting the blood from each royal to see if they provided any special benefits. To my surprise, the blood did grant some advantages, though not all were effective.
When my insects absorbed King Robert's blood, I didn't feel any immediate change until a burning sensation in my head caused me to fall unconscious. Fortunately, I had prepared for this in my chambers before going to sleep. Upon waking, I found that all insects I had and would create in the future were sturdier and had increased overall physical strength. The Queen's blood was also useful, increasing my range by at least 30%. Joffrey's blood granted me the ability to issue simple commands to my insects that they would follow for some time even if I wasn't present. However, the blood from Jon was inert, which was puzzling since he was the main protagonist, at least for me. I wasn't sure why it didn't work, but I hoped to find out.
Maybe I needed more dragon blood to unlock benefits, or maybe Jon's blood was way too strong and my power couldn't digest it as fast as the other ones, I had no idea but I hoped that was the case. Since it was stronger, the benefits should be the same.
I stopped contemplating this as my visitors arrived. Once they were seated, I began the meeting.
"Why did you call us, dear?" Mother asked.
"To review all the information I gathered during the royal visit, Mother, and to brief the Maester and Ser Rodrik. It's time I stop hiding, at least from those in this room," I said seriously.
I had considered this for a long time, and with the onset of the canon events, it seemed the best moment to be transparent with my advisors. It would be foolish to hide my powers during the coming conflict. Thus, I began with my "inner circle."
"Are you finally going to tell us about your magic, Lord Stark?" asked the Maester knowingly.
Catelyn gasped, astonished at how he had deduced something we had tried to keep hidden for so long.
I simply laughed, appreciating the Maester's intelligence in piecing together the anomalies of the past years. Ser Rodrik remained silent but showed no surprise, clearly aware that something wasn't right, even if he didn't know the full extent.
"You both are too damn clever for your own good," I sighed good-naturedly, then with a smile, I summoned some of my insects to demonstrate.
After explaining my powers and answering questions from the two older men and a few from Sansa, who was genuinely disturbed by them, I moved to the main topic.
"As you can see, my insects have significant advantages due to my ability to manipulate them, making them useful for espionage and assassination. During the royal family's stay in Winterfell, I used them to gather information about events in the Seven Kingdoms," I explained seriously.
"And what did you learn, Lord Stark?" asked Ser Rodrik.
"Some things I wish I hadn't," I replied dramatically.
"Don't keep us waiting, dear. We must make use of everything you've learned," Mother urged, with Sansa nodding eagerly at the pile of parchment on the table.
"There is a war approaching from the South," I began, carefully outlining what I knew of the original timeline as if it were recent information. I discussed the Queen's infidelity, the perpetrators, and most of what I remembered about the South.
Father was already planning to investigate the Lannisters based on Lysa Arryn's letter. I made sure to inform everyone that she was behind Jon Arryn's death and that Petyr Baelish was the mastermind. Mother initially refused to believe it, but with each piece of information I provided, I managed to convince her, reminding her of how Lysa had been infatuated with Littlefinger while he was fostering in the Riverlands and all the ensuing drama.
After I finished, everyone was silent. I stood up to serve six cups of wine, hoping it would help them process the information and help my parched throat.
Mother stood up quickly, exclaiming, "Ned is in danger in the capital! Why did you let him go knowing this?" Her eyes were filled with concern.
"You know what Father would have done, Mother. Trust me, he will be fine and back in Winterfell in a few months," I reassured her, laughing. "I already had this conversation with Uncle Benjen."
"What will we do, Lord Stark?" asked Ser Rodrik.
"As you know, I ordered every lord with open territories to close their borders and begin training for conflict. Most of them don't know who the enemy is, but I have enough respect that they are complying without asking many questions," I explained.
"And what about Father?" asked Jon calmly, trusting that I wouldn't endanger him without a good reason.
"That's where all of you come into play," I smiled. "Mother and Sansa will manage Winterfell for the foreseeable future." I began explaining, but Sansa immediately raised her hand. I shook my head. "Listen first, little sister."
She blushed, then nodded and lowered her hand.
"Jon will head to the Wall for the task I've already explained. While on the way, I want you to take some time to check the progress of Froststorm, the town in the ex-Bolton territory, and give a letter to the person in charge to increase equipment production. We no longer need to hide. News travels slowly, and by the time the South hears of this, we'll already be in open war," I smiled at Jon, who returned it with a firm nod.
"After completing his tasks in Froststorm, Jon will visit the Umbers and the Karstarks and instruct them to begin the plan we discussed years ago," I continued. "They are already on my side and trust me implicitly, so we can be sure that part of the North will be ready for the call to arms."
"Jon knows the rest of his tasks, and I can't disclose some details for important reasons," I added seriously.
"Will he be in danger?" Sansa asked, trying to sound mature but failing.
Jon stood up, hugged her, and kissed her brow. "I'll be fine, Sansa. Trust in your brother," he smiled.
I smiled at them, pleased that their relationship was so positive due to her change in instructors. Mother watched the scene with a complicated expression, but it softened into a smile after a moment. She had difficult feelings about Jon, but she was working hard to improve her attitude.
"What about us?" Mother asked.
"You four," I pointed at the Maester, Ser Rodrik, and the two women in the room, "will stay in Winterfell and govern it in my stead. You have permission to act as you see fit. I've already prepared a list of dos and don'ts, and as long as you follow my instructions, I trust you to handle it."
"I know it will be challenging, but I believe you four are more than capable," I concluded with a smile.
"What about you, Robb?" asked Sansa, tilting her head cutely.
She treated Jon and me as dependable big brothers. Outside, she maintained an impassive demeanor, but with us, she acted and sought to be pampered.
Rubbing her hair playfully until she squawked in outrage, I revealed my plans. "I'll be going South. We need allies, and some obstacles need to be removed. Beyond that, I need to protect Father from the shadows. We all know his honor will endanger him sooner or later, and he is already investigating the Lannisters."
"He is in their seat of power, and they control more than Robert would admit," I continued. "I give it a few months for him to get into trouble, but by then, I'll already be there to extract him and our men from the capital."
Gradually, everyone began offering suggestions and ideas, leading to some adjustments in my plans. This made me realize that telling them the truth was the right choice. They knew Westeros better than I did—the movers and shakers responsible for keeping the kingdom running.
At the end of the meeting, I went with the Maester to explain some of my inventions that he would oversee in the future. There were many things I had been reluctant to reveal before, but with the looming threat of war, we needed every advantage we could get.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Also, the next chapter will feature different POVs, showing what has been happening during this time and all that jazz.
Another thing, kids gloves are off, there no need to hide with the start of canon, a couple of chapters to the war to start and we get our fill with violence.
Winterfell
It had been more than a week since I became the new Lord Paramount of the North. Thanks to the confidence my father had in me, it was even more formalized than in the canon timeline. Having forged my reputation through years of hard work, I commanded the respect of the various clans in the North.
For that reason, all the lords from the North followed my orders without much fuss. The Reeds of Greywater Watch, a vassal house and one of the most loyal in the North, were particularly trustworthy. Even though I hadn't met them in this timeline, I knew I could rely on them with my life.
What was suspicious was the message we received in response to our order to close the border. Howland Reed, the lord of the house, was sending his heir and son, Jojen, along with his daughter, Meera, to Winterfell with urgent news. Thanks to the series, I knew Jojen was a Greenseer with visions of the future. However, I knew little about Howland—he might be a Greenseer even more powerful than his son, or perhaps he simply trusted Jojen as much as my father trusted me.
Regardless, both of them would be valuable assets. Given how far the canon timeline had diverged, I couldn't be sure of much more than that. With Bran safe and retaining his mobility, I was unsure how this would affect the Three-Eyed Raven's plans.
I was certain he already knew who was responsible for the changes, but I wasn't sure how he would react. Depictions of him in various fanfics varied widely, from a benevolent old man making poor decisions to a ruthless figure willing to do anything to win his game. If he resembled the former, I wouldn't mind having another ally since his power was extremely useful. However, if he was like the latter, he would need to hide from me to avoid my wrath for interfering with my family and my plans.
Taking a moment to review my plans, I noticed that the people I had invited to my new solar were approaching. I had summoned the key figures in the castle to begin planning for what lay ahead.
Mother and Sansa were present, as Sansa was being taught about politics and other complex matters. Since she had taken a liking to it and was becoming quite adept, I discussed with Mother the importance of helping her reach her full potential. The Maester and Ser Rodrik were invited for their expertise in politics and warfare, and Jon, who was tasked with overseeing the Wall in the future, was also present.
I had spoken with Jon, and while he wasn't thrilled about the idea, he understood that I needed him more here than with me, at least for a while. If I needed to move incognito for a few months, I couldn't take him with me, and I was capable of defending myself if necessary. I could fight with no holds barred if I was alone and without worrying about my companions.
Reflecting on this, I remembered the advantage I had gained from the royal visit. From the series, I recalled that the Red Priestess Melisandre mentioned the usefulness of royal blood in many ways. I used my insect-creation power to make several bedbugs with increased potency in their anesthetic and larger sizes to store more blood. After three weeks of my bedbugs working while the royals slept, I collected royal blood, excluding Myrcella and Tommen, whom I rather liked, from four flasks filled with blood from King Robert, two from the Queen, and six from Crown Prince Joffrey, whose blood was harvested more intensely after he shouted at Sansa when she rejected him.
I also asked Jon for a flask of his blood, which he gave me willingly, showing his trust in me. I tried ingesting the blood from each royal to see if they provided any special benefits. To my surprise, the blood did grant some advantages, though not all were effective.
When my insects absorbed King Robert's blood, I didn't feel any immediate change until a burning sensation in my head caused me to fall unconscious. Fortunately, I had prepared for this in my chambers before going to sleep. Upon waking, I found that all insects I had and would create in the future were sturdier and had increased overall physical strength. The Queen's blood was also useful, increasing my range by at least 30%. Joffrey's blood granted me the ability to issue simple commands to my insects that they would follow for some time even if I wasn't present. However, the blood from Jon was inert, which was puzzling since he was the main protagonist, at least for me. I wasn't sure why it didn't work, but I hoped to find out.
Maybe I needed more dragon blood to unlock benefits, or maybe Jon's blood was way too strong and my power couldn't digest it as fast as the other ones, I had no idea but I hoped that was the case. Since it was stronger, the benefits should be the same.
I stopped contemplating this as my visitors arrived. Once they were seated, I began the meeting.
"Why did you call us, dear?" Mother asked.
"To review all the information I gathered during the royal visit, Mother, and to brief the Maester and Ser Rodrik. It's time I stop hiding, at least from those in this room," I said seriously.
I had considered this for a long time, and with the onset of the canon events, it seemed the best moment to be transparent with my advisors. It would be foolish to hide my powers during the coming conflict. Thus, I began with my "inner circle."
"Are you finally going to tell us about your magic, Lord Stark?" asked the Maester knowingly.
Catelyn gasped, astonished at how he had deduced something we had tried to keep hidden for so long.
I simply laughed, appreciating the Maester's intelligence in piecing together the anomalies of the past years. Ser Rodrik remained silent but showed no surprise, clearly aware that something wasn't right, even if he didn't know the full extent.
"You both are too damn clever for your own good," I sighed good-naturedly, then with a smile, I summoned some of my insects to demonstrate.
After explaining my powers and answering questions from the two older men and a few from Sansa, who was genuinely disturbed by them, I moved to the main topic.
"As you can see, my insects have significant advantages due to my ability to manipulate them, making them useful for espionage and assassination. During the royal family's stay in Winterfell, I used them to gather information about events in the Seven Kingdoms," I explained seriously.
"And what did you learn, Lord Stark?" asked Ser Rodrik.
"Some things I wish I hadn't," I replied dramatically.
"Don't keep us waiting, dear. We must make use of everything you've learned," Mother urged, with Sansa nodding eagerly at the pile of parchment on the table.
"There is a war approaching from the South," I began, carefully outlining what I knew of the original timeline as if it were recent information. I discussed the Queen's infidelity, the perpetrators, and most of what I remembered about the South.
Father was already planning to investigate the Lannisters based on Lysa Arryn's letter. I made sure to inform everyone that she was behind Jon Arryn's death and that Petyr Baelish was the mastermind. Mother initially refused to believe it, but with each piece of information I provided, I managed to convince her, reminding her of how Lysa had been infatuated with Littlefinger while he was fostering in the Riverlands and all the ensuing drama.
After I finished, everyone was silent. I stood up to serve six cups of wine, hoping it would help them process the information and help my parched throat.
Mother stood up quickly, exclaiming, "Ned is in danger in the capital! Why did you let him go knowing this?" Her eyes were filled with concern.
"You know what Father would have done, Mother. Trust me, he will be fine and back in Winterfell in a few months," I reassured her, laughing. "I already had this conversation with Uncle Benjen."
"What will we do, Lord Stark?" asked Ser Rodrik.
"As you know, I ordered every lord with open territories to close their borders and begin training for conflict. Most of them don't know who the enemy is, but I have enough respect that they are complying without asking many questions," I explained.
"And what about Father?" asked Jon calmly, trusting that I wouldn't endanger him without a good reason.
"That's where all of you come into play," I smiled. "Mother and Sansa will manage Winterfell for the foreseeable future." I began explaining, but Sansa immediately raised her hand. I shook my head. "Listen first, little sister."
She blushed, then nodded and lowered her hand.
"Jon will head to the Wall for the task I've already explained. While on the way, I want you to take some time to check the progress of Froststorm, the town in the ex-Bolton territory, and give a letter to the person in charge to increase equipment production. We no longer need to hide. News travels slowly, and by the time the South hears of this, we'll already be in open war," I smiled at Jon, who returned it with a firm nod.
"After completing his tasks in Froststorm, Jon will visit the Umbers and the Karstarks and instruct them to begin the plan we discussed years ago," I continued. "They are already on my side and trust me implicitly, so we can be sure that part of the North will be ready for the call to arms."
"Jon knows the rest of his tasks, and I can't disclose some details for important reasons," I added seriously.
"Will he be in danger?" Sansa asked, trying to sound mature but failing.
Jon stood up, hugged her, and kissed her brow. "I'll be fine, Sansa. Trust in your brother," he smiled.
I smiled at them, pleased that their relationship was so positive due to her change in instructors. Mother watched the scene with a complicated expression, but it softened into a smile after a moment. She had difficult feelings about Jon, but she was working hard to improve her attitude.
"What about us?" Mother asked.
"You four," I pointed at the Maester, Ser Rodrik, and the two women in the room, "will stay in Winterfell and govern it in my stead. You have permission to act as you see fit. I've already prepared a list of dos and don'ts, and as long as you follow my instructions, I trust you to handle it."
"I know it will be challenging, but I believe you four are more than capable," I concluded with a smile.
"What about you, Robb?" asked Sansa, tilting her head cutely.
She treated Jon and me as dependable big brothers. Outside, she maintained an impassive demeanor, but with us, she acted and sought to be pampered.
Rubbing her hair playfully until she squawked in outrage, I revealed my plans. "I'll be going South. We need allies, and some obstacles need to be removed. Beyond that, I need to protect Father from the shadows. We all know his honor will endanger him sooner or later, and he is already investigating the Lannisters."
"He is in their seat of power, and they control more than Robert would admit," I continued. "I give it a few months for him to get into trouble, but by then, I'll already be there to extract him and our men from the capital."
Gradually, everyone began offering suggestions and ideas, leading to some adjustments in my plans. This made me realize that telling them the truth was the right choice. They knew Westeros better than I did—the movers and shakers responsible for keeping the kingdom running.
At the end of the meeting, I went with the Maester to explain some of my inventions that he would oversee in the future. There were many things I had been reluctant to reveal before, but with the looming threat of war, we needed every advantage we could get.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 36: Various PoVs
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Author's Note: Okay, what the heck! This chapter just kept getting longer and longer to the point where it will count as two for this week, lol. With the extra day I gained from this chapter, I'll start editing my earlier chapters to begin cross-posting. Wish me luck! Also, thanks to all my patrons. We're a small community, but I thank you from the bottom of my heart for your support—it means a lot.
Enjoy this chapter! There are plenty of reactions and many changes from the canon timeline.
Maester Luwin PoV
Winterfell
As I went through every parchment for the young lord of Winterfell, I felt this dread for the first time. I've lived in the North for decades since the Citadel assigned me here, and I've endured some rough winters. I was in Winterfell during the bleakest times, such as when the last Lady Stark died giving birth to young Benjen or when Lord Rickard followed his heir Brandon to King's Landing, and both were slaughtered by the Mad King.
The rebellion was also a rough patch in history, and while it didn't affect the North that much, the famine that followed was severe. Many people died from the lack of food due to that conflict.
But this? This was the worst that could happen to the North. We knew of the Queen's dalliance with her twin brother thanks to Lord Robb's information. It was easy to see that the Crown Prince was a disturbed individual, and incest might be the reason he acted like that. Maybe that was why the Targaryens were mad when they had children with their siblings.
In the long run, it didn't matter. He would never be King for long, even if he wore the Crown in the future; his rage and frankly horrible attitude would get him killed when he crossed someone he shouldn't.
But it would mean war. With Lord Eddard going as the Hand of the King and knowing him since he was a babe, I knew he would investigate the Lannisters about the death of Jon Arryn. This would get him into trouble, but hopefully, the new Lord Stark could help him.
I shook my head in wonder. Young Robb was truly blessed with his warfare powers and everything he left for me. Checking the records of his inventions and the locations he had found in these last years of natural resources, I started planning what we would need to use first.
First, he left us the key to a part of the dungeons where he collected many insects that help our land grow and keep our plants prospering. With this, I could send it to every keep and settlement in the North free of charge to prepare for war and save food to avoid the shortages that come with conflict.
Then, I would focus on the mineral mines that Robb found in his travels, giving them to each family closest to them to supervise. This was a point of contention between Lady Stark and Young Robb, as Lady Stark felt it would be in our best interest to keep control of all the mines. But Young Robb skillfully convinced her to follow his lead, knowing that even after so many years, Lady Catelyn still thought like a Southerner, and things worked differently in the North.
With all these mines, only possible to locate thanks to his power—which I didn't believe it wasn't magic, but Lord Robb assured me he didn't have magic, or at least didn't know how to use it—the North could prepare faster. The rest of the kingdoms didn't know what would happen soon, and we needed to capitalize.
All these mines were of different metals, which would be helpful to the North. The families in charge of the mines would have to pay a percentage to House Stark. This way, both families would benefit since they could only have found them with a stroke of luck, and we wouldn't need to spend gold and workers to mine the metals.
From iron deposits discovered near the Long Lake, close to the Last Heart, to another somewhat close to Deepwood Motte, Robb had found five iron deposits in the North thanks to his powers. Four of them were major deposits, and one was moderate. All this would enhance the productivity of the blacksmiths in the North and provide coins for workers.
The other deposits Robb found were three moderate deposits of copper, primarily used for weapons when combined with tin to make bronze or to mint money, as it was the "change" in our economy.
There were only two deposits of tin, but that was more than enough to make bronze since each deposit was really small. The quantity available on the market made bronze expensive due to its rarity.
Aside from those, only three other metal deposits were found: two of lead and one of silver. All of them were to be mined by the closest lords with territories. Thanks to House Stark's loyalty from the other lords, this would be done without much problem. Even so, trusted subordinates would supervise to ensure no one tried to cheat the Ghost of the North.
Standing up and walking toward my solar, I prepared my Hand. Thanks to the many letters I would need to pen to different lords, I knew it would hurt for a while. Smiling at the guard posted near the entrance, I walked directly to him.
"Jona, I need you to accomplish some tasks for Lord Stark," I greeted him calmly.
"Whatever he needs, Maester Luwin," he answered with zeal.
I smiled at him. The situation was dire, but it was heartwarming to know that so many people trusted us to work for their benefit and were willing to help.
"You are a good kid, Jona," I told him before entering the solar with him behind me. "I need you to find Ser Rodrik and ask him to send me thirty of his most trusted men—people who would never betray us," I continued firmly.
Jona gulped, showing his nervousness. He was barely nine and ten, old enough to understand that something big was happening.
After a moment, he nodded firmly and bolted out of my solar. I had time, as finding thirty loyal and dependable men would take time.
Varys PoV
Kingsroad.
I vowed never to visit the North again if I could help it. I had never met so many hard-to-read people, and I could not find a single piece of evidence of something happening. I felt it in my bones: something was brewing, and for the life of me, I didn't know what.
I didn't know how the Starks instilled such loyalty in their subjects; honestly, the past two kings could learn how to govern a kingdom from them. Aerys was mad, which didn't help at all, but even before his madness peaked, he was an evil king. And the less said about Robert, the better.
He only knew how to fuck whores and drink himself to the grave, and with it, he was taking the kingdom to hell with him. Hopefully, the Targaryens were better, but I doubted it. There were rumors of Viserys madness, and he had his little sister under his thumb. I had heard that he had already sold her to the Dothraki, my good friend told me.
It was a clusterfuck, but I needed to work for the people. They had my allegiance, and I would work with everything I had to improve their lives.
The Queen didn't help at all. I didn't know what she was thinking, sleeping with her brother and having his children. Didn't she know that this would lead to ruin? A war was on the horizon, probably closer than I could say.
I could see Lord Stark was already suspicious of them. I didn't know the reason, as he had a fantastic poker face, but I inferred that he knew something about them.
The blackout of information from the North was irritating. I wasn't accustomed to not knowing things, and I couldn't even set a foothold during my stay in Winterfell. Every servant I tried to buy accepted the money happily, but no one gave me information. After the fifth one, I knew something was happening, and listening to some laugh at me for trying to buy their allegiance was aggravating. I couldn't do anything against them since they would tell the King when asked, and I couldn't be seen trying to spy in the ancestral home of the new Hand of the King.
I wondered if Lord Eddard knew what I tried to do. Ever since leaving Winterfell, he only talked with the King and the people accompanying him from Winterfell. I noticed that he trusted no one, which was smart of him. But he didn't show the dislike I would expect if he knew someone had tried to spy on his home.
Feeling a smile on my face, I wondered who the servants had told about my dealings. How curious. It seemed that the last Lord Stark didn't know everything that happened in his seat of power.
Jon Snow PoV
Outskirts of FrostStorm
As I approached Froststorm with my group, I started to slow down since there were many guards near the entrance of the new town. I couldn't help but marvel at how life had changed since Robb's accident.
I couldn't stop smiling when I thought about my family. It's been a while since I've been away from everyone, but in the last few years, I have grown to appreciate even Lady Catelyn.
I had always been close to Robb, but everything changed for the better after his accident. We became closer, like true brothers, and he kept me by his side despite the stigma of my name.
I couldn't lie to myself and say that I didn't feel bad when someone called me a bastard, even if they murmured it to themselves. But over the years, thanks to Robb and Father, everyone stopped.
Even though I knew the truth about my parentage, I knew deep down that Eddard Stark loved me and did what he could to protect me. I didn't agree with all his choices, but I knew he did what he thought was best.
Over the years, I had become Robb's right Hand, following him everywhere and taking his lead. I preferred that. I wasn't a leader and didn't want to be one.
But right now? He needed me, and I would accomplish what he asked of me.
"Open the gates," was heard from outside as we got closer.
Galloping to the center of the town, I spotted Smalljon waiting for us with Thorren. I was happy to see my friends after so long.
"Guys!" I exclaimed with a smile as I approached them.
Hugging each of them, they patted my back in greeting. They had been left here to continue supervising and gain experience leading people. They were the heirs of two powerful vassals, so it was a win-win for all of us.
"How have you been, Jon?" asked Smalljon with a booming laugh.
"Everything is good. Have you heard the news?" I asked with a smile.
"About the new Lord Stark? It's what everyone has been talking about for the past week," Thorren said.
"Yes, and he sent me here for a while. It's time we start showing our true colors. The North is strong," I said with conviction.
Both of them jolted when they heard me use these words. It was something Robb had told us weeks after the attack on the Dreadfort, a secret that when we uttered it, it meant that we needed to stop hiding the production done here.
"Did he tell you why?" Thorren asked, even as Smalljon left us to complete his tasks. We needed every blacksmith working full throttle to make weapons, and the metals we hadn't used since we wanted to be sneaky about it would last only for a month with all of them working all the time.
Thankfully, Robb thought of that. A large amount of metals would be mined in the next couple of months. He had already ordered the blacksmiths here to build a large quantity of mining gear for this purpose. We would sell it to every house in charge of the mines so they could start quickly.
"The war is inevitable," I admitted. Robb had permitted me to clue them in. "He found out that the King's sons are bastards. There is no heir to the Iron Throne," I said grimly.
"Fuck… an all-out war will happen. The Lannisters won't leave without a fight," Thorren exclaimed.
"Indeed. And we will be in the midst of it," I said gravely.
"Why would we join this stupid war? It doesn't concern us," Thorren asked.
I sighed and rubbed my temples. "We don't have much choice," I shook my head. "Let's wait for Smalljon so I can clue you both in without repeating myself later."
Thorren nodded with a furrowed brow.
Entering the castle, we headed toward the solar of the late Roose Bolton, where Smalljon was already waiting for us, penning some letters for his father that I would take when I passed the Last Heart on my way to the Wall.
Tyrion Lannister PoV
Kingsroad
I loved the North. The people and the atmosphere were a godsend. They didn't treat me like the people in the South, and I found myself longing to stay here.
A shame, really; I would love to visit the Wall and take a piss from the top. But I had my duties now. Thanks to my bastard of a father, I was the poorest Lannister. Now, he didn't care about how I besmirched the name. He was done with me, and I was with him. I didn't need them as they didn't know they needed me.
Everything changed after my last trip to the North, and Father was not happy with my failure to steal knowledge from them. Well, fuck him. I was done with it, too. I met people who didn't talk badly about me, respected me, and knew what I had to offer. I wasn't a fighter, but I was a scholar. What I lacked in physical power, I made up for in wit.
Thankfully, the late Hand offered me a job with the wonderful Elyse. Thanks to her word of recommendation, I learned from her and did everything I could to help her.
Seeing my sister pampering her son was as distasteful as ever. How no one knew her sons were Jaime's, I didn't know. I was pretty sure Varys knew, but he didn't say anything, and I wouldn't either. Jaime deserved this from me since he was one of the only people who treated me right, along with Aunt Genna.
But everything would come to light in the future. I had already noted that Ned Stark was after my sister. He knew something, but I wasn't sure what. I needed to make sure I was ready to escape this clusterfuck that was coming.
Thankfully, Lord Robb Stark had an enlightening conversation with me. I wouldn't admit it, but the kid scared me more than my father ever could. There was something downright intimidating about his knowing eyes and how he acted like he knew things that shouldn't be possible.
Flashback
"It's wonderful to have you back in Winterfell, Tyrion," I heard the voice of the newly appointed Lord Stark behind me.
I needed fresh air from the banquet, so I left the premises, hoping no one would notice. But I was wrong.
Lord Robb Stark was already waiting for me near the stables. How he knew where I was going was a mystery to me, and from his knowing smile, he knew how that made me feel.
"It's been more than a year since I last saw you, Lord Stark," I greeted him after I calmed myself down.
"Yes, it's been a while, hasn't it? It's wonderful how life can change so much in such an insignificant amount of time," Lord Robb laughed.
I got mad at him for making fun of me. I didn't know how he knew about my situation, but I didn't think he would turn on me like that.
"What do you want with me, Lord Stark?" I asked impassively.
"Now, now, calm down. Walk with me for a bit. I want you to be sober for this conversation," he kept joking, but I tagged along as he started walking toward the Wolfswood.
At least he kept the pace slow enough for me to keep up.
"Now, can you tell me what you want with me?" I asked impatiently.
"Just a moment," he raised his hand, and instantly, I felt all the sensations of being drunk disappear from my body.
I looked around with amazed eyes before eyeing the only one who could be responsible for this miracle.
"What did you do?" I asked, my voice trembling a little.
"As I told you before, I need you to be sober for this," he said lightly.
"Now I am sober, Lord Stark," I repeated impatiently. I didn't want to be near him. I didn't know what he did, but it weirded me out.
"Yes, yes. We can start now," he said. "Are you happy with your life, Tyrion? Being thrown out of the family for a failure in something not one person in the Seven Kingdoms and beyond could accomplish. It appears that your father sent you to steal from us to get rid of you for your failures."
That struck a chord within me. They knew I tried to steal from them, and now I was alone with one of them, unable to protect myself. Everyone saw me piss drunk at the banquet; if I disappeared, no one would know or care what happened to me.
I fell to my knees, trembling all over as my meager strength left me.
"Are you going to kill me?" I asked. I wouldn't beg, and surprisingly, I didn't feel bad about this as I thought I would.
There was silence after my question, and as the seconds passed, I grew impatient and searched for Robb's eyes. I saw him with a gobsmacked face, which confused me.
"What? No, Tyrion, what are you talking about? If I wanted to kill you, you would have died with the servant Littlefinger sent, and no one would know it was me," he explained quickly.
I didn't know if that was supposed to comfort me, but it only scared me even more. I saw the servant's death with my own eyes, and it was terrible.
"Now get up. I want to talk to you about something important," he said firmly.
I tried to stand up, but my legs didn't move. I heard him sigh and felt his arms grabbing mine, helping me sit down.
"We could have started this better," he laughed, shaking his head.
"You think?" I asked sarcastically.
"As I asked you before, are you happy with your life, Tyrion?" he asked me again, and I stopped to think.
"No," I murmured. "I'm pissed. I hate my family. Everyone is so idiotic, and they don't respect me," I shouted at him.
He patted my shoulder. "They don't understand how good of an ally you can be," he said.
"War is coming," he continued before looking into my eyes while I tried to avert them.
"You know about your sister," he said with no hesitation.
I trembled. We were screwed. People already knew about Cersei's idiotic decisions.
"It makes things easy then," he laughed. "Do you want them to win, use you for that, and then get rid of you when they don't need you anymore?"
I felt rage bubbling in my head. "NO! They can't win. I won't let them!" The hate I had spurred me to keep talking. Before my failure, life was not fair in Casterly Rock, but they burned all the bridges afterward.
"And do you want to live? To marry in the future, have a family?" he asked rhetorically.
"Of course, I would want to, but what woman would marry me? I'm a dwarf," I said despondently.
"I'm sure you'll find someone in the future, Tyrion. But tell me, what will happen to every Lannister when this comes to light?" Robb asked.
"We will all be killed. I would be grouped with them, even if I didn't have anything to do with it," I said sadly.
"Not if we help each other, Tyrion. I could help you escape when this blows up, but you need to do something for me," he said with a disturbing smile.
I felt like I was making a deal with the devil. But what choice did I have? I couldn't survive alone.
"What do you need me to do?" I asked desperately.
"I want you to be the Hand," he smiled.
"The Hand? For whom? For the bastard prince?" I laughed at the stupidity of that. He would rather kill me than make me his Hand.
"No, no… someone much more important," he said mysteriously.
I felt dread for a moment. This was a bad idea, but when did I make good ones?
"I want you to help Daenerys Targaryen as her Hand of the Queen," Robb said seriously.
Just at that moment, I started laughing hysterically. This was madness, but in the slight chance it worked? We would win big, and no one would see me as a lesser anymore.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Enjoy this chapter! There are plenty of reactions and many changes from the canon timeline.
Maester Luwin PoV
Winterfell
As I went through every parchment for the young lord of Winterfell, I felt this dread for the first time. I've lived in the North for decades since the Citadel assigned me here, and I've endured some rough winters. I was in Winterfell during the bleakest times, such as when the last Lady Stark died giving birth to young Benjen or when Lord Rickard followed his heir Brandon to King's Landing, and both were slaughtered by the Mad King.
The rebellion was also a rough patch in history, and while it didn't affect the North that much, the famine that followed was severe. Many people died from the lack of food due to that conflict.
But this? This was the worst that could happen to the North. We knew of the Queen's dalliance with her twin brother thanks to Lord Robb's information. It was easy to see that the Crown Prince was a disturbed individual, and incest might be the reason he acted like that. Maybe that was why the Targaryens were mad when they had children with their siblings.
In the long run, it didn't matter. He would never be King for long, even if he wore the Crown in the future; his rage and frankly horrible attitude would get him killed when he crossed someone he shouldn't.
But it would mean war. With Lord Eddard going as the Hand of the King and knowing him since he was a babe, I knew he would investigate the Lannisters about the death of Jon Arryn. This would get him into trouble, but hopefully, the new Lord Stark could help him.
I shook my head in wonder. Young Robb was truly blessed with his warfare powers and everything he left for me. Checking the records of his inventions and the locations he had found in these last years of natural resources, I started planning what we would need to use first.
First, he left us the key to a part of the dungeons where he collected many insects that help our land grow and keep our plants prospering. With this, I could send it to every keep and settlement in the North free of charge to prepare for war and save food to avoid the shortages that come with conflict.
Then, I would focus on the mineral mines that Robb found in his travels, giving them to each family closest to them to supervise. This was a point of contention between Lady Stark and Young Robb, as Lady Stark felt it would be in our best interest to keep control of all the mines. But Young Robb skillfully convinced her to follow his lead, knowing that even after so many years, Lady Catelyn still thought like a Southerner, and things worked differently in the North.
With all these mines, only possible to locate thanks to his power—which I didn't believe it wasn't magic, but Lord Robb assured me he didn't have magic, or at least didn't know how to use it—the North could prepare faster. The rest of the kingdoms didn't know what would happen soon, and we needed to capitalize.
All these mines were of different metals, which would be helpful to the North. The families in charge of the mines would have to pay a percentage to House Stark. This way, both families would benefit since they could only have found them with a stroke of luck, and we wouldn't need to spend gold and workers to mine the metals.
From iron deposits discovered near the Long Lake, close to the Last Heart, to another somewhat close to Deepwood Motte, Robb had found five iron deposits in the North thanks to his powers. Four of them were major deposits, and one was moderate. All this would enhance the productivity of the blacksmiths in the North and provide coins for workers.
The other deposits Robb found were three moderate deposits of copper, primarily used for weapons when combined with tin to make bronze or to mint money, as it was the "change" in our economy.
There were only two deposits of tin, but that was more than enough to make bronze since each deposit was really small. The quantity available on the market made bronze expensive due to its rarity.
Aside from those, only three other metal deposits were found: two of lead and one of silver. All of them were to be mined by the closest lords with territories. Thanks to House Stark's loyalty from the other lords, this would be done without much problem. Even so, trusted subordinates would supervise to ensure no one tried to cheat the Ghost of the North.
Standing up and walking toward my solar, I prepared my Hand. Thanks to the many letters I would need to pen to different lords, I knew it would hurt for a while. Smiling at the guard posted near the entrance, I walked directly to him.
"Jona, I need you to accomplish some tasks for Lord Stark," I greeted him calmly.
"Whatever he needs, Maester Luwin," he answered with zeal.
I smiled at him. The situation was dire, but it was heartwarming to know that so many people trusted us to work for their benefit and were willing to help.
"You are a good kid, Jona," I told him before entering the solar with him behind me. "I need you to find Ser Rodrik and ask him to send me thirty of his most trusted men—people who would never betray us," I continued firmly.
Jona gulped, showing his nervousness. He was barely nine and ten, old enough to understand that something big was happening.
After a moment, he nodded firmly and bolted out of my solar. I had time, as finding thirty loyal and dependable men would take time.
Varys PoV
Kingsroad.
I vowed never to visit the North again if I could help it. I had never met so many hard-to-read people, and I could not find a single piece of evidence of something happening. I felt it in my bones: something was brewing, and for the life of me, I didn't know what.
I didn't know how the Starks instilled such loyalty in their subjects; honestly, the past two kings could learn how to govern a kingdom from them. Aerys was mad, which didn't help at all, but even before his madness peaked, he was an evil king. And the less said about Robert, the better.
He only knew how to fuck whores and drink himself to the grave, and with it, he was taking the kingdom to hell with him. Hopefully, the Targaryens were better, but I doubted it. There were rumors of Viserys madness, and he had his little sister under his thumb. I had heard that he had already sold her to the Dothraki, my good friend told me.
It was a clusterfuck, but I needed to work for the people. They had my allegiance, and I would work with everything I had to improve their lives.
The Queen didn't help at all. I didn't know what she was thinking, sleeping with her brother and having his children. Didn't she know that this would lead to ruin? A war was on the horizon, probably closer than I could say.
I could see Lord Stark was already suspicious of them. I didn't know the reason, as he had a fantastic poker face, but I inferred that he knew something about them.
The blackout of information from the North was irritating. I wasn't accustomed to not knowing things, and I couldn't even set a foothold during my stay in Winterfell. Every servant I tried to buy accepted the money happily, but no one gave me information. After the fifth one, I knew something was happening, and listening to some laugh at me for trying to buy their allegiance was aggravating. I couldn't do anything against them since they would tell the King when asked, and I couldn't be seen trying to spy in the ancestral home of the new Hand of the King.
I wondered if Lord Eddard knew what I tried to do. Ever since leaving Winterfell, he only talked with the King and the people accompanying him from Winterfell. I noticed that he trusted no one, which was smart of him. But he didn't show the dislike I would expect if he knew someone had tried to spy on his home.
Feeling a smile on my face, I wondered who the servants had told about my dealings. How curious. It seemed that the last Lord Stark didn't know everything that happened in his seat of power.
Jon Snow PoV
Outskirts of FrostStorm
As I approached Froststorm with my group, I started to slow down since there were many guards near the entrance of the new town. I couldn't help but marvel at how life had changed since Robb's accident.
I couldn't stop smiling when I thought about my family. It's been a while since I've been away from everyone, but in the last few years, I have grown to appreciate even Lady Catelyn.
I had always been close to Robb, but everything changed for the better after his accident. We became closer, like true brothers, and he kept me by his side despite the stigma of my name.
I couldn't lie to myself and say that I didn't feel bad when someone called me a bastard, even if they murmured it to themselves. But over the years, thanks to Robb and Father, everyone stopped.
Even though I knew the truth about my parentage, I knew deep down that Eddard Stark loved me and did what he could to protect me. I didn't agree with all his choices, but I knew he did what he thought was best.
Over the years, I had become Robb's right Hand, following him everywhere and taking his lead. I preferred that. I wasn't a leader and didn't want to be one.
But right now? He needed me, and I would accomplish what he asked of me.
"Open the gates," was heard from outside as we got closer.
Galloping to the center of the town, I spotted Smalljon waiting for us with Thorren. I was happy to see my friends after so long.
"Guys!" I exclaimed with a smile as I approached them.
Hugging each of them, they patted my back in greeting. They had been left here to continue supervising and gain experience leading people. They were the heirs of two powerful vassals, so it was a win-win for all of us.
"How have you been, Jon?" asked Smalljon with a booming laugh.
"Everything is good. Have you heard the news?" I asked with a smile.
"About the new Lord Stark? It's what everyone has been talking about for the past week," Thorren said.
"Yes, and he sent me here for a while. It's time we start showing our true colors. The North is strong," I said with conviction.
Both of them jolted when they heard me use these words. It was something Robb had told us weeks after the attack on the Dreadfort, a secret that when we uttered it, it meant that we needed to stop hiding the production done here.
"Did he tell you why?" Thorren asked, even as Smalljon left us to complete his tasks. We needed every blacksmith working full throttle to make weapons, and the metals we hadn't used since we wanted to be sneaky about it would last only for a month with all of them working all the time.
Thankfully, Robb thought of that. A large amount of metals would be mined in the next couple of months. He had already ordered the blacksmiths here to build a large quantity of mining gear for this purpose. We would sell it to every house in charge of the mines so they could start quickly.
"The war is inevitable," I admitted. Robb had permitted me to clue them in. "He found out that the King's sons are bastards. There is no heir to the Iron Throne," I said grimly.
"Fuck… an all-out war will happen. The Lannisters won't leave without a fight," Thorren exclaimed.
"Indeed. And we will be in the midst of it," I said gravely.
"Why would we join this stupid war? It doesn't concern us," Thorren asked.
I sighed and rubbed my temples. "We don't have much choice," I shook my head. "Let's wait for Smalljon so I can clue you both in without repeating myself later."
Thorren nodded with a furrowed brow.
Entering the castle, we headed toward the solar of the late Roose Bolton, where Smalljon was already waiting for us, penning some letters for his father that I would take when I passed the Last Heart on my way to the Wall.
Tyrion Lannister PoV
Kingsroad
I loved the North. The people and the atmosphere were a godsend. They didn't treat me like the people in the South, and I found myself longing to stay here.
A shame, really; I would love to visit the Wall and take a piss from the top. But I had my duties now. Thanks to my bastard of a father, I was the poorest Lannister. Now, he didn't care about how I besmirched the name. He was done with me, and I was with him. I didn't need them as they didn't know they needed me.
Everything changed after my last trip to the North, and Father was not happy with my failure to steal knowledge from them. Well, fuck him. I was done with it, too. I met people who didn't talk badly about me, respected me, and knew what I had to offer. I wasn't a fighter, but I was a scholar. What I lacked in physical power, I made up for in wit.
Thankfully, the late Hand offered me a job with the wonderful Elyse. Thanks to her word of recommendation, I learned from her and did everything I could to help her.
Seeing my sister pampering her son was as distasteful as ever. How no one knew her sons were Jaime's, I didn't know. I was pretty sure Varys knew, but he didn't say anything, and I wouldn't either. Jaime deserved this from me since he was one of the only people who treated me right, along with Aunt Genna.
But everything would come to light in the future. I had already noted that Ned Stark was after my sister. He knew something, but I wasn't sure what. I needed to make sure I was ready to escape this clusterfuck that was coming.
Thankfully, Lord Robb Stark had an enlightening conversation with me. I wouldn't admit it, but the kid scared me more than my father ever could. There was something downright intimidating about his knowing eyes and how he acted like he knew things that shouldn't be possible.
Flashback
"It's wonderful to have you back in Winterfell, Tyrion," I heard the voice of the newly appointed Lord Stark behind me.
I needed fresh air from the banquet, so I left the premises, hoping no one would notice. But I was wrong.
Lord Robb Stark was already waiting for me near the stables. How he knew where I was going was a mystery to me, and from his knowing smile, he knew how that made me feel.
"It's been more than a year since I last saw you, Lord Stark," I greeted him after I calmed myself down.
"Yes, it's been a while, hasn't it? It's wonderful how life can change so much in such an insignificant amount of time," Lord Robb laughed.
I got mad at him for making fun of me. I didn't know how he knew about my situation, but I didn't think he would turn on me like that.
"What do you want with me, Lord Stark?" I asked impassively.
"Now, now, calm down. Walk with me for a bit. I want you to be sober for this conversation," he kept joking, but I tagged along as he started walking toward the Wolfswood.
At least he kept the pace slow enough for me to keep up.
"Now, can you tell me what you want with me?" I asked impatiently.
"Just a moment," he raised his hand, and instantly, I felt all the sensations of being drunk disappear from my body.
I looked around with amazed eyes before eyeing the only one who could be responsible for this miracle.
"What did you do?" I asked, my voice trembling a little.
"As I told you before, I need you to be sober for this," he said lightly.
"Now I am sober, Lord Stark," I repeated impatiently. I didn't want to be near him. I didn't know what he did, but it weirded me out.
"Yes, yes. We can start now," he said. "Are you happy with your life, Tyrion? Being thrown out of the family for a failure in something not one person in the Seven Kingdoms and beyond could accomplish. It appears that your father sent you to steal from us to get rid of you for your failures."
That struck a chord within me. They knew I tried to steal from them, and now I was alone with one of them, unable to protect myself. Everyone saw me piss drunk at the banquet; if I disappeared, no one would know or care what happened to me.
I fell to my knees, trembling all over as my meager strength left me.
"Are you going to kill me?" I asked. I wouldn't beg, and surprisingly, I didn't feel bad about this as I thought I would.
There was silence after my question, and as the seconds passed, I grew impatient and searched for Robb's eyes. I saw him with a gobsmacked face, which confused me.
"What? No, Tyrion, what are you talking about? If I wanted to kill you, you would have died with the servant Littlefinger sent, and no one would know it was me," he explained quickly.
I didn't know if that was supposed to comfort me, but it only scared me even more. I saw the servant's death with my own eyes, and it was terrible.
"Now get up. I want to talk to you about something important," he said firmly.
I tried to stand up, but my legs didn't move. I heard him sigh and felt his arms grabbing mine, helping me sit down.
"We could have started this better," he laughed, shaking his head.
"You think?" I asked sarcastically.
"As I asked you before, are you happy with your life, Tyrion?" he asked me again, and I stopped to think.
"No," I murmured. "I'm pissed. I hate my family. Everyone is so idiotic, and they don't respect me," I shouted at him.
He patted my shoulder. "They don't understand how good of an ally you can be," he said.
"War is coming," he continued before looking into my eyes while I tried to avert them.
"You know about your sister," he said with no hesitation.
I trembled. We were screwed. People already knew about Cersei's idiotic decisions.
"It makes things easy then," he laughed. "Do you want them to win, use you for that, and then get rid of you when they don't need you anymore?"
I felt rage bubbling in my head. "NO! They can't win. I won't let them!" The hate I had spurred me to keep talking. Before my failure, life was not fair in Casterly Rock, but they burned all the bridges afterward.
"And do you want to live? To marry in the future, have a family?" he asked rhetorically.
"Of course, I would want to, but what woman would marry me? I'm a dwarf," I said despondently.
"I'm sure you'll find someone in the future, Tyrion. But tell me, what will happen to every Lannister when this comes to light?" Robb asked.
"We will all be killed. I would be grouped with them, even if I didn't have anything to do with it," I said sadly.
"Not if we help each other, Tyrion. I could help you escape when this blows up, but you need to do something for me," he said with a disturbing smile.
I felt like I was making a deal with the devil. But what choice did I have? I couldn't survive alone.
"What do you need me to do?" I asked desperately.
"I want you to be the Hand," he smiled.
"The Hand? For whom? For the bastard prince?" I laughed at the stupidity of that. He would rather kill me than make me his Hand.
"No, no… someone much more important," he said mysteriously.
I felt dread for a moment. This was a bad idea, but when did I make good ones?
"I want you to help Daenerys Targaryen as her Hand of the Queen," Robb said seriously.
Just at that moment, I started laughing hysterically. This was madness, but in the slight chance it worked? We would win big, and no one would see me as a lesser anymore.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 37: Leaving the North
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
White Harbor
"It's a pleasure to work with you, Lord Manderly," I said graciously to my host in the white harbor.
The fat lord laughed merrily. "No, it has been my pleasure to host you, Lord Stark."
I nodded at him and left the room to prepare for my trip south. I had only two or three more stops before I could leave the North via the Kings Road, following in my father's footsteps.
I needed to stop first to chat with Lord Manderly, as I required his help taking Tyrion to Daenerys when the Lannisters started the war. The only way to do so would be through the ocean.
I knew I could trust him even if I didn't give him all the details, as it needed to remain a secret for now. We needed Daenerys to stop the White Walkers, and helping her, even indirectly, would earn me some favor with her. I didn't know how the future would unfold, but I wouldn't oppose marrying her for the Crown. Hopefully, with my manipulations, I could help her avoid troubles through Tyrion.
One week later
I could leave Winterfell a few weeks ago with everything in good hands. My only stops were to check on the critical territories on the way and ask some lords for favors, like Wyman Manderly. Right now, I was finally approaching Moat Cailin. It had been in disrepair for decades, and not much had been done to it in these years. It would take a long time to restore it to its former glory, but at least for now, it was fortified with more than a thousand soldiers—one-third of them archers and the rest foot soldiers.
In addition to those thousand soldiers, over two hundred people handled menial chores, from cleaning to slowly repairing the Moat.
With the blacksmiths urgently producing weapons in FrostStorm, we didn't have the manpower to completely fortify this location. However, when they finished what they could do before the war began, they would travel here to start working and provide support to all the coastal lands in the North.
They would be safest from this place since the orders I sent by raven a couple of weeks ago, after Father left me in command of the North, were being carried out by now. Most lords have been training troops for years, and they would send more to continue strengthening the Moat's defenses. From the Reels to White Harbor, each vassal house would send at least a hundred more soldiers, accompanied by servants and provisions, to start arming it.
I had a couple of months before the War of the Five Kings began, and it would be vastly different from canon, thanks to all the changes I had made. But for now, I needed to travel south to start compiling information that could be useful—from the number of soldiers in the houses near the North to anything that could help us in the long run.
"Open the gates!" a guard shouted from the top of a tower.
I slowed as I had been wearing a cowl to hide my identity. I didn't want merchants traveling to the South to learn about my movements, but here, where there were only soldiers and servants, I could start acting like the Warden of the North.
"Identify yourself," said a guard in the middle of the bridge.
Taking my cowl off, I saw the guard's eyes widen slightly.
Giving him a smile, I dismounted my horse and approached him.
"Good day to you," I said lightly. "Take me to the person in charge."
The guard nodded and started guiding me toward the gatehouse tower, where the person in charge was situated.
Walking languidly, I observed my surroundings, noting the people hard at work. I made a mental note to ensure they were paid what they deserved. I was so focused on noting the changes that I overlooked until we arrived at the solar door.
The guard knocked on the door and led me inside when Lord Galbart Glover allowed us to enter.
Noticing his start when he realized my identity, he stood up from his seat, where he had been busy with some notes and messages, and addressed me formally.
"Lord Stark," he nodded. "To what do I owe this pleasure?" he asked concernedly.
The Glovers had been fiercely loyal to the Starks for decades, and the current lord had extensive experience in warfare and was respected for his military acumen. So, it had been easy to entrust him with the honor of overseeing this important position for the defense of the North.
He was a practical and tactical leader who understood the importance of strategy and logistics in war.
"I like the work you've done here, Lord Glover. I want you to know that the North will thank you for your hard work," I said appreciatively.
Lord Glover puffed out his chest with a happy smile, knowing his lord was pleased with him.
"And I want to thank you for the honor of protecting our lands, Lord Stark," he said firmly.
"There was no better choice, my lord," I nodded at him.
"I'm only passing through, as I have other duties now." I continued, sitting and drinking some wine a servant provided while exchanging pleasantries.
"I just want to explain a few things before I leave," I began. "First of all, in the next couple of weeks, some brigands will start joining the forces here," I said lightly.
I noticed that his shoulders relaxed slightly. With the available workforce he had, they couldn't progress as fast as he would have liked.
"And I thank you for that. It's been hard, but we're doing what we can with the resources available," he said gruffly.
"I understand that, my lord." I nodded. "Aside from this, all the blacksmiths working secretly in the new town will start coming here when they finish their jobs in FrostStorm. You will have extra help with everything here, and the workers stationed there will move to this side of the North," I continued.
"Some will come here, while others will go to White Harbor or the Reels." I took a sip of my wine and relaxed in my seat. "I want the North to be impenetrable. Trouble is coming, and we need to be prepared."
The lord nodded in understanding. He did not have all the details but knew trouble was on the horizon.
"That will help a lot, Lord Stark," he answered. "Is there anything else you wish to tell me?" he asked.
"No, that was everything," I shook my head. "Now, would you be so kind as to prepare a room for me to rest before I leave for the south?" I asked him.
"Already done," he nodded. "Clara will take you to your room, Lord Stark," he said before tilting his head.
"Are you traveling alone, my lord? Should I send some of the guards with you?" he asked with concern.
I stood up and shook my head. "No, Lord Glover. I have to do this alone. No one from the South must know we are preparing for war, and I need to work alone to gather intelligence on the forces of our enemies before it starts."
"And who are our enemies, if I may ask, my lord?" he asked seriously. "I will follow the Starks to the grave, but more information would be useful," he added quickly.
I snorted in good humor. "The Crown will be our enemy. When King Robert dies—and I don't give him more than a year to drop dead—the Lannisters will try to stay in power."
Lord Glover shook slightly before composing himself. "And they won't leave us alone," he said grimly.
"Indeed, but it isn't so simple," I said calmly, explaining the Queen's infidelity and all that information from the door.
The lord let out a weary sigh. "I hate wars, Lord Stark," he admitted.
"We all do, but we must make difficult decisions for the sake of our people," I agreed with him. I couldn't imagine all the horrors of war, as I had never lived through one, but just the thought of it horrified me.
"We will be ready," he nodded firmly. "How much time do you think we have, my lord?" he asked.
"As I said, less time than we want. I give it a few months until the war starts in the Seven Kingdoms. Now, I'll go rest before I leave. I trust that when I return with my father, the North will be completely secure from outside threats," I said, finally leaving the room.
Next Day
Mounting my horse, I prepared to begin my journey south. I decided to avoid visiting Greywater Watch, as it would take too long to traverse the Neck's swampy region. I was short on time, so I couldn't afford to waste it.
With everyone working hard to prepare, I needed to make myself more valuable, and gathering information on our enemies would be the best way to occupy my time.
I didn't know war personally, and the maester's teachings amounted to nothing more than theoretical knowledge, which just wasn't the same. For that reason, I delegated many of my duties to those who knew better.
Thankfully, the King's Road was tranquil and easy to navigate since the bandit purge. No bandit in their right mind would wander through the North after that, and the few foolish enough to try were dealt with so swiftly that they couldn't do much harm to our population.
The trip south was boring, and my only company was my insects, who devoured any biomass they encountered since I had little else to do.
I had left most of my swarm in Winterfell with orders to protect it from anything threatening the population, so I had less than a million insects following me.
It was more than enough. As I traveled, I collected more and more, and I had enough energy to create special insects if needed.
Staying close to the swamp, I was trying to find any exciting flora or fauna, as the region might offer some special properties, but I hadn't been lucky so far.
Hopefully, that would change since the Neck was mysterious, and I believed there would be interesting things to discover here. If I didn't find anything, I would visit again when I returned with my father from the South.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
"It's a pleasure to work with you, Lord Manderly," I said graciously to my host in the white harbor.
The fat lord laughed merrily. "No, it has been my pleasure to host you, Lord Stark."
I nodded at him and left the room to prepare for my trip south. I had only two or three more stops before I could leave the North via the Kings Road, following in my father's footsteps.
I needed to stop first to chat with Lord Manderly, as I required his help taking Tyrion to Daenerys when the Lannisters started the war. The only way to do so would be through the ocean.
I knew I could trust him even if I didn't give him all the details, as it needed to remain a secret for now. We needed Daenerys to stop the White Walkers, and helping her, even indirectly, would earn me some favor with her. I didn't know how the future would unfold, but I wouldn't oppose marrying her for the Crown. Hopefully, with my manipulations, I could help her avoid troubles through Tyrion.
One week later
I could leave Winterfell a few weeks ago with everything in good hands. My only stops were to check on the critical territories on the way and ask some lords for favors, like Wyman Manderly. Right now, I was finally approaching Moat Cailin. It had been in disrepair for decades, and not much had been done to it in these years. It would take a long time to restore it to its former glory, but at least for now, it was fortified with more than a thousand soldiers—one-third of them archers and the rest foot soldiers.
In addition to those thousand soldiers, over two hundred people handled menial chores, from cleaning to slowly repairing the Moat.
With the blacksmiths urgently producing weapons in FrostStorm, we didn't have the manpower to completely fortify this location. However, when they finished what they could do before the war began, they would travel here to start working and provide support to all the coastal lands in the North.
They would be safest from this place since the orders I sent by raven a couple of weeks ago, after Father left me in command of the North, were being carried out by now. Most lords have been training troops for years, and they would send more to continue strengthening the Moat's defenses. From the Reels to White Harbor, each vassal house would send at least a hundred more soldiers, accompanied by servants and provisions, to start arming it.
I had a couple of months before the War of the Five Kings began, and it would be vastly different from canon, thanks to all the changes I had made. But for now, I needed to travel south to start compiling information that could be useful—from the number of soldiers in the houses near the North to anything that could help us in the long run.
"Open the gates!" a guard shouted from the top of a tower.
I slowed as I had been wearing a cowl to hide my identity. I didn't want merchants traveling to the South to learn about my movements, but here, where there were only soldiers and servants, I could start acting like the Warden of the North.
"Identify yourself," said a guard in the middle of the bridge.
Taking my cowl off, I saw the guard's eyes widen slightly.
Giving him a smile, I dismounted my horse and approached him.
"Good day to you," I said lightly. "Take me to the person in charge."
The guard nodded and started guiding me toward the gatehouse tower, where the person in charge was situated.
Walking languidly, I observed my surroundings, noting the people hard at work. I made a mental note to ensure they were paid what they deserved. I was so focused on noting the changes that I overlooked until we arrived at the solar door.
The guard knocked on the door and led me inside when Lord Galbart Glover allowed us to enter.
Noticing his start when he realized my identity, he stood up from his seat, where he had been busy with some notes and messages, and addressed me formally.
"Lord Stark," he nodded. "To what do I owe this pleasure?" he asked concernedly.
The Glovers had been fiercely loyal to the Starks for decades, and the current lord had extensive experience in warfare and was respected for his military acumen. So, it had been easy to entrust him with the honor of overseeing this important position for the defense of the North.
He was a practical and tactical leader who understood the importance of strategy and logistics in war.
"I like the work you've done here, Lord Glover. I want you to know that the North will thank you for your hard work," I said appreciatively.
Lord Glover puffed out his chest with a happy smile, knowing his lord was pleased with him.
"And I want to thank you for the honor of protecting our lands, Lord Stark," he said firmly.
"There was no better choice, my lord," I nodded at him.
"I'm only passing through, as I have other duties now." I continued, sitting and drinking some wine a servant provided while exchanging pleasantries.
"I just want to explain a few things before I leave," I began. "First of all, in the next couple of weeks, some brigands will start joining the forces here," I said lightly.
I noticed that his shoulders relaxed slightly. With the available workforce he had, they couldn't progress as fast as he would have liked.
"And I thank you for that. It's been hard, but we're doing what we can with the resources available," he said gruffly.
"I understand that, my lord." I nodded. "Aside from this, all the blacksmiths working secretly in the new town will start coming here when they finish their jobs in FrostStorm. You will have extra help with everything here, and the workers stationed there will move to this side of the North," I continued.
"Some will come here, while others will go to White Harbor or the Reels." I took a sip of my wine and relaxed in my seat. "I want the North to be impenetrable. Trouble is coming, and we need to be prepared."
The lord nodded in understanding. He did not have all the details but knew trouble was on the horizon.
"That will help a lot, Lord Stark," he answered. "Is there anything else you wish to tell me?" he asked.
"No, that was everything," I shook my head. "Now, would you be so kind as to prepare a room for me to rest before I leave for the south?" I asked him.
"Already done," he nodded. "Clara will take you to your room, Lord Stark," he said before tilting his head.
"Are you traveling alone, my lord? Should I send some of the guards with you?" he asked with concern.
I stood up and shook my head. "No, Lord Glover. I have to do this alone. No one from the South must know we are preparing for war, and I need to work alone to gather intelligence on the forces of our enemies before it starts."
"And who are our enemies, if I may ask, my lord?" he asked seriously. "I will follow the Starks to the grave, but more information would be useful," he added quickly.
I snorted in good humor. "The Crown will be our enemy. When King Robert dies—and I don't give him more than a year to drop dead—the Lannisters will try to stay in power."
Lord Glover shook slightly before composing himself. "And they won't leave us alone," he said grimly.
"Indeed, but it isn't so simple," I said calmly, explaining the Queen's infidelity and all that information from the door.
The lord let out a weary sigh. "I hate wars, Lord Stark," he admitted.
"We all do, but we must make difficult decisions for the sake of our people," I agreed with him. I couldn't imagine all the horrors of war, as I had never lived through one, but just the thought of it horrified me.
"We will be ready," he nodded firmly. "How much time do you think we have, my lord?" he asked.
"As I said, less time than we want. I give it a few months until the war starts in the Seven Kingdoms. Now, I'll go rest before I leave. I trust that when I return with my father, the North will be completely secure from outside threats," I said, finally leaving the room.
Next Day
Mounting my horse, I prepared to begin my journey south. I decided to avoid visiting Greywater Watch, as it would take too long to traverse the Neck's swampy region. I was short on time, so I couldn't afford to waste it.
With everyone working hard to prepare, I needed to make myself more valuable, and gathering information on our enemies would be the best way to occupy my time.
I didn't know war personally, and the maester's teachings amounted to nothing more than theoretical knowledge, which just wasn't the same. For that reason, I delegated many of my duties to those who knew better.
Thankfully, the King's Road was tranquil and easy to navigate since the bandit purge. No bandit in their right mind would wander through the North after that, and the few foolish enough to try were dealt with so swiftly that they couldn't do much harm to our population.
The trip south was boring, and my only company was my insects, who devoured any biomass they encountered since I had little else to do.
I had left most of my swarm in Winterfell with orders to protect it from anything threatening the population, so I had less than a million insects following me.
It was more than enough. As I traveled, I collected more and more, and I had enough energy to create special insects if needed.
Staying close to the swamp, I was trying to find any exciting flora or fauna, as the region might offer some special properties, but I hadn't been lucky so far.
Hopefully, that would change since the Neck was mysterious, and I believed there would be interesting things to discover here. If I didn't find anything, I would visit again when I returned with my father from the South.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 38: The Twins and Seagard.
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
I needed to avoid being recognized, but I was sure I wouldn't be able to cross the bridge to the Twins using the cowl I had to conceal my identity. To find out if someone could cross while concealing their identity, I paid a couple of merchants heading from the North to the Riverlands to use various methods to hide their faces. I observed from a distance with my insects where no one could see me.
I noticed that the guards asked the merchants to remove anything that concealed their identities simply because they could. Given this and the importance of keeping my identity secret, I would have to wait until nightfall to cross the bridge while putting the guards to sleep.
Finding a good spot to rest while I waited, I closed my eyes and practiced using only my bugs senses to survey the terrain and identify potential hiding spots for an army or at least an advance unit. I could eliminate everyone inside the Twins by myself, but that would leave a bad taste in my mouth. Many of my vassals would disapprove of such total annihilation.
The best course of action against the Freys would be to kill only those whom my bannermen hated, thereby avoiding backlash for my cruelty. I also didn't want to be like Tywin Lannister; I wanted to be loved and respected by my people, to have them follow me out of respect rather than fear.
While I waited for the sun to set, I found several clearings where I could hide my men before we assaulted the castle. It would have to be a small unit composed only of people I could trust completely. With such a small unit, we couldn't defeat every guard posted in the castle, so we would need to be stealthy while entering. This was the only way this could be possible.
Sighing in thought, I tried to rest before starting my journey. Beyond the bridge, I had a few stops planned before heading to King's Landing. First, I needed to speak with the Mallisters in Seagard. Known for their honor and respected in the Riverlands, the Mallisters had a strong antagonistic relationship with the Ironborn, and I was sure they also despised the Freys. This would make them more likely to ally with me. They were fiercely loyal to the Tullys, my mother's family, which could be advantageous.
I needed to arrange a private meeting with Lord Jason Mallister and explain the circumstances of the information I had obtained in Winterfell. I knew I could win him over, but I would need to stay for a while to root out the spies I was sure were in his house.
Although I knew little about his house, I knew that one of Lord Mallister's most essential values was honor, and his son could be helpful in the future.
As the hours passed and the sun set, I opened my eyes to find it was completely dark. Thankfully, I had over a hundred bugs capable of seeing in the darkness.
Standing up and letting my horse roam free into the wilderness, I walked towards the bridge. Noticing that there were only six guards, three on each side, I sent some mosquitoes carrying a special neurotoxin to make them unconscious. This neurotoxin was harmless to the body, and I had the antidote available in other mosquitoes. This way, they would wake up when I was far enough away to not raise their vigilance.
After waiting ten seconds for the neurotoxin to take effect, I crossed the bridge rapidly and moved closer to the castle to use my power for investigation.
Taking some parchment to record my findings, I found a completely dark spot with no guards nearby. I sent my bugs inside the castle to note the number of guards on the walls. There were over eight hundred guards during peacetime at the Twins. It was difficult to accept, but the Freys were a wealthy family with a strategic position in the Riverlands.
After sketching the castle and noting the number of guards in each room, I saw Walder Frey eating with his family. I refrained from injecting them with venom, despite my deep dislike for the Freys, mainly due to the Red Wedding. The thought of my mother facing such a fate in the future filled me with deep anger.
It was a shame I couldn't just steal a horse from the Freys, as it would alert them to something amiss. So, I started heading towards the Mallisters, hoping to find someone to sell me a horse along the way.
Six Days Later
Sighing in exhaustion, I dismounted my horse at the entrance of House Mallister's ancestral home. The journey had been plagued with bandit groups, and I was relieved I had managed to handle them in the North. Thankfully, I had taken a horse from one of the bandits to complete my journey. In addition to the horse, I had acquired gold and jewelry they had stolen over the months or years.
"Halt!" a guard bellowed from the entrance.
I stopped, knowing I had to act correctly to gain the trust of my grandfather's vassal.
"Reveal yourself," he ordered as he approached.
Checking to see if anyone was watching us, I noticed some people stopping and staring in my direction. I couldn't be sure if they were working for the Mallisters or were spies from elsewhere, so I couldn't reveal myself publicly.
Seeing that I hadn't moved, the guard grew impatient and tried to remove my cowl.
Sidestepping him, I murmured, "Esteemed guard, I can't show who I am now."
The guard looked at me oddly but paused for a moment. I presumed such circumstances were somewhat familiar since many lords needed to meet secretly.
"Identify yourself," the guard asked after a moment of silence.
"I am Lord Robb Stark, Warden of the North," I murmured.
The guard's eyes widened, and he stepped back in astonishment.
"You know the punishment if you are lying?" he asked.
"No, but I assure you I am who I say I am," I said seriously. "Take me to someone trusted by Lord Mallister who can verify my identity."
After a moment's thought, the guard nodded and led me inside the castle, accompanied by three armed guards. Using my bugs, I began to check the surrounding area to see what the people who had seen me near the entrance were doing and to determine if they were spies or merely curious onlookers.
Thanks to my insects, I observed that the guards were taking me toward the maester of the castle, one of the few people who might recognize me.
Walking calmly, I followed them to a door at the end of a hallway.
"Enter," an old voice called after one of the guards knocked.
"Maester Aldric, we need you to identify this person," said the lead guard.
"Another one of those?" the maester asked wearily. He was old, older than Luwin, but his eyes showed intelligence. I left a couple of insects to spy on him in case he tried to send a message without Lord Mallister's approval. The only maester I trusted was Luwin, and I was cautious with the rest of the order.
"Remove your cowl, stranger," he said lightly, showing his experience in such meetings.
I checked once more with my power for anyone listening and found no one nearby. The only ones present were the maester and the four guards.
Removing my cowl, I announced myself.
"I am Robb Stark, Warden of the North," I said with authority. I knew people only saw me as a child in the South, but I hoped my reputation would precede me since we were somewhat close to the North.
"Oh my, you have your mother's hair," the maester said happily.
"You know my mother, maester?" I asked, surprised.
"Indeed I do, Lord Stark. She visited when she was young with her sister and some ward of Hoster Tully, your grandfather," he said with a small smile, reminiscing about that time.
The guards relaxed slightly upon hearing my identity, sheathing their weapons and taking a few steps back.
"That makes this easier," I said seriously. "I need to speak with Lord Mallister immediately. No one can know I am here. Can we make this work?"
"Indeed we can. Young lad, Could you call Lord Mallister here?" the maester asked one of the three extra guards.
Looking at him, I noticed he was young, only a few years older than me.
Staring him directly in the eyes, I said, "Do not tell anyone that I am here. Go directly to your lord and return."
The young guard tensed but nodded firmly before leaving to complete his task.
The maester looked at me with a raised eyebrow but remained silent.
Waiting with the others in the maester's office, I followed the guard with my insects, never letting him out of sight. I had to ensure no one found out about this visit, as it would complicate matters significantly.
After ten minutes, Lord Mallister approached the door with the young guard in tow.
I had kept track of them, so I was sure no one besides the seven people in the room knew about this. The young guard was insightful enough to inform Jason Mallister of my insistence on secrecy.
Finally, entering the room, Lord Mallister's eyes widened when he saw me. "Lord Stark, I didn't expect to see you in my lands," he greeted me with concern, wondering why I had come all the way here.
"Lord Mallister, you have a lovely home. My mother talks about you fondly," I nodded.
"Ah, yes. Lady Catelyn, it's been years since I've seen her. The last time was during a meeting in the rebellion," he nodded back.
"Why are you here, Lord Stark? Seagard is a long way from home," he asked seriously.
I sighed deeply, looking him in the eyes. "Before I begin with my reasons, I must ask: Do you trust the people inside this room?"
The lord nodded without hesitation. "With my life, Lord Stark. Whatever we speak about here will be kept secret."
I shook my head. "Since you trust them so much, I will comply, but please ask the guards to leave. We can't take risks about this."
He looked me in the eyes with fierce intensity but nodded in agreement. "Don't talk to anyone about what you saw here today," he ordered the guards.
The guards nodded, but before they could leave, I placed some insects on them as a precaution. Thanks to my multitasking, I could spy on them to ensure they didn't talk and inject them if they tried.
"Now we can begin," Jason Mallister said lightly, taking a seat.
The lord leaned forward, his expression a mix of curiosity and caution. "Lord Stark, you've taken great pains to ensure this meeting remains private. What is so urgent that it couldn't be discussed through more conventional means?"
I took a deep breath, choosing my words carefully, knowing I needed this conversation for many of my plans. "Lord Mallister, I've come to you not only as an ally but as a lord who knows things no one else does. I have information that could be crucial to both our houses."
Lord Mallister's eyes narrowed. "Go on."
I reached into my satchel and produced a small bundle of papers. "These are copies of information I procured during the royal visit to Winterfell. I confirmed Queen Cersei's infidelity and the true parentage of her children."
Jason's gaze was fixed on the papers, his fingers brushing over them with skepticism. "That is dangerous talk, Lord Stark. Why should I believe it?"
"I understand your doubt," I said calmly. "But I assure you, this information is credible. I even have a signed letter from Tyrion Lannister confirming this. But that is not the most important part. When this comes to light—and I assure you, it will be soon—the Lannisters will face severe consequences. When that happens, it will shake the very foundations of the realm."
Jason's eyes lifted from the papers, having been focused on Tyrion's signed message. "Why would Tyrion Lannister accept this, even if it's true?"
"Spite is a hell of a motivator," I snorted. "Also, I promised I would protect him when this comes to light."
"This is a dire situation," the Maester intervened. "The Lannisters would not go down without a fight, and the Seven help us, if the King were to die before this is known, they would just crown the prince before anyone can say a thing. It will be war."
"Indeed, Maester. My father doesn't know, but he is already investigating them in the capital for the assassination of the late Lord Arryn," I said grimly. "After visiting Riverrun to clue in my grandfather, I'll go to the capital to care for my father."
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
I noticed that the guards asked the merchants to remove anything that concealed their identities simply because they could. Given this and the importance of keeping my identity secret, I would have to wait until nightfall to cross the bridge while putting the guards to sleep.
Finding a good spot to rest while I waited, I closed my eyes and practiced using only my bugs senses to survey the terrain and identify potential hiding spots for an army or at least an advance unit. I could eliminate everyone inside the Twins by myself, but that would leave a bad taste in my mouth. Many of my vassals would disapprove of such total annihilation.
The best course of action against the Freys would be to kill only those whom my bannermen hated, thereby avoiding backlash for my cruelty. I also didn't want to be like Tywin Lannister; I wanted to be loved and respected by my people, to have them follow me out of respect rather than fear.
While I waited for the sun to set, I found several clearings where I could hide my men before we assaulted the castle. It would have to be a small unit composed only of people I could trust completely. With such a small unit, we couldn't defeat every guard posted in the castle, so we would need to be stealthy while entering. This was the only way this could be possible.
Sighing in thought, I tried to rest before starting my journey. Beyond the bridge, I had a few stops planned before heading to King's Landing. First, I needed to speak with the Mallisters in Seagard. Known for their honor and respected in the Riverlands, the Mallisters had a strong antagonistic relationship with the Ironborn, and I was sure they also despised the Freys. This would make them more likely to ally with me. They were fiercely loyal to the Tullys, my mother's family, which could be advantageous.
I needed to arrange a private meeting with Lord Jason Mallister and explain the circumstances of the information I had obtained in Winterfell. I knew I could win him over, but I would need to stay for a while to root out the spies I was sure were in his house.
Although I knew little about his house, I knew that one of Lord Mallister's most essential values was honor, and his son could be helpful in the future.
As the hours passed and the sun set, I opened my eyes to find it was completely dark. Thankfully, I had over a hundred bugs capable of seeing in the darkness.
Standing up and letting my horse roam free into the wilderness, I walked towards the bridge. Noticing that there were only six guards, three on each side, I sent some mosquitoes carrying a special neurotoxin to make them unconscious. This neurotoxin was harmless to the body, and I had the antidote available in other mosquitoes. This way, they would wake up when I was far enough away to not raise their vigilance.
After waiting ten seconds for the neurotoxin to take effect, I crossed the bridge rapidly and moved closer to the castle to use my power for investigation.
Taking some parchment to record my findings, I found a completely dark spot with no guards nearby. I sent my bugs inside the castle to note the number of guards on the walls. There were over eight hundred guards during peacetime at the Twins. It was difficult to accept, but the Freys were a wealthy family with a strategic position in the Riverlands.
After sketching the castle and noting the number of guards in each room, I saw Walder Frey eating with his family. I refrained from injecting them with venom, despite my deep dislike for the Freys, mainly due to the Red Wedding. The thought of my mother facing such a fate in the future filled me with deep anger.
It was a shame I couldn't just steal a horse from the Freys, as it would alert them to something amiss. So, I started heading towards the Mallisters, hoping to find someone to sell me a horse along the way.
Six Days Later
Sighing in exhaustion, I dismounted my horse at the entrance of House Mallister's ancestral home. The journey had been plagued with bandit groups, and I was relieved I had managed to handle them in the North. Thankfully, I had taken a horse from one of the bandits to complete my journey. In addition to the horse, I had acquired gold and jewelry they had stolen over the months or years.
"Halt!" a guard bellowed from the entrance.
I stopped, knowing I had to act correctly to gain the trust of my grandfather's vassal.
"Reveal yourself," he ordered as he approached.
Checking to see if anyone was watching us, I noticed some people stopping and staring in my direction. I couldn't be sure if they were working for the Mallisters or were spies from elsewhere, so I couldn't reveal myself publicly.
Seeing that I hadn't moved, the guard grew impatient and tried to remove my cowl.
Sidestepping him, I murmured, "Esteemed guard, I can't show who I am now."
The guard looked at me oddly but paused for a moment. I presumed such circumstances were somewhat familiar since many lords needed to meet secretly.
"Identify yourself," the guard asked after a moment of silence.
"I am Lord Robb Stark, Warden of the North," I murmured.
The guard's eyes widened, and he stepped back in astonishment.
"You know the punishment if you are lying?" he asked.
"No, but I assure you I am who I say I am," I said seriously. "Take me to someone trusted by Lord Mallister who can verify my identity."
After a moment's thought, the guard nodded and led me inside the castle, accompanied by three armed guards. Using my bugs, I began to check the surrounding area to see what the people who had seen me near the entrance were doing and to determine if they were spies or merely curious onlookers.
Thanks to my insects, I observed that the guards were taking me toward the maester of the castle, one of the few people who might recognize me.
Walking calmly, I followed them to a door at the end of a hallway.
"Enter," an old voice called after one of the guards knocked.
"Maester Aldric, we need you to identify this person," said the lead guard.
"Another one of those?" the maester asked wearily. He was old, older than Luwin, but his eyes showed intelligence. I left a couple of insects to spy on him in case he tried to send a message without Lord Mallister's approval. The only maester I trusted was Luwin, and I was cautious with the rest of the order.
"Remove your cowl, stranger," he said lightly, showing his experience in such meetings.
I checked once more with my power for anyone listening and found no one nearby. The only ones present were the maester and the four guards.
Removing my cowl, I announced myself.
"I am Robb Stark, Warden of the North," I said with authority. I knew people only saw me as a child in the South, but I hoped my reputation would precede me since we were somewhat close to the North.
"Oh my, you have your mother's hair," the maester said happily.
"You know my mother, maester?" I asked, surprised.
"Indeed I do, Lord Stark. She visited when she was young with her sister and some ward of Hoster Tully, your grandfather," he said with a small smile, reminiscing about that time.
The guards relaxed slightly upon hearing my identity, sheathing their weapons and taking a few steps back.
"That makes this easier," I said seriously. "I need to speak with Lord Mallister immediately. No one can know I am here. Can we make this work?"
"Indeed we can. Young lad, Could you call Lord Mallister here?" the maester asked one of the three extra guards.
Looking at him, I noticed he was young, only a few years older than me.
Staring him directly in the eyes, I said, "Do not tell anyone that I am here. Go directly to your lord and return."
The young guard tensed but nodded firmly before leaving to complete his task.
The maester looked at me with a raised eyebrow but remained silent.
Waiting with the others in the maester's office, I followed the guard with my insects, never letting him out of sight. I had to ensure no one found out about this visit, as it would complicate matters significantly.
After ten minutes, Lord Mallister approached the door with the young guard in tow.
I had kept track of them, so I was sure no one besides the seven people in the room knew about this. The young guard was insightful enough to inform Jason Mallister of my insistence on secrecy.
Finally, entering the room, Lord Mallister's eyes widened when he saw me. "Lord Stark, I didn't expect to see you in my lands," he greeted me with concern, wondering why I had come all the way here.
"Lord Mallister, you have a lovely home. My mother talks about you fondly," I nodded.
"Ah, yes. Lady Catelyn, it's been years since I've seen her. The last time was during a meeting in the rebellion," he nodded back.
"Why are you here, Lord Stark? Seagard is a long way from home," he asked seriously.
I sighed deeply, looking him in the eyes. "Before I begin with my reasons, I must ask: Do you trust the people inside this room?"
The lord nodded without hesitation. "With my life, Lord Stark. Whatever we speak about here will be kept secret."
I shook my head. "Since you trust them so much, I will comply, but please ask the guards to leave. We can't take risks about this."
He looked me in the eyes with fierce intensity but nodded in agreement. "Don't talk to anyone about what you saw here today," he ordered the guards.
The guards nodded, but before they could leave, I placed some insects on them as a precaution. Thanks to my multitasking, I could spy on them to ensure they didn't talk and inject them if they tried.
"Now we can begin," Jason Mallister said lightly, taking a seat.
The lord leaned forward, his expression a mix of curiosity and caution. "Lord Stark, you've taken great pains to ensure this meeting remains private. What is so urgent that it couldn't be discussed through more conventional means?"
I took a deep breath, choosing my words carefully, knowing I needed this conversation for many of my plans. "Lord Mallister, I've come to you not only as an ally but as a lord who knows things no one else does. I have information that could be crucial to both our houses."
Lord Mallister's eyes narrowed. "Go on."
I reached into my satchel and produced a small bundle of papers. "These are copies of information I procured during the royal visit to Winterfell. I confirmed Queen Cersei's infidelity and the true parentage of her children."
Jason's gaze was fixed on the papers, his fingers brushing over them with skepticism. "That is dangerous talk, Lord Stark. Why should I believe it?"
"I understand your doubt," I said calmly. "But I assure you, this information is credible. I even have a signed letter from Tyrion Lannister confirming this. But that is not the most important part. When this comes to light—and I assure you, it will be soon—the Lannisters will face severe consequences. When that happens, it will shake the very foundations of the realm."
Jason's eyes lifted from the papers, having been focused on Tyrion's signed message. "Why would Tyrion Lannister accept this, even if it's true?"
"Spite is a hell of a motivator," I snorted. "Also, I promised I would protect him when this comes to light."
"This is a dire situation," the Maester intervened. "The Lannisters would not go down without a fight, and the Seven help us, if the King were to die before this is known, they would just crown the prince before anyone can say a thing. It will be war."
"Indeed, Maester. My father doesn't know, but he is already investigating them in the capital for the assassination of the late Lord Arryn," I said grimly. "After visiting Riverrun to clue in my grandfather, I'll go to the capital to care for my father."
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 39: Continuing My Journey.
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
The Riverlands.
Seagard.
It's been five days since I arrived in Seagard, and I didn't think I would miss the cold from the North so quickly. I've always preferred the cold, but this heat doesn't help with the smell of the people. Sweat accumulates fast when someone works, making it even more noticeable.
Apart from that, my stay here has been fruitful. I was able to root out many spies and was almost done with my mission. I was just waiting to obtain evidence of one specific person in this stronghold. There was one particular merchant whom I was pretty sure was working for Littlefinger, but he was so meticulous in his dealings that it was hard to pin him down.
All the other spies I found were chained in the barracks, awaiting judgment. Jason Mallister had been pissed at how many spies were in his house and even more so at who they were working for.
There were three spies from the Freys, which did help cement our alliance, thankfully. Then there were spies from the crown: three for Littlefinger and two for Varys. It seemed Baelish was always fond of whores, as two of those spies were working in a brothel in the port. From Varys, there was a little orphan who used his small stature to listen to whatever he could, but thanks to my bugs, I could root him out.
Jason Mallister was particularly hurt by that orphan, as it seemed the kid used his suffering to get closer to Patrek, Jason's heir, and he knew his heir would be devastated when he heard about his demise.
I hadn't seen Patrek since I arrived. It seemed that he was a close friend of my uncle, Edmure Tully, and he was hunting or something. I would probably miss him on this visit since I was almost ready to continue my journey.
Finally, after being able to pin something on the merchant, I used my mosquitoes to knock him out. I approached his body, took the parchment where he was writing about a masked visitor to Seagard, pickpocketed it, and went to the maester so that he could call some guards to pick him up.
"Maester Aldric, I think I'm done rooting out spies. I haven't been able to find anyone suspicious after this one," I greeted him.
The maester smiled. "I am awed by your efficiency, Lord Stark," he said as he took the evidence from my hand, his smile disappearing instantly as he read the contents.
He sighed, saying, "I didn't know how they could have infiltrated us so deeply without our knowledge."
Nodding in agreement, I answered, "It is scary how many people in our keeps aren't loyal to us. When we did this in the North, my father was amazed and hurt by everything we found."
"Lord Mallister feels the same. Know this, Lord Stark: you have gained an ally for life thanks to this." The maester nodded firmly.
"I'll search for Lord Mallister; it's time I continue my journey to Riverrun. We are short on time and need to hurry," I told the maester.
He nodded in acceptance and shook my hand in thanks before I left.
He was one of the people I investigated thoroughly, as I don't trust any maester, but I couldn't find out much. He didn't try to write confidential information, and if he really was a spy, props to him for being so meticulous.
With the last spy found, I would bid farewell to the Lord of Seagard, but I wouldn't leave immediately. I would wait in a clearing outside seagard for a day while I finished investigating the maester. It was possible he didn't write anything because I was there, but with him "knowing" that I left, maybe he would start doing something.
Walking toward the lord's solar, I nodded to the guards outside the door and knocked on it.
"Enter," Jason Mallister's voice was heard from inside.
"Lord Mallister, I hope you are having a good day," I greeted him with a smile.
"These have been five long and arduous days, Lord Stark. What news do you bring now?" he asked, shaking his head.
"I found evidence of the last spy I was able to find. I already provided the maester with proof, and he sent some guards to detain him," I explained. "It's time I continue with my journey. News about the tourney in honor of my father has arrived. I need to clue in my family in Riverrun to prepare for this clusterfuck."
Jason nodded. "I thank you from the bottom of my heart for everything you've done in these five days, Lord Stark. I hope our alliance will prove to be as fruitful."
I smiled at the weary lord. "Indeed it will be, Lord Mallister. When I return with my father, we will send a raven from here to Winterfell for the soldiers to arrive at the Moat. That way, we will start the downfall of the Freys and be able to provide assistance in case the Ironborn attack."
Returning to my room in Seagard, I collected everything and was ready to go. I would have to hide for a day from everyone, but I found a clearing that kept the castle within my range so I could spy on the maester without anyone knowing. Hopefully, I was wrong, but I had a bad feeling about leaving without being sure.
Going to some merchants to buy provisions for my journey, I kept an eye on strategic locations with my bugs, from the lord's solar to the barracks and the maester's office.
Taking my leave, I started to gallop away from the castle, searching for the clearing where I would stay for a day. Living outside of castles was difficult; I wasn't much of an outdoor person in my past life, but I needed to do this if I wanted to live peacefully in the future.
Searching for a safe spot first, I commanded my bugs to scout for anything dangerous, but thankfully, there wasn't anything of note—no bandits or animals that could threaten me. I sent only half of all the bugs I had toward Seagard. In these weeks I've been in the South, I accumulated over four million insects since they were more common in this climate.
Checking the castle, I noticed how Jason was working tirelessly for the betterment of his people, but I let out a sigh of sorrow at the scene that greeted me in the maester's office. It was a shame; my gut feeling was right.
The maester was penning a message to the Citadel, writing about my stay and what we planned to do soon.
Sighing, I made my paralyzing mosquitoes get on the raven and started riding back toward Seagard. Seeing him send the raven, I ordered my mosquitoes to inject the neurotoxin and went ahead to retrieve it. Thankfully, I was somewhat close, and in ten minutes, I could grab the raven and the message signed by Maester Aldric.
Nodding to the guards at the entrance, I went directly toward Jason's solar, knocking on the door before entering.
"Lord Mallister, I have grave news," I said direly. "Look at this."
As I showed him the raven inside my satchel and took out the message, I used the antidote to allow the raven to move.
Lord Mallister's hands were shaking with rage. "Guards!" he bellowed, and the door was opened rapidly, the guards entering with their swords drawn.
Seeing me sitting there casually, the guards stopped before making a mess. "Yes, my lord?" asked the captain.
"Bring the maester to me. Don't let him out of your sight, and don't let him run away," Jason Mallister ordered firmly.
The captain's eyes widened in alarm, but being one of those in the know, he nodded and started sprinting toward the maester's office.
"This is a mess, Lord Stark," he said. "This will complicate things. I can't trust another maester after this. But they are needed."
I nodded in understanding. "If you want, we can send a raven to the North, where I can ask them to send one with my full confidence that he won't be doing this."
Jason's eyes narrowed in thought. "If you would be so kind, Lord Stark. At least until the war ends."
I nodded. "What do you plan to do with Maester Aldric?" I asked him.
"What else? Execution," he sighed. "It's what he deserves, breaking our trust like that."
Waiting for a minute until the guards arrived, I reviewed my original plans. I would need to change them since I didn't have much time. After this, I would leave for the Bloody Gate. I needed to talk with the Blackfish since I knew his character. It would be difficult, but I could make this work.
As the contingent of guards dragging the maester entered the solar, Aldric's eyes widened when he saw me in here with the raven he had just sent. I ignored everything since I didn't have a say in the matter and grabbed some parchment and a quill to start writing the message to Winterfell.
In it, I explained my situation and would like a maester to be sent here. All the maesters in the North had been critically vetted, so I was sure we could trust any one. The problem was that we didn't have any extras to spare.
The other option would be to send a couple of maester's apprentices to carry the burden, as working as a team could make this possible.
"Lord Mallister," I asked tentatively, "Do you think three maester apprentices could work in the meantime? One for medicine, one for economics, and the last for politics?"
Jason thought for a minute and nodded, returning to ask questions to the maester.
As I finished writing the message, I signed it with my name and returned it to the table.
"It's time I leave. I'll leave this to you, Lord Mallister," I bid farewell.
"Thank you for everything, Lord Stark. But there is much to do, so I won't see you out," he answered in a clipped tone.
"Don't worry about it. In the following weeks, you'll have the answer from Winterfell," I rapped on the message I left on the table. "I'll take my leave."
What a mess this was shaping up to be. I needed to hurry up to finish my business.
Mounting my horse, I prepared for my next destination: The Crossroads Inn.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Seagard.
It's been five days since I arrived in Seagard, and I didn't think I would miss the cold from the North so quickly. I've always preferred the cold, but this heat doesn't help with the smell of the people. Sweat accumulates fast when someone works, making it even more noticeable.
Apart from that, my stay here has been fruitful. I was able to root out many spies and was almost done with my mission. I was just waiting to obtain evidence of one specific person in this stronghold. There was one particular merchant whom I was pretty sure was working for Littlefinger, but he was so meticulous in his dealings that it was hard to pin him down.
All the other spies I found were chained in the barracks, awaiting judgment. Jason Mallister had been pissed at how many spies were in his house and even more so at who they were working for.
There were three spies from the Freys, which did help cement our alliance, thankfully. Then there were spies from the crown: three for Littlefinger and two for Varys. It seemed Baelish was always fond of whores, as two of those spies were working in a brothel in the port. From Varys, there was a little orphan who used his small stature to listen to whatever he could, but thanks to my bugs, I could root him out.
Jason Mallister was particularly hurt by that orphan, as it seemed the kid used his suffering to get closer to Patrek, Jason's heir, and he knew his heir would be devastated when he heard about his demise.
I hadn't seen Patrek since I arrived. It seemed that he was a close friend of my uncle, Edmure Tully, and he was hunting or something. I would probably miss him on this visit since I was almost ready to continue my journey.
Finally, after being able to pin something on the merchant, I used my mosquitoes to knock him out. I approached his body, took the parchment where he was writing about a masked visitor to Seagard, pickpocketed it, and went to the maester so that he could call some guards to pick him up.
"Maester Aldric, I think I'm done rooting out spies. I haven't been able to find anyone suspicious after this one," I greeted him.
The maester smiled. "I am awed by your efficiency, Lord Stark," he said as he took the evidence from my hand, his smile disappearing instantly as he read the contents.
He sighed, saying, "I didn't know how they could have infiltrated us so deeply without our knowledge."
Nodding in agreement, I answered, "It is scary how many people in our keeps aren't loyal to us. When we did this in the North, my father was amazed and hurt by everything we found."
"Lord Mallister feels the same. Know this, Lord Stark: you have gained an ally for life thanks to this." The maester nodded firmly.
"I'll search for Lord Mallister; it's time I continue my journey to Riverrun. We are short on time and need to hurry," I told the maester.
He nodded in acceptance and shook my hand in thanks before I left.
He was one of the people I investigated thoroughly, as I don't trust any maester, but I couldn't find out much. He didn't try to write confidential information, and if he really was a spy, props to him for being so meticulous.
With the last spy found, I would bid farewell to the Lord of Seagard, but I wouldn't leave immediately. I would wait in a clearing outside seagard for a day while I finished investigating the maester. It was possible he didn't write anything because I was there, but with him "knowing" that I left, maybe he would start doing something.
Walking toward the lord's solar, I nodded to the guards outside the door and knocked on it.
"Enter," Jason Mallister's voice was heard from inside.
"Lord Mallister, I hope you are having a good day," I greeted him with a smile.
"These have been five long and arduous days, Lord Stark. What news do you bring now?" he asked, shaking his head.
"I found evidence of the last spy I was able to find. I already provided the maester with proof, and he sent some guards to detain him," I explained. "It's time I continue with my journey. News about the tourney in honor of my father has arrived. I need to clue in my family in Riverrun to prepare for this clusterfuck."
Jason nodded. "I thank you from the bottom of my heart for everything you've done in these five days, Lord Stark. I hope our alliance will prove to be as fruitful."
I smiled at the weary lord. "Indeed it will be, Lord Mallister. When I return with my father, we will send a raven from here to Winterfell for the soldiers to arrive at the Moat. That way, we will start the downfall of the Freys and be able to provide assistance in case the Ironborn attack."
Returning to my room in Seagard, I collected everything and was ready to go. I would have to hide for a day from everyone, but I found a clearing that kept the castle within my range so I could spy on the maester without anyone knowing. Hopefully, I was wrong, but I had a bad feeling about leaving without being sure.
Going to some merchants to buy provisions for my journey, I kept an eye on strategic locations with my bugs, from the lord's solar to the barracks and the maester's office.
Taking my leave, I started to gallop away from the castle, searching for the clearing where I would stay for a day. Living outside of castles was difficult; I wasn't much of an outdoor person in my past life, but I needed to do this if I wanted to live peacefully in the future.
Searching for a safe spot first, I commanded my bugs to scout for anything dangerous, but thankfully, there wasn't anything of note—no bandits or animals that could threaten me. I sent only half of all the bugs I had toward Seagard. In these weeks I've been in the South, I accumulated over four million insects since they were more common in this climate.
Checking the castle, I noticed how Jason was working tirelessly for the betterment of his people, but I let out a sigh of sorrow at the scene that greeted me in the maester's office. It was a shame; my gut feeling was right.
The maester was penning a message to the Citadel, writing about my stay and what we planned to do soon.
Sighing, I made my paralyzing mosquitoes get on the raven and started riding back toward Seagard. Seeing him send the raven, I ordered my mosquitoes to inject the neurotoxin and went ahead to retrieve it. Thankfully, I was somewhat close, and in ten minutes, I could grab the raven and the message signed by Maester Aldric.
Nodding to the guards at the entrance, I went directly toward Jason's solar, knocking on the door before entering.
"Lord Mallister, I have grave news," I said direly. "Look at this."
As I showed him the raven inside my satchel and took out the message, I used the antidote to allow the raven to move.
Lord Mallister's hands were shaking with rage. "Guards!" he bellowed, and the door was opened rapidly, the guards entering with their swords drawn.
Seeing me sitting there casually, the guards stopped before making a mess. "Yes, my lord?" asked the captain.
"Bring the maester to me. Don't let him out of your sight, and don't let him run away," Jason Mallister ordered firmly.
The captain's eyes widened in alarm, but being one of those in the know, he nodded and started sprinting toward the maester's office.
"This is a mess, Lord Stark," he said. "This will complicate things. I can't trust another maester after this. But they are needed."
I nodded in understanding. "If you want, we can send a raven to the North, where I can ask them to send one with my full confidence that he won't be doing this."
Jason's eyes narrowed in thought. "If you would be so kind, Lord Stark. At least until the war ends."
I nodded. "What do you plan to do with Maester Aldric?" I asked him.
"What else? Execution," he sighed. "It's what he deserves, breaking our trust like that."
Waiting for a minute until the guards arrived, I reviewed my original plans. I would need to change them since I didn't have much time. After this, I would leave for the Bloody Gate. I needed to talk with the Blackfish since I knew his character. It would be difficult, but I could make this work.
As the contingent of guards dragging the maester entered the solar, Aldric's eyes widened when he saw me in here with the raven he had just sent. I ignored everything since I didn't have a say in the matter and grabbed some parchment and a quill to start writing the message to Winterfell.
In it, I explained my situation and would like a maester to be sent here. All the maesters in the North had been critically vetted, so I was sure we could trust any one. The problem was that we didn't have any extras to spare.
The other option would be to send a couple of maester's apprentices to carry the burden, as working as a team could make this possible.
"Lord Mallister," I asked tentatively, "Do you think three maester apprentices could work in the meantime? One for medicine, one for economics, and the last for politics?"
Jason thought for a minute and nodded, returning to ask questions to the maester.
As I finished writing the message, I signed it with my name and returned it to the table.
"It's time I leave. I'll leave this to you, Lord Mallister," I bid farewell.
"Thank you for everything, Lord Stark. But there is much to do, so I won't see you out," he answered in a clipped tone.
"Don't worry about it. In the following weeks, you'll have the answer from Winterfell," I rapped on the message I left on the table. "I'll take my leave."
What a mess this was shaping up to be. I needed to hurry up to finish my business.
Mounting my horse, I prepared for my next destination: The Crossroads Inn.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 40: The Crossroads Inn and the Blackfish.
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
I didn't like the South at all. I missed my family, the climate, and the people in the North. These few weeks have taught me that living on the move would be my personal hell and that Westeros is a difficult place to live.
I didn't even keep track of how many bandit groups I'd killed; there were so many vile people here. Ultimately, I opted to follow a caravan just to have someone to talk to. Being alone was probably the most challenging part of my travels. I was going crazy with the silence that permeated the air when I wasn't fighting.
Thankfully, when I passed by the Palisade village, almost nearing the Crossroads Inn, I joined a small merchant caravan heading to King's Landing. I offered my sword just to have someone to talk to.
Over the days of travel, the three armed guards and I fought together against several bandits, and thanks to me (I served as a recon), no one was hurt. I didn't have all my equipment since I was traveling quickly, but I got a bow and arrows from the different bandits plaguing the Riverlands.
No one knew my name and just called me Rowan—a name I thought of on the spot when they asked me.
"Will you continue with us after we rest in the inn, Rowan?" asked Garlick, a surprisingly quick-footed sellsword guarding the caravan. During our travels, I found out he was going to King's Landing to participate in the tourney to the Hand that would start in a month.
"No, I won't," I said, shaking my head. "I have some things to do in the Vale," I added.
Garlick nodded in understanding and didn't ask anything more. He was perceptive like that. I talked a lot about innocuous things with my companions, but I didn't discuss personal matters for obvious reasons.
"We'll miss you, Rowan. You helped us a lot in these past days," intervened Raynald, the merchant who paid us for protection.
"It was no problem. I was paid and had nothing better to do in the meantime," I snorted.
"Ha, I still wonder why you don't show your face. Someone with your capabilities is usually famous in these lands," added Jon Stone, a bastard from the Vale who was also going to the tourney. Luckily, we ran into him since he had been busy in some brothels in the village.
"Then you must know why asking those questions is a bad idea," I said lightly. He was a good person, and it was a shame that his curiosity might get him killed sooner rather than later.
Jon gulped audibly and slowed his pace to fall to the back of the caravan.
"We're finally here," said Garlick. "We part ways here, Rowan. Take care, and may the Light of the Seven guide you in your travels."
Ugh, him and the Seven. I respected that everyone had the right to follow whatever religion they wanted, but he kept preaching about it non-stop. Hopefully, he would be careful in the tourney. Despite our differences, he was amicable enough that I would feel sad if something happened to him.
Going to the inn's owner, I paid her for a single night since I would need to move quickly to reach my uncle before going to King's Landing. As I started to get ready for some blissful sleep, I scattered my bugs to consume whatever biomass they found available and collapsed on the bed.
One week later
Finally arriving at the Bloody Gate, where my great uncle had been since his argument with Hoster Tully, I stretched my legs and dismounted my horse.
I was approaching the Bloody Gate, but I needed to be even more careful since the Vale was too compromised. My aunt Lysa was crazy, and Littlefinger and Varys had so many spies that I couldn't afford anyone noticing me. This could not work like in Seagard, where I could enter after a bit of trouble.
For now, I saw only two options. One would be to tie a message to a bug and wait for the Blackfish to enter my range and deliver it. But that would alert him to something "supernatural" happening, and I didn't think I could afford that.
I needed to see if I could do this without alerting anyone, so I tied up my horse in the woods and took my satchel to start my recon.
The Bloody Gate controlled the only way to enter the Vale through the Mountains of the Moon. It was a narrow path with guards on both sides. The sun was already setting so I could start my infiltration soon.
In this life, I was in excellent shape since I exercised daily, and I had a rope with a hook tied expertly just in case I needed it here. Angling my throw to reach some rocks away from the guards, I started climbing, using my insects to check if someone was walking toward me or looking in my direction.
I had a bunch of bees ready to attack in case someone got close to me. They were common enough in this region and wouldn't raise much suspicion.
Getting past the guards was easy enough, thanks to my powers, and after more than forty minutes, I could get past the main gate. Now, I just needed to find the Blackfish to talk to. I didn't know if he looked the same as in the series, so I would need to use my insects to hear someone talking to him and follow him to a place alone.
After an hour of searching fruitlessly, I heard through my insects a commotion of horse hooves galloping to one of the towers. The guards called respectfully to the dignified older man leading the party—Ser Brynden. Finally, knowing how he looked, I sent some insects to follow him to his bedroom, where he was changing his armor.
After giving him some privacy since I wasn't interested in seeing an old man naked, I sent my insects again towards his room, noticing that there were three guards situated outside it.
Using my insects to create a commotion that the guards heard, I approached rapidly to his room and knocked insistently. I also kept an eye on the guards, who tried to find the reason for the sudden noise coming from the end of the hallway.
"Who is it?" a weary voice was heard from inside.
I didn't answer and kept knocking. Now Brynden, fully awake, grabbed his sword and asked again before opening the door with his sword drawn.
Rapidly taking the cowl from my head, I raised my hands and said, "Great-uncle, I'm Robb Stark. Please let me in. No one can know I am here," I said urgently, noticing that the guards had given up finding the reason for the sound and were returning to their posts.
"Hurry, the guards are coming back," I said while entering quickly but cautiously.
Brynden's eyes widened comically when he saw my face. Thankfully, I inherited my looks from my mother, and he was able to recognize me enough to not attack me.
Closing the door lightly to avoid making much sound, I shushed him before checking if any more people were on this side of the tower. I noticed only my great-uncle and the three guards were there, so I relaxed slightly.
"I'm sorry for the cloak and dagger, great-uncle, but with what I know, we could never be safe enough," I said with a weary laugh. The travels had been rough on me, and I hadn't eaten a good meal for a while—at least nothing compared to a meal made in a keep.
"What are you doing here, Robb? What about your mother?" asked Brynden with a murmur.
"Mother is taking care of Winterfell with Little Sansa. Jon is doing some work for me near the Wall, and the spitfire Arya is protecting my sister and mother," I laughed heartily, remembering that Arya slept hugging her dagger.
"As for why I am here? I bring bad news all around, and I need your help," I added with utmost seriousness.
Brynden smiled when he heard about my family but grew serious when he realized I needed him. He was an honorable man, and family was the most important thing for him. This would greatly help but also complicate things due to what my aunt had done.
"What happened, Robb?" he asked.
"Before we begin, could I ask you to send the guards away? I cannot stress this enough. I bring terrible news and am risking a lot seeking you. No one else can know," I answered.
He thought for a moment but complied with my request. While he opened the doors, I hid, and he called for the guards inside, ordering them to leave the premises.
The guards nodded and exited the room, walking to the tower entrance, where they split up. Two of them left for a tavern, but the last one returned, trying to be stealthy.
I sighed. I truly hated that this happened so often. I was curious to know how I would act without my power to keep my people in check, always wondering whom I could trust.
Brynden was getting impatient with my silence, but I raised my hand and opened the door while pointing to where the guard was hiding. Brynden understood what I meant and went to investigate.
Grabbing his sword, he attacked the guard without question, slashing his back while the guard was oblivious.
"We will learn who you work for, lad. I hope you like the heights," he said while dragging the guard to the tower's entrance.
Looking through my insects, I noticed that Brynden dropped the guard at the entrance, explained that he was a spy, had him sent to the maester for treatment, and then walked back to his room.
"How did you know?" he asked seriously.
"I had a hunch. I've been rooting out spies for more than five years. You have no idea how many of those vermin were in the North," I shook my head.
Brynden sighed. "I hate politics," and he sat in a chair. "Now you can start explaining."
Little by little, I explained my findings about the queen's infidelity, including the signed message from Tyrion sealing the deal.
Brynden furrowed his brow. "Gods be good… This will bring chaos when people find out. I need to talk to Lysa to strengthen our borders."
I shook my head. "This is not all. The Vale is compromised like you wouldn't believe."
"What do you mean, nephew?" he asked with his face set in a grim line.
"Lysa, my aunt, killed her husband, Jon Arryn," I said firmly.
His face changed instantly. "What do you mean? Lysa may not be the most intelligent, but she cannot do something so heinous."
"What if her obsession manipulated her to further his own ends?" I asked back.
"Her obsession?" Ser Brynden asked.
"Petyr Baelish," I said simply.
"Explain from the beginning. This is way too confusing," he implored.
As I explained Lysa's attempt to frame the Lannisters with us by order of Baelish and his endgame while also recounting the blanks he had during our conversations, hours passed. But in the end, I found him needing clarification and out of his depth.
"If everything followed his plans, Baelish would win big with this," he said somberly. "I didn't like him, but I find it hard to believe that he is capable of all this."
"He has been obsessed with my mother ever since the fight with Uncle Brandon," I said. "From what I've been able to uncover, while he was recuperating from those injuries, Lysa jumped into his bed and gave him her maidenhood."
Ser Brynden shook his head in despair. "What are your plans, Robb? And what do I need to do?"
"Prepare your most trusted people. But don't say why; just act as if you have a bad feeling or something," I said. "After that, the North will invade the Riverlands when the war starts between the Baratheons and the Lannisters."
"Why would you do that?" he asked perplexedly.
"The Twins. I need them to be under the North so we can close the borders completely. I'm sure Grandfather will understand in the future," I said firmly.
"He has been sick for a while. You'll probably have to talk with Edmure," he said with deep sadness. Even after all their disagreements, he loved his brother.
"From what I've heard, he will be easy to handle," I chuckled. "And if not? It's a future me problem."
"And after that?" Brynden tilted his head.
I sighed dramatically. "After that? The fight for the throne begins, great-uncle."
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
I didn't even keep track of how many bandit groups I'd killed; there were so many vile people here. Ultimately, I opted to follow a caravan just to have someone to talk to. Being alone was probably the most challenging part of my travels. I was going crazy with the silence that permeated the air when I wasn't fighting.
Thankfully, when I passed by the Palisade village, almost nearing the Crossroads Inn, I joined a small merchant caravan heading to King's Landing. I offered my sword just to have someone to talk to.
Over the days of travel, the three armed guards and I fought together against several bandits, and thanks to me (I served as a recon), no one was hurt. I didn't have all my equipment since I was traveling quickly, but I got a bow and arrows from the different bandits plaguing the Riverlands.
No one knew my name and just called me Rowan—a name I thought of on the spot when they asked me.
"Will you continue with us after we rest in the inn, Rowan?" asked Garlick, a surprisingly quick-footed sellsword guarding the caravan. During our travels, I found out he was going to King's Landing to participate in the tourney to the Hand that would start in a month.
"No, I won't," I said, shaking my head. "I have some things to do in the Vale," I added.
Garlick nodded in understanding and didn't ask anything more. He was perceptive like that. I talked a lot about innocuous things with my companions, but I didn't discuss personal matters for obvious reasons.
"We'll miss you, Rowan. You helped us a lot in these past days," intervened Raynald, the merchant who paid us for protection.
"It was no problem. I was paid and had nothing better to do in the meantime," I snorted.
"Ha, I still wonder why you don't show your face. Someone with your capabilities is usually famous in these lands," added Jon Stone, a bastard from the Vale who was also going to the tourney. Luckily, we ran into him since he had been busy in some brothels in the village.
"Then you must know why asking those questions is a bad idea," I said lightly. He was a good person, and it was a shame that his curiosity might get him killed sooner rather than later.
Jon gulped audibly and slowed his pace to fall to the back of the caravan.
"We're finally here," said Garlick. "We part ways here, Rowan. Take care, and may the Light of the Seven guide you in your travels."
Ugh, him and the Seven. I respected that everyone had the right to follow whatever religion they wanted, but he kept preaching about it non-stop. Hopefully, he would be careful in the tourney. Despite our differences, he was amicable enough that I would feel sad if something happened to him.
Going to the inn's owner, I paid her for a single night since I would need to move quickly to reach my uncle before going to King's Landing. As I started to get ready for some blissful sleep, I scattered my bugs to consume whatever biomass they found available and collapsed on the bed.
One week later
Finally arriving at the Bloody Gate, where my great uncle had been since his argument with Hoster Tully, I stretched my legs and dismounted my horse.
I was approaching the Bloody Gate, but I needed to be even more careful since the Vale was too compromised. My aunt Lysa was crazy, and Littlefinger and Varys had so many spies that I couldn't afford anyone noticing me. This could not work like in Seagard, where I could enter after a bit of trouble.
For now, I saw only two options. One would be to tie a message to a bug and wait for the Blackfish to enter my range and deliver it. But that would alert him to something "supernatural" happening, and I didn't think I could afford that.
I needed to see if I could do this without alerting anyone, so I tied up my horse in the woods and took my satchel to start my recon.
The Bloody Gate controlled the only way to enter the Vale through the Mountains of the Moon. It was a narrow path with guards on both sides. The sun was already setting so I could start my infiltration soon.
In this life, I was in excellent shape since I exercised daily, and I had a rope with a hook tied expertly just in case I needed it here. Angling my throw to reach some rocks away from the guards, I started climbing, using my insects to check if someone was walking toward me or looking in my direction.
I had a bunch of bees ready to attack in case someone got close to me. They were common enough in this region and wouldn't raise much suspicion.
Getting past the guards was easy enough, thanks to my powers, and after more than forty minutes, I could get past the main gate. Now, I just needed to find the Blackfish to talk to. I didn't know if he looked the same as in the series, so I would need to use my insects to hear someone talking to him and follow him to a place alone.
After an hour of searching fruitlessly, I heard through my insects a commotion of horse hooves galloping to one of the towers. The guards called respectfully to the dignified older man leading the party—Ser Brynden. Finally, knowing how he looked, I sent some insects to follow him to his bedroom, where he was changing his armor.
After giving him some privacy since I wasn't interested in seeing an old man naked, I sent my insects again towards his room, noticing that there were three guards situated outside it.
Using my insects to create a commotion that the guards heard, I approached rapidly to his room and knocked insistently. I also kept an eye on the guards, who tried to find the reason for the sudden noise coming from the end of the hallway.
"Who is it?" a weary voice was heard from inside.
I didn't answer and kept knocking. Now Brynden, fully awake, grabbed his sword and asked again before opening the door with his sword drawn.
Rapidly taking the cowl from my head, I raised my hands and said, "Great-uncle, I'm Robb Stark. Please let me in. No one can know I am here," I said urgently, noticing that the guards had given up finding the reason for the sound and were returning to their posts.
"Hurry, the guards are coming back," I said while entering quickly but cautiously.
Brynden's eyes widened comically when he saw my face. Thankfully, I inherited my looks from my mother, and he was able to recognize me enough to not attack me.
Closing the door lightly to avoid making much sound, I shushed him before checking if any more people were on this side of the tower. I noticed only my great-uncle and the three guards were there, so I relaxed slightly.
"I'm sorry for the cloak and dagger, great-uncle, but with what I know, we could never be safe enough," I said with a weary laugh. The travels had been rough on me, and I hadn't eaten a good meal for a while—at least nothing compared to a meal made in a keep.
"What are you doing here, Robb? What about your mother?" asked Brynden with a murmur.
"Mother is taking care of Winterfell with Little Sansa. Jon is doing some work for me near the Wall, and the spitfire Arya is protecting my sister and mother," I laughed heartily, remembering that Arya slept hugging her dagger.
"As for why I am here? I bring bad news all around, and I need your help," I added with utmost seriousness.
Brynden smiled when he heard about my family but grew serious when he realized I needed him. He was an honorable man, and family was the most important thing for him. This would greatly help but also complicate things due to what my aunt had done.
"What happened, Robb?" he asked.
"Before we begin, could I ask you to send the guards away? I cannot stress this enough. I bring terrible news and am risking a lot seeking you. No one else can know," I answered.
He thought for a moment but complied with my request. While he opened the doors, I hid, and he called for the guards inside, ordering them to leave the premises.
The guards nodded and exited the room, walking to the tower entrance, where they split up. Two of them left for a tavern, but the last one returned, trying to be stealthy.
I sighed. I truly hated that this happened so often. I was curious to know how I would act without my power to keep my people in check, always wondering whom I could trust.
Brynden was getting impatient with my silence, but I raised my hand and opened the door while pointing to where the guard was hiding. Brynden understood what I meant and went to investigate.
Grabbing his sword, he attacked the guard without question, slashing his back while the guard was oblivious.
"We will learn who you work for, lad. I hope you like the heights," he said while dragging the guard to the tower's entrance.
Looking through my insects, I noticed that Brynden dropped the guard at the entrance, explained that he was a spy, had him sent to the maester for treatment, and then walked back to his room.
"How did you know?" he asked seriously.
"I had a hunch. I've been rooting out spies for more than five years. You have no idea how many of those vermin were in the North," I shook my head.
Brynden sighed. "I hate politics," and he sat in a chair. "Now you can start explaining."
Little by little, I explained my findings about the queen's infidelity, including the signed message from Tyrion sealing the deal.
Brynden furrowed his brow. "Gods be good… This will bring chaos when people find out. I need to talk to Lysa to strengthen our borders."
I shook my head. "This is not all. The Vale is compromised like you wouldn't believe."
"What do you mean, nephew?" he asked with his face set in a grim line.
"Lysa, my aunt, killed her husband, Jon Arryn," I said firmly.
His face changed instantly. "What do you mean? Lysa may not be the most intelligent, but she cannot do something so heinous."
"What if her obsession manipulated her to further his own ends?" I asked back.
"Her obsession?" Ser Brynden asked.
"Petyr Baelish," I said simply.
"Explain from the beginning. This is way too confusing," he implored.
As I explained Lysa's attempt to frame the Lannisters with us by order of Baelish and his endgame while also recounting the blanks he had during our conversations, hours passed. But in the end, I found him needing clarification and out of his depth.
"If everything followed his plans, Baelish would win big with this," he said somberly. "I didn't like him, but I find it hard to believe that he is capable of all this."
"He has been obsessed with my mother ever since the fight with Uncle Brandon," I said. "From what I've been able to uncover, while he was recuperating from those injuries, Lysa jumped into his bed and gave him her maidenhood."
Ser Brynden shook his head in despair. "What are your plans, Robb? And what do I need to do?"
"Prepare your most trusted people. But don't say why; just act as if you have a bad feeling or something," I said. "After that, the North will invade the Riverlands when the war starts between the Baratheons and the Lannisters."
"Why would you do that?" he asked perplexedly.
"The Twins. I need them to be under the North so we can close the borders completely. I'm sure Grandfather will understand in the future," I said firmly.
"He has been sick for a while. You'll probably have to talk with Edmure," he said with deep sadness. Even after all their disagreements, he loved his brother.
"From what I've heard, he will be easy to handle," I chuckled. "And if not? It's a future me problem."
"And after that?" Brynden tilted his head.
I sighed dramatically. "After that? The fight for the throne begins, great-uncle."
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 41: King's Landing
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
After my conversation with my great-uncle ended, I stayed in his tower for two days, waiting for him to handle things in my stead. Entering King's Landing with my face uncovered would be nearly impossible, and I was tired of using my cowl to hide my identity.
Thankfully, Brynden told me he could get me some pitch-black hair dye, so I had to wait for him to return with it. That was a little over a week ago. Once he gave me the dye, I went back to the Crossroads Inn and asked the matron to dye it for me, never removing the cloth from my face for both of our security.
Now, I was approaching Ivy's Inn, which was the last stop before I reached King's Landing. I was traveling with a merchant who wanted to use the last days of the tourney in my father's name to earn more gold, and I was happy to accompany them on the journey.
Having company was beneficial since traveling alone was mind-numbingly dull. Additionally, I could provide extra security for people who would be my subjects in the future. I was somewhat of an expert in northern problems, but I had almost no idea how life was in the rest of the kingdoms—a gap I needed to fill as I required the Seven Kingdoms united to fight against the actual threat.
Using my free time, as my insects hadn't found anything dangerous within my range, I lamented not having time to visit the Gods Eye. I remembered a dragon had died there and was curious if I could find something to enhance my power. It was a shame I was short on time, but perhaps we could make a slight detour when I returned with my father and his entourage. If we were on the run, I might have to wait until the war settled to visit all the mysterious places across Westeros.
The king had a couple of weeks to live, and I wouldn't lift a finger to help him. Robert Baratheon was a good friend of my father, but I needed the war to start to rally people behind me. Simply killing every enemy the moment I could wouldn't work; I'd be seen as a conqueror rather than what I aspired to be.
I wanted people to love me, not fear me. At least, I wanted more people to love me, though I knew I would still scare a lot of lords and have to commit some heinous acts for the realm's betterment.
I wasn't all-knowing and was sure to make many mistakes on my rise to power, but I was confident I could guide Westeros to a better future than the one in canon. Many people would die in the war, but their sacrifices would pave the way to greatness.
Finally arriving at the inn, we dismounted our horses and paid for our rooms. I splurged on a feast alone in my room since I had ample gold from all the bandits I had killed on my travels.
After my sumptuous meal, I began drafting my orders for Tyrion. I needed to be cautious as I couldn't reveal too much information without disclosing my future knowledge. However, I had to provide enough so Tyrion could earn Daenerys's trust and avoid being killed immediately.
I was walking a tightrope with this, but it was necessary. Her dragons and name would be valuable for the future, and working with her was the best option. I knew I could create something against her dragons, but I wasn't sure if it was the best idea, as they could be the MVPs in the war against the Others.
After reviewing my draft, I started crossing out anything that might reveal my knowledge. My angle was that I would help Daenerys in exchange for her hand in marriage, and I needed to word the message for Tyrion as if I had been working toward this for years.
I provided information as if I had spies in Pentos and beyond, focusing mainly on individuals who couldn't be trusted and whom Tyrion should be cautious of. Starting with Daenerys's brother, my plan for Tyrion was to extract him from King's Landing before the king's death, providing him with a heavy bag of gold. The Manderlys would then take him to Astapor to wait for Daenerys. I would support him with gold for his new life and preparation for her. I hadn't made enough waves in that part of the world, so it should proceed similarly to canon.
There, Tyrion would wait for Daenerys and start addressing every problem he could. If he was proactive, he could establish strong support before her arrival, alleviating their suffering.
I planned to provide him with enough gold to buy a good number of Unsullied or perhaps just pay some sellswords for protection—either way, that would no longer be my concern.
I trusted Tyrion to be smart and committed to a peaceful future where he could have a family, so I was confident he would do his best to succeed.
After Astapor, Daenerys would travel to Yunkai and Meereen. I was sure my help would earn me some favor with them, alongside Tyrion's fear, when he realized the extent of my information and power.
Ending my message, I went to sleep, knowing that every day passing brought the war closer.
King's Landing
I was still using the name Rowan, but with my hair dyed pitch black and styled differently, I looked different enough to pass as someone else. Thankfully, we entered the capital without issues since I was part of a caravan. I started using a mask that displayed my hair so people would think I was quirky rather than hiding something.
Bidding farewell to the merchant, I searched for a central location to start scattering my insects. Over my travels, I had accumulated over five billion insects, but that number was impossible to conceal. Therefore, I only had around two million with me.
I ordered them to search every nook and cranny for something interesting within my range and began dozing off while trying to ignore the city's stench. Thankfully, I had enough control to avoid using the sense of smell of my swarm.
The sheer number of people here made me shudder. I couldn't believe someone thought cramming several hundred thousand people into one place was a good idea.
Going over my bugs' senses, I noticed something that made my heart race. I hadn't recalled this detail in the past as it hadn't mattered much until the end, but seeing the enormous amount of wildfire beneath the city made me shudder, thinking about how lucky the people here were.
Directing some unique bugs I had created to consume dangerous biomass, I was surprised when they couldn't and died on the spot. Wildfire was so perilous that it killed my most resilient creation instantly.
Letting out a muffled chuckle, I returned to the inn for a safe place to stay, pondering how to make an insect sturdy enough to consume wildfire. Despite these complications, my reward will hopefully be worth it.
The Hand's Tourney was coming to an end, so I had a few weeks before the Lannisters usurped the throne. Tomorrow, I would search for my father to determine what was happening. But for now? I needed rest.
The Next Day
Letting out a weak chuckle, I observed my last failed attempt to consume wildfire through my insects. This particular bug I had created could probably handle liquid metal but was unable to process wildfire without dying.
Kudos to the maker, as this substance was so dangerous that it made me nervous about being in this city, a constant nagging in the back of my mind that I was on top of a ticking time bomb.
Shaking my head, I walked toward the Red Keep to ensure my father and his companions were okay. Seeing him running ragged with concern, I shook my head as he began his conversation with the queen.
Honestly, his honor was his downfall. I understood he wanted to ensure the children didn't suffer for their parent's sins, but surely there were other ways besides allowing her to prepare for her coup.
Letting one of my insects with a message tied to its leg search for Jory, I sighed, knowing that my peaceful days were ending.
Seeing that Jory received and burned my message, I started walking back, casting one last look at my father. Timing would be crucial; the best moment to break him out would be just after the meeting, where he gives the king's final wishes to the council.
I wasn't sure how things had progressed here, but just in case he "allied" with Littlefinger, I wanted him to be betrayed to teach him a lesson. For now, I needed to keep trying to consume the wildfire. I was close; I could feel it.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Thankfully, Brynden told me he could get me some pitch-black hair dye, so I had to wait for him to return with it. That was a little over a week ago. Once he gave me the dye, I went back to the Crossroads Inn and asked the matron to dye it for me, never removing the cloth from my face for both of our security.
Now, I was approaching Ivy's Inn, which was the last stop before I reached King's Landing. I was traveling with a merchant who wanted to use the last days of the tourney in my father's name to earn more gold, and I was happy to accompany them on the journey.
Having company was beneficial since traveling alone was mind-numbingly dull. Additionally, I could provide extra security for people who would be my subjects in the future. I was somewhat of an expert in northern problems, but I had almost no idea how life was in the rest of the kingdoms—a gap I needed to fill as I required the Seven Kingdoms united to fight against the actual threat.
Using my free time, as my insects hadn't found anything dangerous within my range, I lamented not having time to visit the Gods Eye. I remembered a dragon had died there and was curious if I could find something to enhance my power. It was a shame I was short on time, but perhaps we could make a slight detour when I returned with my father and his entourage. If we were on the run, I might have to wait until the war settled to visit all the mysterious places across Westeros.
The king had a couple of weeks to live, and I wouldn't lift a finger to help him. Robert Baratheon was a good friend of my father, but I needed the war to start to rally people behind me. Simply killing every enemy the moment I could wouldn't work; I'd be seen as a conqueror rather than what I aspired to be.
I wanted people to love me, not fear me. At least, I wanted more people to love me, though I knew I would still scare a lot of lords and have to commit some heinous acts for the realm's betterment.
I wasn't all-knowing and was sure to make many mistakes on my rise to power, but I was confident I could guide Westeros to a better future than the one in canon. Many people would die in the war, but their sacrifices would pave the way to greatness.
Finally arriving at the inn, we dismounted our horses and paid for our rooms. I splurged on a feast alone in my room since I had ample gold from all the bandits I had killed on my travels.
After my sumptuous meal, I began drafting my orders for Tyrion. I needed to be cautious as I couldn't reveal too much information without disclosing my future knowledge. However, I had to provide enough so Tyrion could earn Daenerys's trust and avoid being killed immediately.
I was walking a tightrope with this, but it was necessary. Her dragons and name would be valuable for the future, and working with her was the best option. I knew I could create something against her dragons, but I wasn't sure if it was the best idea, as they could be the MVPs in the war against the Others.
After reviewing my draft, I started crossing out anything that might reveal my knowledge. My angle was that I would help Daenerys in exchange for her hand in marriage, and I needed to word the message for Tyrion as if I had been working toward this for years.
I provided information as if I had spies in Pentos and beyond, focusing mainly on individuals who couldn't be trusted and whom Tyrion should be cautious of. Starting with Daenerys's brother, my plan for Tyrion was to extract him from King's Landing before the king's death, providing him with a heavy bag of gold. The Manderlys would then take him to Astapor to wait for Daenerys. I would support him with gold for his new life and preparation for her. I hadn't made enough waves in that part of the world, so it should proceed similarly to canon.
There, Tyrion would wait for Daenerys and start addressing every problem he could. If he was proactive, he could establish strong support before her arrival, alleviating their suffering.
I planned to provide him with enough gold to buy a good number of Unsullied or perhaps just pay some sellswords for protection—either way, that would no longer be my concern.
I trusted Tyrion to be smart and committed to a peaceful future where he could have a family, so I was confident he would do his best to succeed.
After Astapor, Daenerys would travel to Yunkai and Meereen. I was sure my help would earn me some favor with them, alongside Tyrion's fear, when he realized the extent of my information and power.
Ending my message, I went to sleep, knowing that every day passing brought the war closer.
King's Landing
I was still using the name Rowan, but with my hair dyed pitch black and styled differently, I looked different enough to pass as someone else. Thankfully, we entered the capital without issues since I was part of a caravan. I started using a mask that displayed my hair so people would think I was quirky rather than hiding something.
Bidding farewell to the merchant, I searched for a central location to start scattering my insects. Over my travels, I had accumulated over five billion insects, but that number was impossible to conceal. Therefore, I only had around two million with me.
I ordered them to search every nook and cranny for something interesting within my range and began dozing off while trying to ignore the city's stench. Thankfully, I had enough control to avoid using the sense of smell of my swarm.
The sheer number of people here made me shudder. I couldn't believe someone thought cramming several hundred thousand people into one place was a good idea.
Going over my bugs' senses, I noticed something that made my heart race. I hadn't recalled this detail in the past as it hadn't mattered much until the end, but seeing the enormous amount of wildfire beneath the city made me shudder, thinking about how lucky the people here were.
Directing some unique bugs I had created to consume dangerous biomass, I was surprised when they couldn't and died on the spot. Wildfire was so perilous that it killed my most resilient creation instantly.
Letting out a muffled chuckle, I returned to the inn for a safe place to stay, pondering how to make an insect sturdy enough to consume wildfire. Despite these complications, my reward will hopefully be worth it.
The Hand's Tourney was coming to an end, so I had a few weeks before the Lannisters usurped the throne. Tomorrow, I would search for my father to determine what was happening. But for now? I needed rest.
The Next Day
Letting out a weak chuckle, I observed my last failed attempt to consume wildfire through my insects. This particular bug I had created could probably handle liquid metal but was unable to process wildfire without dying.
Kudos to the maker, as this substance was so dangerous that it made me nervous about being in this city, a constant nagging in the back of my mind that I was on top of a ticking time bomb.
Shaking my head, I walked toward the Red Keep to ensure my father and his companions were okay. Seeing him running ragged with concern, I shook my head as he began his conversation with the queen.
Honestly, his honor was his downfall. I understood he wanted to ensure the children didn't suffer for their parent's sins, but surely there were other ways besides allowing her to prepare for her coup.
Letting one of my insects with a message tied to its leg search for Jory, I sighed, knowing that my peaceful days were ending.
Seeing that Jory received and burned my message, I started walking back, casting one last look at my father. Timing would be crucial; the best moment to break him out would be just after the meeting, where he gives the king's final wishes to the council.
I wasn't sure how things had progressed here, but just in case he "allied" with Littlefinger, I wanted him to be betrayed to teach him a lesson. For now, I needed to keep trying to consume the wildfire. I was close; I could feel it.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 42: And the Bells Rang
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Author's Note: Damn, this one is lengthy! Hope you all enjoy it. The war has finally started, and our boy is ready. I'm still not sure what the next chapter will be about; it will depend on my muse. It will either be a continuation of this chapter or one with different POVs showing what everyone else is doing, since Jon is at the Wall, Brynden has things to do, and there's a mess in the Red Keep. There's so much to cover, lol.
Also, as of this chapter, FFnet and QQ are already in the same as all the other platforms i use, so well be back to my usual posting schedule. I TRY to write 5 chapters a week, and ive been consistent with it since i started, so yeah, thanks for reading!
Kingslanding.
Robb Stark
Laughing maniacally, I observed my latest creation. This beetle had its stomach so fortified that I was sure it would be more than enough to consume the wildfire at the bottom of the city.
With it, I was sure I would obtain a nice upgrade in my power. What I was hoping for was to create insects that secreted this specific alchemic mix.
Having wildfire at my beck and call whenever I wanted would help with all my endeavors, from the war of the living to the battle against the dead.
Giving my full attention to the beetle perched on the bowl containing my future prized possession, I ordered it to start absorbing the wildfire. A big smile spread across my face when the insect didn't die on the spot and continued to consume the wildfire until it was full.
The first thing I noticed was the amount of energy I received from such a small amount of wildfire—it was by far the most significant increase I had experienced in all these years. Maybe it was its properties or something I didn't yet understand, but I couldn't help but marvel at it.
With this beetle template and the new energy I obtained, I started creating more bugs capable of consuming wildfire and left them to their devices until they couldn't continue. War would begin soon, and I needed a lot of energy for some of my more daring ideas.
The second thing I noticed was that I unlocked the ability to naturally create insects that secreted wildfire. This was a big deal because I could have an unlimited amount of it to use against whomever I wanted.
Satisfied with my gains, I exited my inn to check on the Red Keep. Jory knew I was protecting them from the shadows in King's Landing, but he was under my orders to act oblivious of it. I could see that he was confused by my order to keep it a secret from my father, but I needed him to learn his lesson.
I couldn't have him interfering with my plans for the war for the sake of his honor, and I needed him to be betrayed.
I saw him asking Baelish for help after his last conversation with the queen, and the king was preparing for his last hunt at that very moment. I could feel the excitement in my veins. Everything would start soon, and I could stop hiding and focus on reaching my true goal.
Near the castle, I pretended to buy things from some merchants. Conversing with someone while spying was easy, thanks to my overpowered multitasking ability. That way, I could listen to everything around me while acting like an average person.
Seeing the king galloping into the woods with his entourage, I prepared for the last steps of my plan. Right now, I needed to find Tyrion and tell him to prepare. After that, Just wait for the shoe to drop.
Tyrion Lannister
I could feel, deep within me, that something big was about to happen. I hadn't spoken much with my family since my father kicked me out of Casterly Rock, but Jaime sometimes took time to talk to me. Going from having more gold than I could use to needing to work for it was difficult, but I couldn't deny that I felt better when I spent my hard-earned gold.
Standing in my solar, beside Elyse's, I pondered Robb Stark's plans. They were mad, but I couldn't deny the thrill I felt when he told me about them. I had a backpack ready for whenever he gave the word.
I didn't know much about it since we were short on time when we had that conversation, but I knew it would happen soon. My spies had already informed me of the conversation between my sister and the Hand. I knew my sister, and I was sure this would be Eddard Stark's biggest mistake.
She was cruel and would stop at nothing to obtain what she desired.
Hearing a knock on my window, I wondered what was happening.
My office was on the second floor of this building, so it couldn't be a person knocking. I wondered if Joffrey thought ordering some of his sycophants to start throwing stones again would be funny.
Leaning in, I didn't notice anything unusual until I heard a sound behind me. Seeing something I couldn't have imagined, I shook my head. A message was dropped on my desk.
Looking around, I didn't notice anything unusual. The door was still closed, as were the other windows.
Approaching the parchment, I used a dagger to open it. I'd heard enough of Dorne's ways to send poisoned messages to avoid falling for something so simple.
Reading the message, I deadpanned—I was batshit scared of this kid.
The message only had one line: "It's time. Meet near the Sept of Baelor when the sun sets."
I had no idea how he was capable of some of the things he had done, but I was sure of one thing… This was the winning side.
At Dusk
Going over my belongings, I started fretting about everything. This was madness, and losing my head would be the least of my worries if someone found out about this.
"Come here," a voice called from one of the darkest corners I could see.
Approaching the person I suspected was Robb, I looked around nervously and adjusted the cowl I used for disguise. One of the positives of being a dwarf was that people would think I was just a child from Flea Bottom.
"How did you get that message into my solar?" I asked him, tilting my head in wonderment.
"It's a secret, Tyrion," he laughed while removing his mask.
Seeing him with black hair made me nod—it worked, as I wouldn't have been able to recognize him without careful observation.
He was famous in the North, and some of his legends had reached here, but aside from his Tully-colored hair, not much was said about his appearance.
"It's time to leave this place for your new life, Tyrion," Robb said with a smile. "Are you nervous? Excited?"
"A little bit of both, I guess," I nodded. "Afraid too… I could lose my head before I arrive where you're sending me."
"Ha! That's the spirit, Tyrion." Robb laughed. "Your sister just murdered her husband. It appears she fucked her cousin to make him drunk during his hunt."
"What?!" I exclaimed. "The Hand's warning must have spurred her to act so fast," I mumbled.
"Indeed, my father's honor coming back to bite him in the behind," Robb shook his head. "Whatever, what's done is done. I just need to take him from the black cells."
"Are you sure you can do it, Robb?" I asked him. "I don't have much power there, but I could ask for some favors if you need them."
"Thank you for the offer, but don't worry," he declined. "I'm more than capable enough to take him out."
I wasn't entirely sure I believed him, but he knew best what he could do.
"Then, now what?" I asked him nervously.
"Now you start your next great adventure, my friend," Robb laughed. "I just need to explain a few things before I take you to the Manderlys' cog."
"Go on, Robb. Don't keep me waiting," I urged him, nervous about someone listening to us.
"Haha, don't worry. The people following you have been dispatched," Robb assured me.
"People were following me?" I asked, shocked.
"Indeed, the little birds of a eunuch," he answered.
"Well, let's begin. First, the Manderlys will take you all the way to Astapor. They will provide you with three thousand gold coins to start setting yourself up in your new life," Robb said calmly as if that wasn't a lot of gold, and he could give it to me without caring about the war.
"With that, you'll have enough to find a place to stay and buy some Unsullied for protection… The Manderlys aboard the galley will help you settle in before returning. They will be our way of communicating."
"How sure are you that the next queen will arrive there?" I asked him doubtfully.
"A hundred percent, my friend. You'll have a few months to use your head to gain a foothold in the city. There are two things you need to know aside from the message I will give you later," Robb nodded, showing me a parchment.
"First of all, Daenerys seems like a good kid, but she is ruthless, and I want you to advise her enough to be a better person for when we meet. And secondly, please, Tyrion, treat the Unsullied you buy or any other servants, well, Don't mistreat them. I want you to be loved by them by the time she arrives," he said seriously.
I just nodded in response—that wouldn't be difficult at all. I wasn't cruel, and being good to my servants seemed obvious.
"Anything else, Robb?" I asked him.
"Hmmm… no, everything needed is written in this parchment. Inside, you'll find information on the dos and don'ts and the people you cannot trust under any circumstances," he said seriously. "Trust me on this… You will encounter a bunch of vipers on your travels, but I'm sure you will be able to overcome everything."
"Understood. Thank you, Robb. For everything," I said sincerely.
"It will be hard, but I'm sure we will meet again in the throne room during our crowning ceremony," he laughed, and I wondered why he was so happy. "Now follow me; it's time for you to leave. I give it a few more days before it all goes to shit."
Following him to the port, I bade my farewell to the capital. I didn't know when or if I would be back, but I hoped everything worked out in the end and that my family would rot in hell.
"Can you do me a favor before we leave?" I asked Robb just as the galley and the crew started to sail.
"What's up?" Robb shouted.
Getting closer to the deck to be heard more easily, I shouted back, "Take care of Lady Elyse! She doesn't deserve anything happening to her under my nephew's rule."
I didn't hear a response, but I saw him giving a solemn nod. That was the last I would see of him for a while, and I was glad. The kid was scary as hell.
Sighing, I walked to the room they had given me to try and rest for the journey. My last thoughts before falling asleep were of Lady Elyse's smiles when she explained how to do something I didn't know.
Robb Stark
Seeing the galley leaving the port, I wished everyone luck on their journey. But after a moment, I started walking back, just as their travels began. I had a lot of things to do for a while.
The king had just arrived with his injury a couple of hours earlier, and I needed to ensure that things stayed the same so I could extract my people without much fuss.
Arriving at the Red Keep, I started my work. First, I made a copy of the king's dying will, just in case I needed it. It wouldn't hurt to have, even if I didn't think so.
After that, I went ahead to tell Jory to prepare. They wouldn't accompany my father to the throne room since I didn't want to put them at risk. My father would go, but I was sure he wouldn't be harmed much since he was a person of interest, unlike his followers.
Jory commanded the rest of the Northern guards to leave for the entrance of the city, where they would wait for us in the woods where the king was injured. I already had two horses ready for our retreat with my father.
Going over everything again, just double-checking to make sure I was ready, I heard the bells in the Sept ringing, signifying the king's death.
I wouldn't get to sleep today, but I had some insects that could help me with that.
Eleven Hours Later
I was already inside the Red Keep. Thankfully, with everything happening, their security was lax. Jory and the rest had already left, taking Lady Elyse with them after some coaxing.
Thankfully, the small friendship I gained with her during her stay in Winterfell made her trust me enough after Jory showed her a message I had written while he explained the happenings in the kingdom.
They left over six hours ago and were waiting for us in the woods. Now, the only thing happening was my father getting a little roughed up and dropped in the black cells.
He tried to do the same thing as in canon, and he was betrayed by everyone here. Renly left the capital and headed toward Highgarden with his lover. Varys didn't help, and Baelish put a dagger to his throat instead of supporting him to maintain his faked support of the new king.
Everything was going according to plan, and when they dropped him, I was ready to move.
Poisoning the guards since I didn't need to hide anymore, I approached the one with the keys to my father's cell. As I approached him, I took off my mask just for theatrics.
"Winter is coming," is the last thing he heard as he died, thanks to my insects. I quickly grabbed the keys and went ahead to my father's cell.
Opening it and double-checking with my insects that everyone here was dead or dying and that no one else was approaching this side of the castle, I entered the cell.
"I told you not to trust them," I said to my father while I helped him up with the chains.
"Aye, you did… Thank you for taking care of me, son," Eddard said while moving his limbs, trying to shake off the sleepiness.
"Everything is ready; we just need to leave," I said while moving. "Follow me quickly. I don't want to have to kill everyone here."
My father nodded and quickly followed me. As we went outside of the cells, we encountered more guards, but they couldn't do a thing to defend themselves before dropping dead.
Going over one of the exits, we reached the first snag in my plan. I didn't have a key for this door, and I couldn't go back to search every single body since we were running out of time.
Thinking quickly, I used my new creations and sent them directly to explode at the reinforced door. I marveled at the beautiful green color of the wildfire.
Waiting for it to melt the door so we could pass safely, we ran ahead without stopping, my father following close behind.
Reaching the inn where I had left the two horses, we mounted them and galloped away. We didn't need to fight since every guard in our way dropped dead before they knew something was wrong.
Slowing for my father to catch up, I started a conversation since we were out of danger.
"We need to reunite with the rest, then we'll go directly to Seagard to send some ravens. After that, we'll go directly to the North," I said lightly.
"I tried to avoid this," my father said shamefully, looking at the dead guards at the entrance. "I thought I was doing the right thing."
"You did the right thing, father," I said thoughtfully, patting him before continuing. "But as you can see, the right thing sometimes worsens things."
"Aye, I can see that," he nodded regretfully before looking straight ahead. "We'll need to prepare for war."
"Way ahead of you, father," I laughed. "I'll take care of it. You just need to protect Winterfell in my stead. That's my new order as Lord Stark. Enjoy home with your wife; Jon and I are more than capable of ending this farce," I joked to lighten the mood.
My father chuckled weakly, "You've grown up, Robb. But I'll listen to you… Lord Stark."
"Haha, I've missed you, Father. It will be good to have you at home. Everyone missed you a lot," I smiled.
"It will be good to be back home," he nodded.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Also, as of this chapter, FFnet and QQ are already in the same as all the other platforms i use, so well be back to my usual posting schedule. I TRY to write 5 chapters a week, and ive been consistent with it since i started, so yeah, thanks for reading!
Kingslanding.
Robb Stark
Laughing maniacally, I observed my latest creation. This beetle had its stomach so fortified that I was sure it would be more than enough to consume the wildfire at the bottom of the city.
With it, I was sure I would obtain a nice upgrade in my power. What I was hoping for was to create insects that secreted this specific alchemic mix.
Having wildfire at my beck and call whenever I wanted would help with all my endeavors, from the war of the living to the battle against the dead.
Giving my full attention to the beetle perched on the bowl containing my future prized possession, I ordered it to start absorbing the wildfire. A big smile spread across my face when the insect didn't die on the spot and continued to consume the wildfire until it was full.
The first thing I noticed was the amount of energy I received from such a small amount of wildfire—it was by far the most significant increase I had experienced in all these years. Maybe it was its properties or something I didn't yet understand, but I couldn't help but marvel at it.
With this beetle template and the new energy I obtained, I started creating more bugs capable of consuming wildfire and left them to their devices until they couldn't continue. War would begin soon, and I needed a lot of energy for some of my more daring ideas.
The second thing I noticed was that I unlocked the ability to naturally create insects that secreted wildfire. This was a big deal because I could have an unlimited amount of it to use against whomever I wanted.
Satisfied with my gains, I exited my inn to check on the Red Keep. Jory knew I was protecting them from the shadows in King's Landing, but he was under my orders to act oblivious of it. I could see that he was confused by my order to keep it a secret from my father, but I needed him to learn his lesson.
I couldn't have him interfering with my plans for the war for the sake of his honor, and I needed him to be betrayed.
I saw him asking Baelish for help after his last conversation with the queen, and the king was preparing for his last hunt at that very moment. I could feel the excitement in my veins. Everything would start soon, and I could stop hiding and focus on reaching my true goal.
Near the castle, I pretended to buy things from some merchants. Conversing with someone while spying was easy, thanks to my overpowered multitasking ability. That way, I could listen to everything around me while acting like an average person.
Seeing the king galloping into the woods with his entourage, I prepared for the last steps of my plan. Right now, I needed to find Tyrion and tell him to prepare. After that, Just wait for the shoe to drop.
Tyrion Lannister
I could feel, deep within me, that something big was about to happen. I hadn't spoken much with my family since my father kicked me out of Casterly Rock, but Jaime sometimes took time to talk to me. Going from having more gold than I could use to needing to work for it was difficult, but I couldn't deny that I felt better when I spent my hard-earned gold.
Standing in my solar, beside Elyse's, I pondered Robb Stark's plans. They were mad, but I couldn't deny the thrill I felt when he told me about them. I had a backpack ready for whenever he gave the word.
I didn't know much about it since we were short on time when we had that conversation, but I knew it would happen soon. My spies had already informed me of the conversation between my sister and the Hand. I knew my sister, and I was sure this would be Eddard Stark's biggest mistake.
She was cruel and would stop at nothing to obtain what she desired.
Hearing a knock on my window, I wondered what was happening.
My office was on the second floor of this building, so it couldn't be a person knocking. I wondered if Joffrey thought ordering some of his sycophants to start throwing stones again would be funny.
Leaning in, I didn't notice anything unusual until I heard a sound behind me. Seeing something I couldn't have imagined, I shook my head. A message was dropped on my desk.
Looking around, I didn't notice anything unusual. The door was still closed, as were the other windows.
Approaching the parchment, I used a dagger to open it. I'd heard enough of Dorne's ways to send poisoned messages to avoid falling for something so simple.
Reading the message, I deadpanned—I was batshit scared of this kid.
The message only had one line: "It's time. Meet near the Sept of Baelor when the sun sets."
I had no idea how he was capable of some of the things he had done, but I was sure of one thing… This was the winning side.
At Dusk
Going over my belongings, I started fretting about everything. This was madness, and losing my head would be the least of my worries if someone found out about this.
"Come here," a voice called from one of the darkest corners I could see.
Approaching the person I suspected was Robb, I looked around nervously and adjusted the cowl I used for disguise. One of the positives of being a dwarf was that people would think I was just a child from Flea Bottom.
"How did you get that message into my solar?" I asked him, tilting my head in wonderment.
"It's a secret, Tyrion," he laughed while removing his mask.
Seeing him with black hair made me nod—it worked, as I wouldn't have been able to recognize him without careful observation.
He was famous in the North, and some of his legends had reached here, but aside from his Tully-colored hair, not much was said about his appearance.
"It's time to leave this place for your new life, Tyrion," Robb said with a smile. "Are you nervous? Excited?"
"A little bit of both, I guess," I nodded. "Afraid too… I could lose my head before I arrive where you're sending me."
"Ha! That's the spirit, Tyrion." Robb laughed. "Your sister just murdered her husband. It appears she fucked her cousin to make him drunk during his hunt."
"What?!" I exclaimed. "The Hand's warning must have spurred her to act so fast," I mumbled.
"Indeed, my father's honor coming back to bite him in the behind," Robb shook his head. "Whatever, what's done is done. I just need to take him from the black cells."
"Are you sure you can do it, Robb?" I asked him. "I don't have much power there, but I could ask for some favors if you need them."
"Thank you for the offer, but don't worry," he declined. "I'm more than capable enough to take him out."
I wasn't entirely sure I believed him, but he knew best what he could do.
"Then, now what?" I asked him nervously.
"Now you start your next great adventure, my friend," Robb laughed. "I just need to explain a few things before I take you to the Manderlys' cog."
"Go on, Robb. Don't keep me waiting," I urged him, nervous about someone listening to us.
"Haha, don't worry. The people following you have been dispatched," Robb assured me.
"People were following me?" I asked, shocked.
"Indeed, the little birds of a eunuch," he answered.
"Well, let's begin. First, the Manderlys will take you all the way to Astapor. They will provide you with three thousand gold coins to start setting yourself up in your new life," Robb said calmly as if that wasn't a lot of gold, and he could give it to me without caring about the war.
"With that, you'll have enough to find a place to stay and buy some Unsullied for protection… The Manderlys aboard the galley will help you settle in before returning. They will be our way of communicating."
"How sure are you that the next queen will arrive there?" I asked him doubtfully.
"A hundred percent, my friend. You'll have a few months to use your head to gain a foothold in the city. There are two things you need to know aside from the message I will give you later," Robb nodded, showing me a parchment.
"First of all, Daenerys seems like a good kid, but she is ruthless, and I want you to advise her enough to be a better person for when we meet. And secondly, please, Tyrion, treat the Unsullied you buy or any other servants, well, Don't mistreat them. I want you to be loved by them by the time she arrives," he said seriously.
I just nodded in response—that wouldn't be difficult at all. I wasn't cruel, and being good to my servants seemed obvious.
"Anything else, Robb?" I asked him.
"Hmmm… no, everything needed is written in this parchment. Inside, you'll find information on the dos and don'ts and the people you cannot trust under any circumstances," he said seriously. "Trust me on this… You will encounter a bunch of vipers on your travels, but I'm sure you will be able to overcome everything."
"Understood. Thank you, Robb. For everything," I said sincerely.
"It will be hard, but I'm sure we will meet again in the throne room during our crowning ceremony," he laughed, and I wondered why he was so happy. "Now follow me; it's time for you to leave. I give it a few more days before it all goes to shit."
Following him to the port, I bade my farewell to the capital. I didn't know when or if I would be back, but I hoped everything worked out in the end and that my family would rot in hell.
"Can you do me a favor before we leave?" I asked Robb just as the galley and the crew started to sail.
"What's up?" Robb shouted.
Getting closer to the deck to be heard more easily, I shouted back, "Take care of Lady Elyse! She doesn't deserve anything happening to her under my nephew's rule."
I didn't hear a response, but I saw him giving a solemn nod. That was the last I would see of him for a while, and I was glad. The kid was scary as hell.
Sighing, I walked to the room they had given me to try and rest for the journey. My last thoughts before falling asleep were of Lady Elyse's smiles when she explained how to do something I didn't know.
Robb Stark
Seeing the galley leaving the port, I wished everyone luck on their journey. But after a moment, I started walking back, just as their travels began. I had a lot of things to do for a while.
The king had just arrived with his injury a couple of hours earlier, and I needed to ensure that things stayed the same so I could extract my people without much fuss.
Arriving at the Red Keep, I started my work. First, I made a copy of the king's dying will, just in case I needed it. It wouldn't hurt to have, even if I didn't think so.
After that, I went ahead to tell Jory to prepare. They wouldn't accompany my father to the throne room since I didn't want to put them at risk. My father would go, but I was sure he wouldn't be harmed much since he was a person of interest, unlike his followers.
Jory commanded the rest of the Northern guards to leave for the entrance of the city, where they would wait for us in the woods where the king was injured. I already had two horses ready for our retreat with my father.
Going over everything again, just double-checking to make sure I was ready, I heard the bells in the Sept ringing, signifying the king's death.
I wouldn't get to sleep today, but I had some insects that could help me with that.
Eleven Hours Later
I was already inside the Red Keep. Thankfully, with everything happening, their security was lax. Jory and the rest had already left, taking Lady Elyse with them after some coaxing.
Thankfully, the small friendship I gained with her during her stay in Winterfell made her trust me enough after Jory showed her a message I had written while he explained the happenings in the kingdom.
They left over six hours ago and were waiting for us in the woods. Now, the only thing happening was my father getting a little roughed up and dropped in the black cells.
He tried to do the same thing as in canon, and he was betrayed by everyone here. Renly left the capital and headed toward Highgarden with his lover. Varys didn't help, and Baelish put a dagger to his throat instead of supporting him to maintain his faked support of the new king.
Everything was going according to plan, and when they dropped him, I was ready to move.
Poisoning the guards since I didn't need to hide anymore, I approached the one with the keys to my father's cell. As I approached him, I took off my mask just for theatrics.
"Winter is coming," is the last thing he heard as he died, thanks to my insects. I quickly grabbed the keys and went ahead to my father's cell.
Opening it and double-checking with my insects that everyone here was dead or dying and that no one else was approaching this side of the castle, I entered the cell.
"I told you not to trust them," I said to my father while I helped him up with the chains.
"Aye, you did… Thank you for taking care of me, son," Eddard said while moving his limbs, trying to shake off the sleepiness.
"Everything is ready; we just need to leave," I said while moving. "Follow me quickly. I don't want to have to kill everyone here."
My father nodded and quickly followed me. As we went outside of the cells, we encountered more guards, but they couldn't do a thing to defend themselves before dropping dead.
Going over one of the exits, we reached the first snag in my plan. I didn't have a key for this door, and I couldn't go back to search every single body since we were running out of time.
Thinking quickly, I used my new creations and sent them directly to explode at the reinforced door. I marveled at the beautiful green color of the wildfire.
Waiting for it to melt the door so we could pass safely, we ran ahead without stopping, my father following close behind.
Reaching the inn where I had left the two horses, we mounted them and galloped away. We didn't need to fight since every guard in our way dropped dead before they knew something was wrong.
Slowing for my father to catch up, I started a conversation since we were out of danger.
"We need to reunite with the rest, then we'll go directly to Seagard to send some ravens. After that, we'll go directly to the North," I said lightly.
"I tried to avoid this," my father said shamefully, looking at the dead guards at the entrance. "I thought I was doing the right thing."
"You did the right thing, father," I said thoughtfully, patting him before continuing. "But as you can see, the right thing sometimes worsens things."
"Aye, I can see that," he nodded regretfully before looking straight ahead. "We'll need to prepare for war."
"Way ahead of you, father," I laughed. "I'll take care of it. You just need to protect Winterfell in my stead. That's my new order as Lord Stark. Enjoy home with your wife; Jon and I are more than capable of ending this farce," I joked to lighten the mood.
My father chuckled weakly, "You've grown up, Robb. But I'll listen to you… Lord Stark."
"Haha, I've missed you, Father. It will be good to have you at home. Everyone missed you a lot," I smiled.
"It will be good to be back home," he nodded.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Ok im done holy moly that took so long. So, we are already up to date? i think it is called like that, english is not my first language sorry.
As i said in the latest chapter, Ive been trying to post 5 chapters a week, and only do less if some chapters are the lenght of two. but aside from that, ive been somewhat consistent and hope to keep it up.
Enjoy the 16 chapters lol
As i said in the latest chapter, Ive been trying to post 5 chapters a week, and only do less if some chapters are the lenght of two. but aside from that, ive been somewhat consistent and hope to keep it up.
Enjoy the 16 chapters lol
AAAustinYu
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- May 30, 2023
- Messages
- 98
- Likes received
- 1,884
Loved it would like to see more and thank you for the words!
Shaedy Hoe
Thicc Shaedy
- Joined
- Nov 20, 2020
- Messages
- 1,938
- Likes received
- 14,898
Thanks for the update. I really enjoyed every single chapter of it. Rob really is a wonderful character and I cannot to see what he does next. The other characters are just as good and they all feel like real people.
Also, as someone who also mastered English later in life, I have just one thing to say to you, friend: You are doing REALLY well. If I hadn't just read your latest comment, I wouldn't have realised that English isn't your mother tongue, cos that's how well-written your story is. So, don't be too hard on yourself. M'kay?
Also, as someone who also mastered English later in life, I have just one thing to say to you, friend: You are doing REALLY well. If I hadn't just read your latest comment, I wouldn't have realised that English isn't your mother tongue, cos that's how well-written your story is. So, don't be too hard on yourself. M'kay?
Odd1todd89
The Odd one
- Joined
- Jul 27, 2019
- Messages
- 411
- Likes received
- 1,837
Thank you for choosing to write... I have enjoyed reading this story so far keep up the great work...
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Ill work tomorrow in a chapter like that for my advanced chapters, for now, the next two are Jon PoV, then the next ones are for Robb and his Journey back home.
Chapter 43: The Wall (I)
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Author's Note: We'll stay with Jon for another chapter, and then we'll go back to our main character for his travel back to the North. Also what do you guys think? Would you be interested in joining a Discord? Do you guys think I should create one so that communication is easier?
FrostStorm
Jon Snow/Targaryen
Now that I had finished the preparations Robb asked me to take care of, I was ready to continue my journey toward the Wall.
Maybe in another life, I would have joined the Night's Watch out of my own volition, trying to find purpose as a bastard like myself, but now? I couldn't imagine myself any other way. I was a Stark by blood, and my family treated me as such.
I knew I was the most trusted person for Robb, and I would do anything he asked of me without hesitation. He truly loved the North and would do anything in his power to see it prosper. I did too, don't get me wrong, but I was certain he would do a better job of it than I ever could.
He trusted me so much that he told me everything about his plans and visions. Although I didn't believe going to war was the best option with the threat the White Walkers posed, I would follow him wherever was required.
That's why I was away from Winterfell at the moment. My main task was to inform his direct subordinates that the time for hiding was over, and then I needed to head to the Wall to prepare for the threats beyond it.
I missed them all, including Lady Catelyn. After all these years, she had finally accepted me as a Stark and no longer saw me as a threat to her son's reign.
Reviewing the last report Smalljon provided, I nodded in satisfaction. The North would be more than prepared, and we would show the rest of the kingdoms what we were made of.
For now, the North could send over forty thousand troops to the South, and the fifteen to twenty thousand extra would stay behind to protect the kingdom's borders. Under our father's command, they would safeguard the North against any invasion, though I doubted anyone could get past the main army.
With the bulk of our forces stationed at Moat Cailin, Greywater Watch, and the Fingers to fortify those locations and assist the blacksmiths, a small unit would join Robb to decimate the Twins. Once we took control of the castle, we would establish our command there.
I didn't know exactly how the conversation between Lord Mallister and Robb had gone, but I knew my brother well enough to be certain he wouldn't stop until he got what he wanted.
Either way, the North would be ready when Robb returned with Father.
Finishing up the final points in the report, I realized I could continue my travels and leave Smalljon in charge of FrostStorm.
After giving the necessary orders, I was ready to move on.
The Next Day
"Everything you need to know is here, Smalljon," I told him with a nod.
"I'm going to make sure I follow his instructions," Smalljon replied with a nod of his own.
"Is there anything you want me to pass along to your father?" I asked before leaving town.
"No, everything is fine," he shook his head. "Just give him my regards."
I nodded back. "I'm sure he'll pass through here when the bannermen start marching."
Walking toward my horse, I checked my backpack one last time to ensure I was fully prepared for the journey. I was traveling with a group of thirty guards, just in case anything happened.
Satisfied, we began our journey to Last Hearth. My only task there was to inform Lord Umber that everything was ready to begin, so he could contact Lord Karstark and start marching toward Winterfell before heading directly to Moat Cailin.
The Wall
Jon Snow/Targaryen
Everything with the houses was in order. It had been a week since I arrived at the Wall. The meeting at Last Hearth was brief since there wasn't much to do besides letting them know it was time.
For now, I was just resting from the travel. Everything at the Wall was just as Robb had told me, and I was glad I hadn't joined the Watch. It wasn't the great calling I once believed it to be.
Ser Alliser Thorne was an absolute cunt. His words cut deep, but I didn't care about the opinion of that bastard. Besides him, some of the recruits were decent enough. Samwell Tarly was weak and lacked courage, but he had a good heart and a damn quick mind.
I made a mental note to tell Robb about him. Perhaps he could recruit Samwell for his gifts, and maybe he'd be of more use at Winterfell than serving as a training dummy here.
I had already intervened a couple of times to stop the other recruits from making Sam's life hell at the Wall. Ghost had grown a lot in these weeks, so he was a good way to instill the fear of the gods into the criminals.
Ensuring I had my notes ready for my conversation with Lord Commander Mormont, I began walking toward his solar.
I went alone, as the information I carried was for his ears only. Uncle Benjen was on one of his expeditions with his team, but thankfully, he had enough dragonglass for each of his companions.
Knocking on the door, I entered quietly, my eyes narrowing at the sight of those inside.
Ser Alliser Thorne wore his usual sneer, hating that a Stark—even if I was considered a bastard by everyone—was at the Wall with a better position than him.
I nodded respectfully to the commander and the maester, completely ignoring Ser Alliser, which only made him angrier.
"Lord Commander, Maester Aemon. My brother Robb has sent me with grave news. The ramblings of the deserter were true: the White Walkers are real and they walk north of the Wall."
Ser Alliser scoffed loudly. "White Walkers? Stories for children and bored wives, Snow. The only threats we face are the wildlings and our own thinning numbers."
Jeor Mormont eyed him with displeasure. "We will hear the boy out, Ser Alliser. His family has done enough to earn that."
"And why should we? A Stark bastard comes here, not even sworn to the Watch, babbling about wives' tales. You think we have time to indulge his fantasies when real men are dying?" Ser Alliser sneered.
I tried hard to keep my composure despite his words. "I wouldn't have come all the way to the Wall just for tales. The Warden of the North wouldn't have sent me only to waste both our time."
Taking a deep breath, I continued, "Our uncle Benjen has gone on an expedition with the rest of the rangers to find proof. I know I come without evidence since he hasn't returned, but we don't have time to waste. The Night's Watch needs to prepare."
"Prepare for what, boy? Shadows in the snow? Grumkins and Snarks? You've been coddled too much in Winterfell and haven't seen the real world. Perhaps it's time you learn—"
The Lord Commander stood up abruptly, interjecting sharply, "That's enough, Thorne. You're dismissed. Leave us."
Ser Alliser glowered at me but stood up and bowed to the commander before leaving.
"I'll ask you to forgive him. He may come off as blunt, but he's a good man in his own twisted way. Please continue. Tell us everything we need to know," the commander said with a sigh.
The maester spoke for the first time since the conversation started. "Some old stories have some truth in them, though many have forgotten. What have you seen or heard, boy?"
I glanced at him, wondering if what Robb told me was true. Could he really be my great-granduncle?
"It's not just what I've heard, but I can feel it this far north. Can't you sense the unnaturalness of the cold?" I asked them.
The commander shook his head, but I was surprised to see Maester Aemon nod seriously.
"I can feel it. The cold seeps into my old bones, and the feeling of death approaches," said the maester.
The commander nodded in understanding and, with a sigh, continued, "I've heard reports of unnatural cold north of the Wall and of strange deaths. We've sent men to investigate, and some have not returned."
Standing up again, he began pacing in his solar. "I don't want to believe it, but… if what you say is true, we're in for darker days than I feared."
"Indeed. As I said before, Uncle Benjen will return with proof soon enough. He is capable of facing them; he has weapons made specifically against the White Walkers," I said grimly.
"Oh?" the maester asked with interest. "Are they weak against something specific? I remember reading about them, but in my old age, some things escaped me."
"Yes, Maester Aemon. From what Robb has seen in his visions, they are weak against three things: first, Valyrian steel; then fire; and lastly, dragonglass. The last two are the most common since they aren't as rare as Valyrian steel." I nodded at him with a smile, pleased they seemed to believe me.
"Dragonglass is fragile," murmured the maester. "And I don't think we can obtain a good amount easily."
"There are rumors of dragonglass deposits here in the North," interjected the commander.
Gazing at him with alarm, I asked about these rumors.
"I remember reading during my childhood about the island of Skagos. Some texts mentioned dragonglass found on that island," he said thoughtfully.
"That's great news!" I exclaimed. "Robb was prepared to fight a war against Stannis Baratheon for the material in Dragonstone."
The commander looked at me in alarm and I could just rub the back of my neck sheepishly.
"The cost to obtain it would have been too much." The commander answered.
"Indeed, it would have been," sighed the maester.
"Once Benjen returns, we'll know more," the commander said with a nod. "You've done well, Jon, and I will inform the Watch and make sure we are ready for what is coming."
"Thank you, Lord Commander," I replied with a grateful nod.
"Of course. We'll need all the help we can get."
Smiling at them, I nodded and started walking toward the door.
"Oh, before you leave," Maester Aemon interrupted, "please search for me for a small conversation."
"Of course, Maester Aemon," I replied before leaving.
Outside the solar, I leaned against the wall, thankful everything was done and I just needed to speak with the maester before going back to Robb.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
FrostStorm
Jon Snow/Targaryen
Now that I had finished the preparations Robb asked me to take care of, I was ready to continue my journey toward the Wall.
Maybe in another life, I would have joined the Night's Watch out of my own volition, trying to find purpose as a bastard like myself, but now? I couldn't imagine myself any other way. I was a Stark by blood, and my family treated me as such.
I knew I was the most trusted person for Robb, and I would do anything he asked of me without hesitation. He truly loved the North and would do anything in his power to see it prosper. I did too, don't get me wrong, but I was certain he would do a better job of it than I ever could.
He trusted me so much that he told me everything about his plans and visions. Although I didn't believe going to war was the best option with the threat the White Walkers posed, I would follow him wherever was required.
That's why I was away from Winterfell at the moment. My main task was to inform his direct subordinates that the time for hiding was over, and then I needed to head to the Wall to prepare for the threats beyond it.
I missed them all, including Lady Catelyn. After all these years, she had finally accepted me as a Stark and no longer saw me as a threat to her son's reign.
Reviewing the last report Smalljon provided, I nodded in satisfaction. The North would be more than prepared, and we would show the rest of the kingdoms what we were made of.
For now, the North could send over forty thousand troops to the South, and the fifteen to twenty thousand extra would stay behind to protect the kingdom's borders. Under our father's command, they would safeguard the North against any invasion, though I doubted anyone could get past the main army.
With the bulk of our forces stationed at Moat Cailin, Greywater Watch, and the Fingers to fortify those locations and assist the blacksmiths, a small unit would join Robb to decimate the Twins. Once we took control of the castle, we would establish our command there.
I didn't know exactly how the conversation between Lord Mallister and Robb had gone, but I knew my brother well enough to be certain he wouldn't stop until he got what he wanted.
Either way, the North would be ready when Robb returned with Father.
Finishing up the final points in the report, I realized I could continue my travels and leave Smalljon in charge of FrostStorm.
After giving the necessary orders, I was ready to move on.
The Next Day
"Everything you need to know is here, Smalljon," I told him with a nod.
"I'm going to make sure I follow his instructions," Smalljon replied with a nod of his own.
"Is there anything you want me to pass along to your father?" I asked before leaving town.
"No, everything is fine," he shook his head. "Just give him my regards."
I nodded back. "I'm sure he'll pass through here when the bannermen start marching."
Walking toward my horse, I checked my backpack one last time to ensure I was fully prepared for the journey. I was traveling with a group of thirty guards, just in case anything happened.
Satisfied, we began our journey to Last Hearth. My only task there was to inform Lord Umber that everything was ready to begin, so he could contact Lord Karstark and start marching toward Winterfell before heading directly to Moat Cailin.
The Wall
Jon Snow/Targaryen
Everything with the houses was in order. It had been a week since I arrived at the Wall. The meeting at Last Hearth was brief since there wasn't much to do besides letting them know it was time.
For now, I was just resting from the travel. Everything at the Wall was just as Robb had told me, and I was glad I hadn't joined the Watch. It wasn't the great calling I once believed it to be.
Ser Alliser Thorne was an absolute cunt. His words cut deep, but I didn't care about the opinion of that bastard. Besides him, some of the recruits were decent enough. Samwell Tarly was weak and lacked courage, but he had a good heart and a damn quick mind.
I made a mental note to tell Robb about him. Perhaps he could recruit Samwell for his gifts, and maybe he'd be of more use at Winterfell than serving as a training dummy here.
I had already intervened a couple of times to stop the other recruits from making Sam's life hell at the Wall. Ghost had grown a lot in these weeks, so he was a good way to instill the fear of the gods into the criminals.
Ensuring I had my notes ready for my conversation with Lord Commander Mormont, I began walking toward his solar.
I went alone, as the information I carried was for his ears only. Uncle Benjen was on one of his expeditions with his team, but thankfully, he had enough dragonglass for each of his companions.
Knocking on the door, I entered quietly, my eyes narrowing at the sight of those inside.
Ser Alliser Thorne wore his usual sneer, hating that a Stark—even if I was considered a bastard by everyone—was at the Wall with a better position than him.
I nodded respectfully to the commander and the maester, completely ignoring Ser Alliser, which only made him angrier.
"Lord Commander, Maester Aemon. My brother Robb has sent me with grave news. The ramblings of the deserter were true: the White Walkers are real and they walk north of the Wall."
Ser Alliser scoffed loudly. "White Walkers? Stories for children and bored wives, Snow. The only threats we face are the wildlings and our own thinning numbers."
Jeor Mormont eyed him with displeasure. "We will hear the boy out, Ser Alliser. His family has done enough to earn that."
"And why should we? A Stark bastard comes here, not even sworn to the Watch, babbling about wives' tales. You think we have time to indulge his fantasies when real men are dying?" Ser Alliser sneered.
I tried hard to keep my composure despite his words. "I wouldn't have come all the way to the Wall just for tales. The Warden of the North wouldn't have sent me only to waste both our time."
Taking a deep breath, I continued, "Our uncle Benjen has gone on an expedition with the rest of the rangers to find proof. I know I come without evidence since he hasn't returned, but we don't have time to waste. The Night's Watch needs to prepare."
"Prepare for what, boy? Shadows in the snow? Grumkins and Snarks? You've been coddled too much in Winterfell and haven't seen the real world. Perhaps it's time you learn—"
The Lord Commander stood up abruptly, interjecting sharply, "That's enough, Thorne. You're dismissed. Leave us."
Ser Alliser glowered at me but stood up and bowed to the commander before leaving.
"I'll ask you to forgive him. He may come off as blunt, but he's a good man in his own twisted way. Please continue. Tell us everything we need to know," the commander said with a sigh.
The maester spoke for the first time since the conversation started. "Some old stories have some truth in them, though many have forgotten. What have you seen or heard, boy?"
I glanced at him, wondering if what Robb told me was true. Could he really be my great-granduncle?
"It's not just what I've heard, but I can feel it this far north. Can't you sense the unnaturalness of the cold?" I asked them.
The commander shook his head, but I was surprised to see Maester Aemon nod seriously.
"I can feel it. The cold seeps into my old bones, and the feeling of death approaches," said the maester.
The commander nodded in understanding and, with a sigh, continued, "I've heard reports of unnatural cold north of the Wall and of strange deaths. We've sent men to investigate, and some have not returned."
Standing up again, he began pacing in his solar. "I don't want to believe it, but… if what you say is true, we're in for darker days than I feared."
"Indeed. As I said before, Uncle Benjen will return with proof soon enough. He is capable of facing them; he has weapons made specifically against the White Walkers," I said grimly.
"Oh?" the maester asked with interest. "Are they weak against something specific? I remember reading about them, but in my old age, some things escaped me."
"Yes, Maester Aemon. From what Robb has seen in his visions, they are weak against three things: first, Valyrian steel; then fire; and lastly, dragonglass. The last two are the most common since they aren't as rare as Valyrian steel." I nodded at him with a smile, pleased they seemed to believe me.
"Dragonglass is fragile," murmured the maester. "And I don't think we can obtain a good amount easily."
"There are rumors of dragonglass deposits here in the North," interjected the commander.
Gazing at him with alarm, I asked about these rumors.
"I remember reading during my childhood about the island of Skagos. Some texts mentioned dragonglass found on that island," he said thoughtfully.
"That's great news!" I exclaimed. "Robb was prepared to fight a war against Stannis Baratheon for the material in Dragonstone."
The commander looked at me in alarm and I could just rub the back of my neck sheepishly.
"The cost to obtain it would have been too much." The commander answered.
"Indeed, it would have been," sighed the maester.
"Once Benjen returns, we'll know more," the commander said with a nod. "You've done well, Jon, and I will inform the Watch and make sure we are ready for what is coming."
"Thank you, Lord Commander," I replied with a grateful nod.
"Of course. We'll need all the help we can get."
Smiling at them, I nodded and started walking toward the door.
"Oh, before you leave," Maester Aemon interrupted, "please search for me for a small conversation."
"Of course, Maester Aemon," I replied before leaving.
Outside the solar, I leaned against the wall, thankful everything was done and I just needed to speak with the maester before going back to Robb.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 44: The Wall (II)
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Jon Snow
With the stress of the meeting gone, I was just waiting a couple of days to see if Uncle Benjen was successful in his mission. I trusted his capabilities, so I wasn't too worried since he had weapons designed specifically against the White Walkers.
Still, I couldn't deny that I was worried for him. He was family, and he was doing such an important task with little support. He only took the most experienced rangers on his expedition, and all of them were armed with dragonglass weapons, so there was that. Hopefully, he comes back soon since I'll need to leave in the next couple of days. I needed to be present at Moat Cailin when Robb came back.
While waiting, I did some sightseeing, walked through the castle, and checked everything important I could add to my report, from the number of soldiers available to the needs of the Night's Watch. Since Robb started working with them in payment for the land they borrowed from Brandon's Gift and the New Gift, many people joined the Watch voluntarily. Even those who didn't join received better equipment for their trouble.
Most of the members were using good quality swords and light armor, a gift from Robb to gain Commander Mormont's approval, but even that didn't help with the most troublesome person here. Ser Alliser Thorne had a grudge against our family thanks to the rebellion, and I couldn't help but smile at what his face would look like if he knew who he was talking to so disrespectfully. Thankfully, he ignored me when I passed by, just sneering in my direction but keeping silent. He knew he couldn't badmouth me in public since most members of the order were happy with our help and knew that much of what they had now was thanks to the Starks.
They didn't lack food, thanks to all the plantations done in the Gift's territory. They ate well enough, and with the foodstuff they had in excess, they sold it to different houses of the North for extra income. Thanks to that, they were able to cover the cost of the new weapons and armor they had available. Most of the equipment came from FrostStorm, so we didn't lose much because they ended up paying us.
Shaking my head, I marveled at Robb's ability; he could manipulate people, and they ended up being grateful for it. Bored out of my mind, I searched for something interesting while I waited for the sun to go down so I could sleep. Walking down the stairs, I noticed Samwell sitting on a crate reading a book. Shrugging, I went toward him to start a conversation to pass the time.
"How have you been, Samwell?" I smiled at him.
"I've been good, Jon. How about you? Are you done with your business here at the Wall?" he smiled back and asked me.
"Yes, the Commander is already informed of everything I had to say," I answered. "Say, Samwell. Can you tell me why you joined the Watch even if you can't fight?" I asked something that had been on my mind for a while.
He smiled sadly but nodded after a second. "My father sent me here. He told me that I was a disappointment and didn't deserve to be his heir."
"Tarly? Your father is one of the best commanders in the whole realm?" I asked, surprised by this information.
"Yes," he shook his head. "I was never enough for him. He told me that if I didn't join the Watch, I would have an accident where I couldn't disappoint him anymore."
I was appalled by what he said. Not even in the worst years was Lady Catelyn harsh enough to do something like that to me, and I was sure she hated me.
"It seems like he deserves a punch to the face," I nodded. "I'm sure I can do that if I ever meet him."
"Ha!" he laughed. "I would pay to see that."
"And what about you, Samwell? What would you want to be?" I asked him.
He was silent for a minute, clearly thinking of an answer. "I would love to be a maester," he nodded. "I know I have a good head on my shoulders, and I like to think I'd be capable of that. It's a shame that's not a possibility anymore."
"Why not?" I asked him with a smile. "You still haven't taken your oath to the Night's Watch."
"My father would kill me," he shook his head.
"Your father, as good a commander as he is, wouldn't be capable of harming you in the North. Much less if you're under the protection of House Stark," I explained softly.
I didn't know why I was so accommodating to him; I barely knew him. But there was something about Samwell that told me he could help us a lot if he wasn't tied to the Night's Watch and was with us in Winterfell.
"Why don't you follow me after I'm done here?" I asked him. "I'm sure I can convince the Lord Commander that you'd be more useful with us than here."
Samwell went silent but shook his head in fear. "My father would kill me, Jon."
I sighed. "Think about it, Samwell. Robb is searching for different talents, and I'm sure he would be more than happy to take you in." Standing up from the crate we were sitting on, I continued, "I'll stay for a few more days here. If you make your decision, you can come with me to Winterfell to learn under Maester Luwin."
"I'll think about it," he murmured, his head looking toward the floor.
"Remember to be your own man, Samwell. It doesn't matter what your father thinks. And if it matters a lot to you, just prove him wrong—make him regret giving you up," I said, patting his shoulder.
On my way back to my bedroom, I noticed that the library was nearby, so I took a small detour to see if Maester Aemon was there. Entering quietly, I observed the insides of the library. Seeing him sitting alone without doing anything, I approached him.
"Jon, thank you for coming," he said. Apparently, I wasn't silent enough.
"Maester Aemon," I greeted him respectfully. "What did you want to speak about?"
"I just wanted to ask you something important to me, child." He smiled, his milky white eyes looking in my direction. Even though he was blind, I noticed he looked directly where I was standing.
"Ask away, Maester. If it's something I can answer, I'll do so," I said in agreement, curious about where this was going.
"Can you check if we're alone, child?" he asked. "I'm afraid that if I'm right, this cannot be heard by anyone."
While checking around the library, I was almost sure he was somehow able to feel the connection between us. Maybe Robb was right, and royal blood was somehow magical.
"We're alone, Maester. Ask away," I told him softly, taking a seat next to him so that we could talk quietly.
"Are you a Targaryen, Jon?" he asked bluntly, and I tried to suppress a snort. It appeared that all these years in the North had changed a royal southerner.
"It appears Robb was right once again," I laughed. "He told me about you, Maester, and that you may be able to feel it."
"Am I right, child?" the Maester asked, trembling with agitation.
"Yes. You are my great-granduncle, if what Robb said is true," I accepted freely, as Robb had told me to be honest with him since it wouldn't hurt and would give him peace of mind.
The Maester trembled when he heard me and tried to move, but I stopped him with a gentle hand on his shoulder.
"My biological father was Prince Rhaegar, and my mother was Lyanna Stark," I said softly.
"That dumb boy," the Maester sighed. "Do you know the truth of what happened?"
"Yes… My mother ran away from her betrothal to be with him. But somehow, the letter explaining the circumstances never arrived," I said sadly before rage could enter my mind. "If I ever find out who was responsible, I'll make sure they suffer for their sins," I said firmly.
The Maester sighed. "At least he didn't take her away like they say."
"Thank you for being honest with me, Jon." He smiled softly. "I can die happy knowing that our family will thrive in the future."
"You still have some time, Maester," I laughed. "And you're still needed here at the Wall."
Our conversation took a long time, but when I left, I felt a burden lifted off my shoulders.
Three days later
Hearing some commotion so early in the morning was weird, and when the trumpets sounded, I was completely alert. I grabbed my sword and light armor before going to check what was happening. Seeing some of the guards running, I stopped one to ask what was going on.
The only answer I received was that some of the rangers who left on the expedition were getting closer to the Wall.
I felt a knot in my throat and prayed that Uncle Benjen was successful in his endeavor. As I got ready, the first thing I noticed was that he was leading the group. As I sighed with relief, my heart almost stopped. Of the twenty rangers who started the expedition, only four were coming back, and all of them were injured.
"Bring the Maester!" I shouted to Samwell, who was standing nearby doing nothing.
He nodded, hearing the urgency in my voice. As he went searching for the maester, I went back to my room where I had some of the things Robb gave me in case of emergency. Grabbing a bottle of milk of the poppy and some "bandages" Robb invented, I stopped for a moment before crushing some of the insects into a paste that I had in another jar. According to Robb, these insects were specifically made for injuries since the paste killed something called germs or something like that and also numbed the area.
Hopefully, the maester would be able to use this, so I took it all the same. Going back, I noticed that everyone was already in the courtyard, making a circle while they tended to the injured. Approaching them nervously, I sighed in relief seeing that Benjen only had some cuts and wasn't life-threateningly injured.
"Maester Aemon, this could be helpful for the injured," I said as I handed him everything I had in hand. After a brief explanation, the maester started tending to their wounds.
"Uncle Benjen, what happened?" I asked him seriously.
He smiled tiredly, "Your brother was right," he said grimly. "The White Walkers are awake."
"Lies!" shouted someone from the back, and my eyes narrowed, seeing the identity of the person who shouted. Ser Alliser Thorne approached the center, and everyone moved aside, seeing the crazed look in his eyes.
"I'm tired of this!" he continued. "You Starks are trying to sell this tale for your own ends, but this finishes now. I don't want to hear a single word about White Walkers again!"
"Ser Alliser…" a timid voice was heard, and I was surprised the one who spoke was Samwell.
"What do you want, you disgrace?" he sneered.
"Look behind you," Samwell pointed to something near the entrance.
"Bah," Ser Thorne scoffed. "Go back to sleep if you have nothing useful to say."
"Ser Thorne," the Lord Commander said grimly, "Look inside the cage."
Surprised, I also looked that way since in my concerned state I had ignored everything until I was sure Uncle Benjen was alright. I gasped, seeing what was inside the cage, and dread set in my stomach. Inside, a body, clearly dead, was moving, and I could faintly hear some screeches when I focused.
"We need to prepare!" Commander Mormont shouted. "We are the Night's Watch, and we must protect the Wall from outside threats. We'll have a meeting after lunch."
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
With the stress of the meeting gone, I was just waiting a couple of days to see if Uncle Benjen was successful in his mission. I trusted his capabilities, so I wasn't too worried since he had weapons designed specifically against the White Walkers.
Still, I couldn't deny that I was worried for him. He was family, and he was doing such an important task with little support. He only took the most experienced rangers on his expedition, and all of them were armed with dragonglass weapons, so there was that. Hopefully, he comes back soon since I'll need to leave in the next couple of days. I needed to be present at Moat Cailin when Robb came back.
While waiting, I did some sightseeing, walked through the castle, and checked everything important I could add to my report, from the number of soldiers available to the needs of the Night's Watch. Since Robb started working with them in payment for the land they borrowed from Brandon's Gift and the New Gift, many people joined the Watch voluntarily. Even those who didn't join received better equipment for their trouble.
Most of the members were using good quality swords and light armor, a gift from Robb to gain Commander Mormont's approval, but even that didn't help with the most troublesome person here. Ser Alliser Thorne had a grudge against our family thanks to the rebellion, and I couldn't help but smile at what his face would look like if he knew who he was talking to so disrespectfully. Thankfully, he ignored me when I passed by, just sneering in my direction but keeping silent. He knew he couldn't badmouth me in public since most members of the order were happy with our help and knew that much of what they had now was thanks to the Starks.
They didn't lack food, thanks to all the plantations done in the Gift's territory. They ate well enough, and with the foodstuff they had in excess, they sold it to different houses of the North for extra income. Thanks to that, they were able to cover the cost of the new weapons and armor they had available. Most of the equipment came from FrostStorm, so we didn't lose much because they ended up paying us.
Shaking my head, I marveled at Robb's ability; he could manipulate people, and they ended up being grateful for it. Bored out of my mind, I searched for something interesting while I waited for the sun to go down so I could sleep. Walking down the stairs, I noticed Samwell sitting on a crate reading a book. Shrugging, I went toward him to start a conversation to pass the time.
"How have you been, Samwell?" I smiled at him.
"I've been good, Jon. How about you? Are you done with your business here at the Wall?" he smiled back and asked me.
"Yes, the Commander is already informed of everything I had to say," I answered. "Say, Samwell. Can you tell me why you joined the Watch even if you can't fight?" I asked something that had been on my mind for a while.
He smiled sadly but nodded after a second. "My father sent me here. He told me that I was a disappointment and didn't deserve to be his heir."
"Tarly? Your father is one of the best commanders in the whole realm?" I asked, surprised by this information.
"Yes," he shook his head. "I was never enough for him. He told me that if I didn't join the Watch, I would have an accident where I couldn't disappoint him anymore."
I was appalled by what he said. Not even in the worst years was Lady Catelyn harsh enough to do something like that to me, and I was sure she hated me.
"It seems like he deserves a punch to the face," I nodded. "I'm sure I can do that if I ever meet him."
"Ha!" he laughed. "I would pay to see that."
"And what about you, Samwell? What would you want to be?" I asked him.
He was silent for a minute, clearly thinking of an answer. "I would love to be a maester," he nodded. "I know I have a good head on my shoulders, and I like to think I'd be capable of that. It's a shame that's not a possibility anymore."
"Why not?" I asked him with a smile. "You still haven't taken your oath to the Night's Watch."
"My father would kill me," he shook his head.
"Your father, as good a commander as he is, wouldn't be capable of harming you in the North. Much less if you're under the protection of House Stark," I explained softly.
I didn't know why I was so accommodating to him; I barely knew him. But there was something about Samwell that told me he could help us a lot if he wasn't tied to the Night's Watch and was with us in Winterfell.
"Why don't you follow me after I'm done here?" I asked him. "I'm sure I can convince the Lord Commander that you'd be more useful with us than here."
Samwell went silent but shook his head in fear. "My father would kill me, Jon."
I sighed. "Think about it, Samwell. Robb is searching for different talents, and I'm sure he would be more than happy to take you in." Standing up from the crate we were sitting on, I continued, "I'll stay for a few more days here. If you make your decision, you can come with me to Winterfell to learn under Maester Luwin."
"I'll think about it," he murmured, his head looking toward the floor.
"Remember to be your own man, Samwell. It doesn't matter what your father thinks. And if it matters a lot to you, just prove him wrong—make him regret giving you up," I said, patting his shoulder.
On my way back to my bedroom, I noticed that the library was nearby, so I took a small detour to see if Maester Aemon was there. Entering quietly, I observed the insides of the library. Seeing him sitting alone without doing anything, I approached him.
"Jon, thank you for coming," he said. Apparently, I wasn't silent enough.
"Maester Aemon," I greeted him respectfully. "What did you want to speak about?"
"I just wanted to ask you something important to me, child." He smiled, his milky white eyes looking in my direction. Even though he was blind, I noticed he looked directly where I was standing.
"Ask away, Maester. If it's something I can answer, I'll do so," I said in agreement, curious about where this was going.
"Can you check if we're alone, child?" he asked. "I'm afraid that if I'm right, this cannot be heard by anyone."
While checking around the library, I was almost sure he was somehow able to feel the connection between us. Maybe Robb was right, and royal blood was somehow magical.
"We're alone, Maester. Ask away," I told him softly, taking a seat next to him so that we could talk quietly.
"Are you a Targaryen, Jon?" he asked bluntly, and I tried to suppress a snort. It appeared that all these years in the North had changed a royal southerner.
"It appears Robb was right once again," I laughed. "He told me about you, Maester, and that you may be able to feel it."
"Am I right, child?" the Maester asked, trembling with agitation.
"Yes. You are my great-granduncle, if what Robb said is true," I accepted freely, as Robb had told me to be honest with him since it wouldn't hurt and would give him peace of mind.
The Maester trembled when he heard me and tried to move, but I stopped him with a gentle hand on his shoulder.
"My biological father was Prince Rhaegar, and my mother was Lyanna Stark," I said softly.
"That dumb boy," the Maester sighed. "Do you know the truth of what happened?"
"Yes… My mother ran away from her betrothal to be with him. But somehow, the letter explaining the circumstances never arrived," I said sadly before rage could enter my mind. "If I ever find out who was responsible, I'll make sure they suffer for their sins," I said firmly.
The Maester sighed. "At least he didn't take her away like they say."
"Thank you for being honest with me, Jon." He smiled softly. "I can die happy knowing that our family will thrive in the future."
"You still have some time, Maester," I laughed. "And you're still needed here at the Wall."
Our conversation took a long time, but when I left, I felt a burden lifted off my shoulders.
Three days later
Hearing some commotion so early in the morning was weird, and when the trumpets sounded, I was completely alert. I grabbed my sword and light armor before going to check what was happening. Seeing some of the guards running, I stopped one to ask what was going on.
The only answer I received was that some of the rangers who left on the expedition were getting closer to the Wall.
I felt a knot in my throat and prayed that Uncle Benjen was successful in his endeavor. As I got ready, the first thing I noticed was that he was leading the group. As I sighed with relief, my heart almost stopped. Of the twenty rangers who started the expedition, only four were coming back, and all of them were injured.
"Bring the Maester!" I shouted to Samwell, who was standing nearby doing nothing.
He nodded, hearing the urgency in my voice. As he went searching for the maester, I went back to my room where I had some of the things Robb gave me in case of emergency. Grabbing a bottle of milk of the poppy and some "bandages" Robb invented, I stopped for a moment before crushing some of the insects into a paste that I had in another jar. According to Robb, these insects were specifically made for injuries since the paste killed something called germs or something like that and also numbed the area.
Hopefully, the maester would be able to use this, so I took it all the same. Going back, I noticed that everyone was already in the courtyard, making a circle while they tended to the injured. Approaching them nervously, I sighed in relief seeing that Benjen only had some cuts and wasn't life-threateningly injured.
"Maester Aemon, this could be helpful for the injured," I said as I handed him everything I had in hand. After a brief explanation, the maester started tending to their wounds.
"Uncle Benjen, what happened?" I asked him seriously.
He smiled tiredly, "Your brother was right," he said grimly. "The White Walkers are awake."
"Lies!" shouted someone from the back, and my eyes narrowed, seeing the identity of the person who shouted. Ser Alliser Thorne approached the center, and everyone moved aside, seeing the crazed look in his eyes.
"I'm tired of this!" he continued. "You Starks are trying to sell this tale for your own ends, but this finishes now. I don't want to hear a single word about White Walkers again!"
"Ser Alliser…" a timid voice was heard, and I was surprised the one who spoke was Samwell.
"What do you want, you disgrace?" he sneered.
"Look behind you," Samwell pointed to something near the entrance.
"Bah," Ser Thorne scoffed. "Go back to sleep if you have nothing useful to say."
"Ser Thorne," the Lord Commander said grimly, "Look inside the cage."
Surprised, I also looked that way since in my concerned state I had ignored everything until I was sure Uncle Benjen was alright. I gasped, seeing what was inside the cage, and dread set in my stomach. Inside, a body, clearly dead, was moving, and I could faintly hear some screeches when I focused.
"We need to prepare!" Commander Mormont shouted. "We are the Night's Watch, and we must protect the Wall from outside threats. We'll have a meeting after lunch."
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 45: The Journey Back (I)
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Kingswood
Robb Stark
Looking at my father greeting every guard and them apologizing for leaving him alone, I approached the group.
"It was my idea, Father. I knew that they wouldn't dare to harm you since they would have a valuable hostage, but there was no way our men could have survived if they accompanied you to the throne room," I said guiltily, though I knew I made the right choice.
With the gold cloaks following Baelish's orders, our men would have been butchered, so it was the right call to extract them before everything started.
"I understand, Robb," Ned nodded. "I am glad everyone is okay and didn't die because of my mistakes."
The guards kept apologizing until Father berated them for doing too much, and while they were discussing, I addressed the last person in our group.
Lady Elyse was mostly silent, clearly out of her depth, but she tried to keep calm while listening to the conversation. As I approached her, she lifted her head to meet my eyes, and at that moment, I realized how much time had passed since I last saw her. During her visit to Winterfell, I still had to look up at her whenever we spoke, but now I was taller than her.
"Lady Elyse, thank you for following my men without much fuss," I smiled at her, hoping that seeing a familiar face would help her calm down. With my expanded senses, I could see her preparation and that her breathing was somewhat shallow.
"It's been too long, Lord Robb," she smiled dimly. "And if a tenth of what you wrote in that message is true, I'll have to thank you for taking me out of there. I can't imagine what kind of war will be fought for the throne now that the Lannisters are in charge."
"Bah, keep calling me Robb. My new position doesn't erase our friendship." Then, I sighed guiltily, "It's going to be at least ten times worse than what you're imagining, Lady Elyse."
She smiled brightly at that before it dimmed. "Tyrion is going to be in danger," she murmured. "Do you know if he knew about everything, Robb?"
I put a calming hand on her shoulder. "He will be alright. I sent him to Astapor where he will work for me until it is safe for him to come back."
She slumped her shoulders in relief when she heard that, but her face hardened afterward. "Did he know?"
I looked at her seriously. "He couldn't have told you; it would have put you in danger," I said softly. "He was the one who asked me to take care of you, not that I wouldn't have done that, mind you, but that means he had your protection in mind before his travels," I smiled somewhat teasingly.
"He is a good friend of mine, Robb." She smiled prettily. "It's a shame he has to leave so far away."
"It is for the best, Lady Elyse," I nodded. "Now it's time we start our journey… we are really far from home."
"What will happen to me?" she asked, tilting her head.
"You have an offer for the same job you've done here in the capital waiting for you in Winterfell if you'd like," I offered with a bright smile. "I wouldn't suggest you stay in the Vale; things are not as simple as they seem, and you would be safer in the North with my family."
She thought for a moment before nodding firmly. "Thank you, Robb. For everything."
Nodding back, I walked toward my father, who was resting near a campfire Jory and the rest had created.
"Everyone, we need to start moving fast," I said loudly. "We are in enemy territory, and we left a bloodbath in the Red Keep while escaping with my father. They will send people looking for us."
Everyone nodded firmly and started moving to our horses. We were in the Kingswood, so at least we would be difficult to spot, but when we start traveling to Winterfell, we'll face a lot of enemies.
"We'll ride to Tumbleton, then we'll have to cross the Blackwater Rush to enter the Riverlands. We'll only stop when it's necessary, but if everyone can ride, we'll do so," I said firmly, hoping that we had time to make a stop at the Isle of Faces.
Two weeks later.
The Riverlands
We were finally approaching Ivy's Inn. The journey was short, but it took a toll on everyone. I didn't feel it affected me that much because I'd been doing this for a while, but for the rest of the group, it was tiresome. We traveled near the riverbank since I tried to keep a distance from the King's Road to avoid being seen.
From the smallfolk we encountered during our travels, we learned that there was already a manhunt for everyone with me, except for Lady Elyse and me, of course. Lords, smallfolk, sellswords—everyone was looking for us, trying to earn the gold the Lannisters promised as a reward for any information regarding my father and the guards' whereabouts.
Thankfully, since my dyed hair still holds up under scrutiny, I was able to approach some merchants to buy different attires for everyone, including cowls to hide their faces. Most of the guards were burning up inside since they were men of the North, and the extra cloth and heat were getting to them.
I had seen, thanks to my power, a lot of people searching everywhere. There was a lot of activity on the main road to the North. And it was a shame since it meant we couldn't use it as it would attract attention to us.
Thankfully, we didn't lack food, even if the only thing we ate for every meal during these weeks was meat from the game I obtained. The other good news is that thanks to the enhancement I obtained from consuming royal blood, I was able to leave commands to everything I had under my control, so at least I could sleep while knowing we were protected.
"We need to make a stop," I said with a small smile. I always tried to keep a smile on my face to show that everything was alright. Father was already depressed enough for starting this war, as I heard from some of the smallfolk that the queen sent the Mountain to sow chaos in the Kingsroad.
He wasn't sent before since we didn't take Tyrion as a hostage, so that was delayed, but it seemed that the Queen thought it was a good idea to move scrutiny elsewhere while she took control of the capital.
There was no news of a direct destination, so I didn't know if he would do the same thing as in canon to make problems in the Riverlands or if he was traveling directly to the North. But this decision was costly for Cersei since the different lords were pissed that he was making a mess of things in their territory.
I hadn't heard anything about the Reach or Stannis, but I was sure that the fight would start soon. Father did tell me that he sent a raven to Stannis, and I was present (with my bugs) when he had his conversation with Renly, so they would start moving soon.
"Where do we need to stop, Robb?" asked Ned with a questioning frown.
"The Isle of Faces," I said grimly. "I need to find out something that has been bothering me."
"Is it truly important, son?" he asked, somewhat confused if it was a truly necessary stop.
"It won't take long," I nodded. "I felt something inside me when I passed, and I don't ignore those kinds of feelings."
Ned nodded in understanding. "Aye, you must follow your instincts."
With everyone in on the plan, we ignored the main road and started picking up speed to arrive faster.
It was true, when I passed near God's Eye on my way to King's Landing, I felt like something was calling to me, and I ignored it since I was short on time. But now that I had some time, I needed to seek whatever was calling me, and I knew it wasn't my imagination since somehow, for the first time in my life, my power failed.
I panicked a little bit since this had never happened before, but my insects couldn't enter the perimeter of the Isle, and this made me doubt if this was the best idea, after a moment of reflection, I nodded to myself and continued galloping to the village on the outskirts of the lake.
When we arrived some hours later, we noticed that everyone here was a firm believer in the Old Gods, and they were happy enough to lend two boats so that we could go to the Isle when we acted like newly converted tourists.
As we were approaching the island, I was getting nervous. Somehow, I couldn't see anyone besides our group, and as we disembarked the boats and made camp, I somehow lost control of every being in the vicinity. I could feel they were there, but I couldn't command them as I normally could.
"We have been waiting for you, outsider," a chorus of raspy and creepy voices was heard, and I could feel the hairs on the back of my neck stand in alarm.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Robb Stark
Looking at my father greeting every guard and them apologizing for leaving him alone, I approached the group.
"It was my idea, Father. I knew that they wouldn't dare to harm you since they would have a valuable hostage, but there was no way our men could have survived if they accompanied you to the throne room," I said guiltily, though I knew I made the right choice.
With the gold cloaks following Baelish's orders, our men would have been butchered, so it was the right call to extract them before everything started.
"I understand, Robb," Ned nodded. "I am glad everyone is okay and didn't die because of my mistakes."
The guards kept apologizing until Father berated them for doing too much, and while they were discussing, I addressed the last person in our group.
Lady Elyse was mostly silent, clearly out of her depth, but she tried to keep calm while listening to the conversation. As I approached her, she lifted her head to meet my eyes, and at that moment, I realized how much time had passed since I last saw her. During her visit to Winterfell, I still had to look up at her whenever we spoke, but now I was taller than her.
"Lady Elyse, thank you for following my men without much fuss," I smiled at her, hoping that seeing a familiar face would help her calm down. With my expanded senses, I could see her preparation and that her breathing was somewhat shallow.
"It's been too long, Lord Robb," she smiled dimly. "And if a tenth of what you wrote in that message is true, I'll have to thank you for taking me out of there. I can't imagine what kind of war will be fought for the throne now that the Lannisters are in charge."
"Bah, keep calling me Robb. My new position doesn't erase our friendship." Then, I sighed guiltily, "It's going to be at least ten times worse than what you're imagining, Lady Elyse."
She smiled brightly at that before it dimmed. "Tyrion is going to be in danger," she murmured. "Do you know if he knew about everything, Robb?"
I put a calming hand on her shoulder. "He will be alright. I sent him to Astapor where he will work for me until it is safe for him to come back."
She slumped her shoulders in relief when she heard that, but her face hardened afterward. "Did he know?"
I looked at her seriously. "He couldn't have told you; it would have put you in danger," I said softly. "He was the one who asked me to take care of you, not that I wouldn't have done that, mind you, but that means he had your protection in mind before his travels," I smiled somewhat teasingly.
"He is a good friend of mine, Robb." She smiled prettily. "It's a shame he has to leave so far away."
"It is for the best, Lady Elyse," I nodded. "Now it's time we start our journey… we are really far from home."
"What will happen to me?" she asked, tilting her head.
"You have an offer for the same job you've done here in the capital waiting for you in Winterfell if you'd like," I offered with a bright smile. "I wouldn't suggest you stay in the Vale; things are not as simple as they seem, and you would be safer in the North with my family."
She thought for a moment before nodding firmly. "Thank you, Robb. For everything."
Nodding back, I walked toward my father, who was resting near a campfire Jory and the rest had created.
"Everyone, we need to start moving fast," I said loudly. "We are in enemy territory, and we left a bloodbath in the Red Keep while escaping with my father. They will send people looking for us."
Everyone nodded firmly and started moving to our horses. We were in the Kingswood, so at least we would be difficult to spot, but when we start traveling to Winterfell, we'll face a lot of enemies.
"We'll ride to Tumbleton, then we'll have to cross the Blackwater Rush to enter the Riverlands. We'll only stop when it's necessary, but if everyone can ride, we'll do so," I said firmly, hoping that we had time to make a stop at the Isle of Faces.
Two weeks later.
The Riverlands
We were finally approaching Ivy's Inn. The journey was short, but it took a toll on everyone. I didn't feel it affected me that much because I'd been doing this for a while, but for the rest of the group, it was tiresome. We traveled near the riverbank since I tried to keep a distance from the King's Road to avoid being seen.
From the smallfolk we encountered during our travels, we learned that there was already a manhunt for everyone with me, except for Lady Elyse and me, of course. Lords, smallfolk, sellswords—everyone was looking for us, trying to earn the gold the Lannisters promised as a reward for any information regarding my father and the guards' whereabouts.
Thankfully, since my dyed hair still holds up under scrutiny, I was able to approach some merchants to buy different attires for everyone, including cowls to hide their faces. Most of the guards were burning up inside since they were men of the North, and the extra cloth and heat were getting to them.
I had seen, thanks to my power, a lot of people searching everywhere. There was a lot of activity on the main road to the North. And it was a shame since it meant we couldn't use it as it would attract attention to us.
Thankfully, we didn't lack food, even if the only thing we ate for every meal during these weeks was meat from the game I obtained. The other good news is that thanks to the enhancement I obtained from consuming royal blood, I was able to leave commands to everything I had under my control, so at least I could sleep while knowing we were protected.
"We need to make a stop," I said with a small smile. I always tried to keep a smile on my face to show that everything was alright. Father was already depressed enough for starting this war, as I heard from some of the smallfolk that the queen sent the Mountain to sow chaos in the Kingsroad.
He wasn't sent before since we didn't take Tyrion as a hostage, so that was delayed, but it seemed that the Queen thought it was a good idea to move scrutiny elsewhere while she took control of the capital.
There was no news of a direct destination, so I didn't know if he would do the same thing as in canon to make problems in the Riverlands or if he was traveling directly to the North. But this decision was costly for Cersei since the different lords were pissed that he was making a mess of things in their territory.
I hadn't heard anything about the Reach or Stannis, but I was sure that the fight would start soon. Father did tell me that he sent a raven to Stannis, and I was present (with my bugs) when he had his conversation with Renly, so they would start moving soon.
"Where do we need to stop, Robb?" asked Ned with a questioning frown.
"The Isle of Faces," I said grimly. "I need to find out something that has been bothering me."
"Is it truly important, son?" he asked, somewhat confused if it was a truly necessary stop.
"It won't take long," I nodded. "I felt something inside me when I passed, and I don't ignore those kinds of feelings."
Ned nodded in understanding. "Aye, you must follow your instincts."
With everyone in on the plan, we ignored the main road and started picking up speed to arrive faster.
It was true, when I passed near God's Eye on my way to King's Landing, I felt like something was calling to me, and I ignored it since I was short on time. But now that I had some time, I needed to seek whatever was calling me, and I knew it wasn't my imagination since somehow, for the first time in my life, my power failed.
I panicked a little bit since this had never happened before, but my insects couldn't enter the perimeter of the Isle, and this made me doubt if this was the best idea, after a moment of reflection, I nodded to myself and continued galloping to the village on the outskirts of the lake.
When we arrived some hours later, we noticed that everyone here was a firm believer in the Old Gods, and they were happy enough to lend two boats so that we could go to the Isle when we acted like newly converted tourists.
As we were approaching the island, I was getting nervous. Somehow, I couldn't see anyone besides our group, and as we disembarked the boats and made camp, I somehow lost control of every being in the vicinity. I could feel they were there, but I couldn't command them as I normally could.
"We have been waiting for you, outsider," a chorus of raspy and creepy voices was heard, and I could feel the hairs on the back of my neck stand in alarm.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 46: The Journey Home (II)
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
Robb Stark
The isle of faces.
"We've been waiting for you, outsider." A cacophony of raspy voices echoed around us, making the hairs on my neck stand up.
I knew I wasn't the only one who felt it; even Lady Elyse gasped loudly and started looking around, while the guards and my father reached for their weapons.
I panicked and tried to call all of my bugs to me. I had read the legends of the so-called Green Men, and how they defended the Isle of Faces against the Andals during the invasion, without any support.
"Stop doing that, outsider," the voices echoed again, now closer than before. "The golden monstrosity has no power in these sacred grounds."
Fuck… They knew something about Scion, and from what I knew, anyone would be both pissed and scared at the idea of him gaining a foothold in any world.
"Who are you people? Identify yourselves!" Father shouted into the woods as he drew his sword, and Jory and the rest of the guards followed his lead. Elyse stepped behind us, ready to avoid interference if a fight broke out.
I hoped it wouldn't come to that. I felt uncomfortable without my powers; even though I wasn't powerless without them, I couldn't deny that my efficiency would drop significantly.
I was trained by the best the North had to offer, and I didn't use my power in every training session since I knew I couldn't depend on them for everything. But I was only fifteen name-days old and hadn't yet peaked in my combat ability. Right now, I would place myself at the same level as Ser Oakheart when he visited Winterfell with the delegation a couple of years ago.
I wasn't the best, but I knew I was damn good compared to my peers, probably the best fifteen-year-old there ever was in the whole history of Westeros. I'd been using my insects as a source of protein and injecting myself with things that could help my growth as a fighter.
I couldn't be considered a normal human. After a long time of testing on captured bandits and the like, I was able to figure out how I could enhance myself and become a better person. However, I also couldn't call myself superhuman, since the enhancements didn't make me capable of lifting tons of weight or anything like that.
But after years of injecting myself with muscle-strengthening enzymes from ants and beetles, I had achieved fantastic results. My strength now could be compared to that of a grown man, and I still had time to keep growing. I didn't know when I would start seeing diminishing returns, but I intended to use the time I had to keep improving.
Besides muscle enhancement, I used neuro-enhancing compounds from dragonflies to improve my reaction time and cognitive functions. It wasn't like some animes in my previous life where people had skills like thought acceleration, but I was leaps and bounds better than most people.
So that's why, even though I was worried—mostly because I was sure these Green Men had some kind of magic—I hoped things could be resolved peacefully.
"You know who we are, Eddard Stark." The voices spoke again, and it sounded like they were right next to us, even though we couldn't see them. "We are the Green Men, servants of the Old Gods and protectors of this isle."
After a moment of tense silence, we finally saw some silhouettes in the distance. The beings had a somewhat humanoid form, with some notable differences.
First, they were smaller than a normal person, but I could tell at a glance that they weren't the Children of the Forest; they weren't small enough. Besides their height, I noticed that they had strange protrusions coming from their heads, akin to horns.
"What do you know of the golden monstrosity?" I asked, trying to maintain a calm façade, even though I was truly out of my depth for the first time in this life.
"Not enough, outsider. The Old Gods have been busy cloaking your presence from everyone outside of Westeros," they admitted, and my heart skipped a beat. This was really bad news. If I was a beacon that could show him the way to Planetos, it would only mean trouble—worse than I could imagine.
"Do you really know what they are doing?" I asked as I watched them approach us at a calm pace. I could finally see them somewhat clearly.
Their skin was like the bark of a tree, and they were unusually thin. The only thing "human" about them was their silhouettes.
"We are their servants, and when required, their messengers, outsider," the one in the lead said. Even though I saw him speak, we all heard multiple voices saying the same thing.
"Do you know what they're talking about, son?" Father asked, but I didn't even look at him, keeping my focus firmly on the beings in front of me.
"What can we do to avoid his notice?" I asked, hoping against all common sense that they might have an answer.
"We don't know much, as the Old Gods have been busy since you approached the weirwood tree in Winterfell. But from what we know, the parasite inside you cannot be allowed to leave your body," the leader said firmly. "And the gods require something as payment, outsider."
I tensed but tried to relax a little. I didn't know much about the so-called Old Gods since they weren't shown in the series, and most of what I'd read was from Fanon.
"What is your name?" I asked seriously. "And call me Robb, please."
"You may call me Sylvyrn, Robb Stark," he nodded with an impassive face.
I made a noise of agreement in the back of my throat. "What do they require of me?" I asked. To be honest, I would do whatever they asked. The White Walkers and whatever other problems there were in Planetos were nothing compared to the level of carnage that would occur if Scion managed to visit this world or if people started triggering left and right.
I needed to do anything in my power to avoid such a fate, and for that reason, I would trust these people until I had proof that they were lying.
"The Old Gods have grown weak since the Andal invasion severed their connection to these lands. They require you, Robb Stark, to become their champion and help them plant their roots so they can grow more powerful and shield our planet from any invasion," Sylvyrn said firmly, his voice grave as he conveyed the seriousness of the situation.
I nodded slowly. That was doable, and even if it wasn't on my mind when I planned to become a king, it was something that could be done. It would mean the war would be even harder since I would need to challenge the most well-known religion, or at least make it possible for them to coexist.
"What about the Seven?" I asked, trying to fish for more information that could be helpful.
"They care not for the Seven. It isn't required for you to drive them out of these lands. You just need to plant enough weirwood trees and promote the religion," Sylvyrn nodded emphatically, clearly understanding my confusion. "They are outsiders, but the Old Gods are gods of nature, and they have adapted to their existence. The golden being is not so benign as the Seven."
"I understand, and I will make it happen," I said firmly, knowing we needed to avoid this at all costs. "Is there anything else, Sylvyrn?" I asked.
"You just need to seal the pact, Robb Stark. Just like your ancestors did in the past on this isle," he said mysteriously.
"Are you sure about this, Robb?" my father asked. I nodded—this was something I needed to do. I couldn't be the one responsible for the ruin it would bring to Planetos if Scion targeted us.
"Lead the way, Sylvyrn," I said as I started walking toward them.
The others tried to follow, but the leaves began moving on their own, closing the path.
"Camp here, I'll be fine!" I shouted, hoping they could hear me over the noise.
Following behind them, I kept silent, contemplating how this decision would change the future. I truly hoped I was making the right choice.
The group led me to a tree in the middle of the isle, and I noticed the difference in the atmosphere; the air felt heavy compared to outside.
Sylvyrn handed me an empty bowl without saying anything, and I just looked at him in wonder as a knife rose from the very earth in front of me.
"Put some blood in the bowl," he instructed, and nervously, I followed his directions.
When I had enough blood, another of the Green Men approached me, spreading a green paste on my wound. I gasped at the itchiness I felt instantly, and then he removed it with a cloth, and I was amazed to find the injury gone.
"Submerge your hand in the blood and place it on the face of the tree," Sylvyrn continued calmly.
As I did so, I couldn't deny that I was afraid of what was going to happen, but the next thing I knew was darkness.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
The isle of faces.
"We've been waiting for you, outsider." A cacophony of raspy voices echoed around us, making the hairs on my neck stand up.
I knew I wasn't the only one who felt it; even Lady Elyse gasped loudly and started looking around, while the guards and my father reached for their weapons.
I panicked and tried to call all of my bugs to me. I had read the legends of the so-called Green Men, and how they defended the Isle of Faces against the Andals during the invasion, without any support.
"Stop doing that, outsider," the voices echoed again, now closer than before. "The golden monstrosity has no power in these sacred grounds."
Fuck… They knew something about Scion, and from what I knew, anyone would be both pissed and scared at the idea of him gaining a foothold in any world.
"Who are you people? Identify yourselves!" Father shouted into the woods as he drew his sword, and Jory and the rest of the guards followed his lead. Elyse stepped behind us, ready to avoid interference if a fight broke out.
I hoped it wouldn't come to that. I felt uncomfortable without my powers; even though I wasn't powerless without them, I couldn't deny that my efficiency would drop significantly.
I was trained by the best the North had to offer, and I didn't use my power in every training session since I knew I couldn't depend on them for everything. But I was only fifteen name-days old and hadn't yet peaked in my combat ability. Right now, I would place myself at the same level as Ser Oakheart when he visited Winterfell with the delegation a couple of years ago.
I wasn't the best, but I knew I was damn good compared to my peers, probably the best fifteen-year-old there ever was in the whole history of Westeros. I'd been using my insects as a source of protein and injecting myself with things that could help my growth as a fighter.
I couldn't be considered a normal human. After a long time of testing on captured bandits and the like, I was able to figure out how I could enhance myself and become a better person. However, I also couldn't call myself superhuman, since the enhancements didn't make me capable of lifting tons of weight or anything like that.
But after years of injecting myself with muscle-strengthening enzymes from ants and beetles, I had achieved fantastic results. My strength now could be compared to that of a grown man, and I still had time to keep growing. I didn't know when I would start seeing diminishing returns, but I intended to use the time I had to keep improving.
Besides muscle enhancement, I used neuro-enhancing compounds from dragonflies to improve my reaction time and cognitive functions. It wasn't like some animes in my previous life where people had skills like thought acceleration, but I was leaps and bounds better than most people.
So that's why, even though I was worried—mostly because I was sure these Green Men had some kind of magic—I hoped things could be resolved peacefully.
"You know who we are, Eddard Stark." The voices spoke again, and it sounded like they were right next to us, even though we couldn't see them. "We are the Green Men, servants of the Old Gods and protectors of this isle."
After a moment of tense silence, we finally saw some silhouettes in the distance. The beings had a somewhat humanoid form, with some notable differences.
First, they were smaller than a normal person, but I could tell at a glance that they weren't the Children of the Forest; they weren't small enough. Besides their height, I noticed that they had strange protrusions coming from their heads, akin to horns.
"What do you know of the golden monstrosity?" I asked, trying to maintain a calm façade, even though I was truly out of my depth for the first time in this life.
"Not enough, outsider. The Old Gods have been busy cloaking your presence from everyone outside of Westeros," they admitted, and my heart skipped a beat. This was really bad news. If I was a beacon that could show him the way to Planetos, it would only mean trouble—worse than I could imagine.
"Do you really know what they are doing?" I asked as I watched them approach us at a calm pace. I could finally see them somewhat clearly.
Their skin was like the bark of a tree, and they were unusually thin. The only thing "human" about them was their silhouettes.
"We are their servants, and when required, their messengers, outsider," the one in the lead said. Even though I saw him speak, we all heard multiple voices saying the same thing.
"Do you know what they're talking about, son?" Father asked, but I didn't even look at him, keeping my focus firmly on the beings in front of me.
"What can we do to avoid his notice?" I asked, hoping against all common sense that they might have an answer.
"We don't know much, as the Old Gods have been busy since you approached the weirwood tree in Winterfell. But from what we know, the parasite inside you cannot be allowed to leave your body," the leader said firmly. "And the gods require something as payment, outsider."
I tensed but tried to relax a little. I didn't know much about the so-called Old Gods since they weren't shown in the series, and most of what I'd read was from Fanon.
"What is your name?" I asked seriously. "And call me Robb, please."
"You may call me Sylvyrn, Robb Stark," he nodded with an impassive face.
I made a noise of agreement in the back of my throat. "What do they require of me?" I asked. To be honest, I would do whatever they asked. The White Walkers and whatever other problems there were in Planetos were nothing compared to the level of carnage that would occur if Scion managed to visit this world or if people started triggering left and right.
I needed to do anything in my power to avoid such a fate, and for that reason, I would trust these people until I had proof that they were lying.
"The Old Gods have grown weak since the Andal invasion severed their connection to these lands. They require you, Robb Stark, to become their champion and help them plant their roots so they can grow more powerful and shield our planet from any invasion," Sylvyrn said firmly, his voice grave as he conveyed the seriousness of the situation.
I nodded slowly. That was doable, and even if it wasn't on my mind when I planned to become a king, it was something that could be done. It would mean the war would be even harder since I would need to challenge the most well-known religion, or at least make it possible for them to coexist.
"What about the Seven?" I asked, trying to fish for more information that could be helpful.
"They care not for the Seven. It isn't required for you to drive them out of these lands. You just need to plant enough weirwood trees and promote the religion," Sylvyrn nodded emphatically, clearly understanding my confusion. "They are outsiders, but the Old Gods are gods of nature, and they have adapted to their existence. The golden being is not so benign as the Seven."
"I understand, and I will make it happen," I said firmly, knowing we needed to avoid this at all costs. "Is there anything else, Sylvyrn?" I asked.
"You just need to seal the pact, Robb Stark. Just like your ancestors did in the past on this isle," he said mysteriously.
"Are you sure about this, Robb?" my father asked. I nodded—this was something I needed to do. I couldn't be the one responsible for the ruin it would bring to Planetos if Scion targeted us.
"Lead the way, Sylvyrn," I said as I started walking toward them.
The others tried to follow, but the leaves began moving on their own, closing the path.
"Camp here, I'll be fine!" I shouted, hoping they could hear me over the noise.
Following behind them, I kept silent, contemplating how this decision would change the future. I truly hoped I was making the right choice.
The group led me to a tree in the middle of the isle, and I noticed the difference in the atmosphere; the air felt heavy compared to outside.
Sylvyrn handed me an empty bowl without saying anything, and I just looked at him in wonder as a knife rose from the very earth in front of me.
"Put some blood in the bowl," he instructed, and nervously, I followed his directions.
When I had enough blood, another of the Green Men approached me, spreading a green paste on my wound. I gasped at the itchiness I felt instantly, and then he removed it with a cloth, and I was amazed to find the injury gone.
"Submerge your hand in the blood and place it on the face of the tree," Sylvyrn continued calmly.
As I did so, I couldn't deny that I was afraid of what was going to happen, but the next thing I knew was darkness.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Chapter 47: The Journey Home (III)
New
InfinityReads999
Getting sticky.
- Joined
- Aug 12, 2024
- Messages
- 74
- Likes received
- 1,173
The void.
Robb Stark.
Darkness was the only thing I could see around me as I felt my consciousness slipping away. The air felt heavy in my lungs, and I noticed that I had stopped breathing. The environment pressed down on me, showing me how insignificant I was compared to the beings that inhabited this void.
Suddenly, a voice echoed in the darkness—not a single one, but a multitude of voices, layered atop one another, speaking in unison yet out of sync.
"Outsider… child born outside of these lands…"the voices reverberated through my mind, as there was no sound in the void. "You have answered our call, and now seek to form a pact, a bond with the roots that bind this world…"
I tried to answer, I did, but nothing came out of my mouth. Panic rose as I felt the wrongness of whatever was happening.
Focusing inward, I tried to project my thoughts. "I've come just as I was asked, Old Gods." Miraculously, my thoughts reached out into the void, filled with curiosity, mixed with a dash of fear.
There was no response at first, but I could feel the presence of countless beings around me. They felt vast, overwhelming to my mortal mind like the weight of thousands of eyes watching my every move.
Then the voices came again, this time softer, and I felt calmness enveloping me.
"We are the old… the forgotten… the watchers… we are the root of all things… we are what mortal men cannot grasp, what they have dared to defy in foolish disputes… we are the whispers in the dead of the night… the blood that feeds the weirwoods… the pulse of the earth, which mortal men like your brethren have damaged…"
The words swirled around me, and though I couldn't catch everything they said, I understood the main message they were trying to convey.
There was no malice against me, of that I was sure. If there had been, the tone would have been different.
They didn't speak in words; instead, I was bombarded with images and concepts. I wasn't sure how to explain what was happening. They felt so alien but, at the same time, like they belonged here.
Perhaps we were the aliens intruding on their lands. I wasn't sure, but I hoped we could reach a mutually satisfactory agreement by the end of our conversation.
"We knew of you when you first entered the Godswood… and we knew then that you had hijacked the body of the original… but we could read your intentions, as diminished as our power is after the Andals severed our link to the land…"
A shiver ran through me. This wasn't going to be a simple conversation of reaching an agreement and parting ways. They were interested in me, and I couldn't deny that I was interested in the beings surrounding me in this void.
I wasn't sure if they were conventional gods, but I doubted it. They didn't seem omniscient, and after the Andal invasion, they clearly weren't omnipresent.
The Old Gods didn't speak in riddles for their own amusement; they spoke in riddles because their very nature was beyond human comprehension.
"You have taken from the earth… the creatures that crawl… the beings that fly… you have bound them to your will, to your flesh… and we know you seek more… using that piece of the golden abomination to usurp what belongs to us…"
My heart raced as I tried to explain my reasons, hoping to steer the conversation to safer grounds.
"I seek power only to protect my people, my lands," I thought, struggling to maintain my composure in the face of such overwhelming power. "I need to protect the North; it is my duty, and afterward, to protect this world from a greater threat."
There was silence, more oppressive than if they had condemned my actions. Then the voices came again.
"Protection… a noble aim… but at what cost?... You meddle with forces beyond mortal beings… You seek to harness the strength of the earth, the speed of the wind… yet these things are not yours to command… they are ours…"
I felt pressure in my mind as if something greater was trying to break in. When my resistance crumbled, images flashed before my eyes—ancient forests, blood-soaked earth, and towering weirwoods with faces carved into them.
"You will become our champion… carry our power… but power is not given freely, Robb Stark. Power has a price… and the one you seek is grander than most… What will you give us?"
My thoughts raced, and I remembered the conversation I had with Sylvyrn moments prior.
"I will make it so that the Old Gods will have roots in every corner of Westeros and beyond," I projected. "I will become the Emperor of Planetos and bring your faith to an all-time high. Every corner of the world will know of you. I will plant your trees; I will spread your roots across the land. I will be your sword against the Long Night and the threats that come."
The voices fell silent again, and the pressure surrounding me grew even stronger. When they spoke again, there was a note of finality—and, thank the gods, acceptance.
"You have been touched by beings grander than us… Not only the golden abomination… but something even bigger than him has marked you…" the Old Gods said thoughtfully.
"Very well, child of men… A pact has been made… But beware, our champion… For the roots of the world are deep and tangled… and the power you seek will change you… You will be our hand in the world of flesh and blood, but you will never again be wholly of that world… You will be… between…"
As the darkness began to recede, I felt the weight lifting from my mind. But before I could fully grasp what had been said, the voices spoke one last time.
"Remember, Robb Stark… the roots that bind us are strong… but the winds of fate are stronger still… and there are forces beyond even our sight…"
With that final message, the world snapped back into focus, and I opened my eyes with a gasp.
The Isle of Faces
Robb Stark
I looked around, dazed, and saw the rest of the Green Men kneeling in my direction. I found myself on my back before the weirwood tree.
"All hail to the champion of the Old Gods," Sylvyrn said with happiness, and if I was seeing right, with a lot of devotion.
"How long has it been?" I asked him while standing up.
"No more than an hour, my lord," the only woman in the group replied, and I raised my eyebrow at how differently they were acting now.
"What are the plans for your people, Sylvyrn?" I asked after nodding to the woman with a smile.
"The old and the young will stay here, but some of us will follow you and stay by the champion's side," he said with conviction.
"Thank you, and I promise that you will be treated well by my subjects," I said firmly, making a mental note to keep an eye on them for everyone's sake.
"What does it mean to be their champion?" I asked since I didn't feel much different at the moment.
"We don't know, my lord," Sylvyrn shook his head. "There hasn't been a champion for the Old Gods in millennia."
"My lord…" the timid voice of the woman sounded behind me. "You should take off your shirt," she said with a small blush.
"Huh?" I asked, perplexed. "What do you mean? And what is your name?"
"You can call me Elyndra, my lord," she said timidly, "and I can see something on your neck that wasn't there before." She ended, shyly.
I tried to look down, but my clothing blocked the view. Trusting her, I took off my shirt and marveled at the changes.
Physically, I didn't notice anything—my muscles hadn't grown, nor had anything else—but there was a change. Something like a tattoo traveled from my stomach to my neck in the form of roots.
I couldn't deny they looked badass, but I wasn't sure what purpose the Old Gods had for them.
Shaking my head, I addressed the group.
"Who will follow me north? We need to return soon, as the war will start in earnest within the next couple of weeks," I asked.
"I, and Elyndra, along with twenty of our best warriors, will follow you, and we'll also take three healers with us," said Sylvyrn, bowing his head.
I nodded. "Then prepare. I'll go talk to my father. And thank you for the help, Sylvyrn… I won't let the Old Gods down."
"I'm sure you won't, my lord. Go ahead; we will prepare for our journey and meet you on the shore," he said firmly.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99
Robb Stark.
Darkness was the only thing I could see around me as I felt my consciousness slipping away. The air felt heavy in my lungs, and I noticed that I had stopped breathing. The environment pressed down on me, showing me how insignificant I was compared to the beings that inhabited this void.
Suddenly, a voice echoed in the darkness—not a single one, but a multitude of voices, layered atop one another, speaking in unison yet out of sync.
"Outsider… child born outside of these lands…"the voices reverberated through my mind, as there was no sound in the void. "You have answered our call, and now seek to form a pact, a bond with the roots that bind this world…"
I tried to answer, I did, but nothing came out of my mouth. Panic rose as I felt the wrongness of whatever was happening.
Focusing inward, I tried to project my thoughts. "I've come just as I was asked, Old Gods." Miraculously, my thoughts reached out into the void, filled with curiosity, mixed with a dash of fear.
There was no response at first, but I could feel the presence of countless beings around me. They felt vast, overwhelming to my mortal mind like the weight of thousands of eyes watching my every move.
Then the voices came again, this time softer, and I felt calmness enveloping me.
"We are the old… the forgotten… the watchers… we are the root of all things… we are what mortal men cannot grasp, what they have dared to defy in foolish disputes… we are the whispers in the dead of the night… the blood that feeds the weirwoods… the pulse of the earth, which mortal men like your brethren have damaged…"
The words swirled around me, and though I couldn't catch everything they said, I understood the main message they were trying to convey.
There was no malice against me, of that I was sure. If there had been, the tone would have been different.
They didn't speak in words; instead, I was bombarded with images and concepts. I wasn't sure how to explain what was happening. They felt so alien but, at the same time, like they belonged here.
Perhaps we were the aliens intruding on their lands. I wasn't sure, but I hoped we could reach a mutually satisfactory agreement by the end of our conversation.
"We knew of you when you first entered the Godswood… and we knew then that you had hijacked the body of the original… but we could read your intentions, as diminished as our power is after the Andals severed our link to the land…"
A shiver ran through me. This wasn't going to be a simple conversation of reaching an agreement and parting ways. They were interested in me, and I couldn't deny that I was interested in the beings surrounding me in this void.
I wasn't sure if they were conventional gods, but I doubted it. They didn't seem omniscient, and after the Andal invasion, they clearly weren't omnipresent.
The Old Gods didn't speak in riddles for their own amusement; they spoke in riddles because their very nature was beyond human comprehension.
"You have taken from the earth… the creatures that crawl… the beings that fly… you have bound them to your will, to your flesh… and we know you seek more… using that piece of the golden abomination to usurp what belongs to us…"
My heart raced as I tried to explain my reasons, hoping to steer the conversation to safer grounds.
"I seek power only to protect my people, my lands," I thought, struggling to maintain my composure in the face of such overwhelming power. "I need to protect the North; it is my duty, and afterward, to protect this world from a greater threat."
There was silence, more oppressive than if they had condemned my actions. Then the voices came again.
"Protection… a noble aim… but at what cost?... You meddle with forces beyond mortal beings… You seek to harness the strength of the earth, the speed of the wind… yet these things are not yours to command… they are ours…"
I felt pressure in my mind as if something greater was trying to break in. When my resistance crumbled, images flashed before my eyes—ancient forests, blood-soaked earth, and towering weirwoods with faces carved into them.
"You will become our champion… carry our power… but power is not given freely, Robb Stark. Power has a price… and the one you seek is grander than most… What will you give us?"
My thoughts raced, and I remembered the conversation I had with Sylvyrn moments prior.
"I will make it so that the Old Gods will have roots in every corner of Westeros and beyond," I projected. "I will become the Emperor of Planetos and bring your faith to an all-time high. Every corner of the world will know of you. I will plant your trees; I will spread your roots across the land. I will be your sword against the Long Night and the threats that come."
The voices fell silent again, and the pressure surrounding me grew even stronger. When they spoke again, there was a note of finality—and, thank the gods, acceptance.
"You have been touched by beings grander than us… Not only the golden abomination… but something even bigger than him has marked you…" the Old Gods said thoughtfully.
"Very well, child of men… A pact has been made… But beware, our champion… For the roots of the world are deep and tangled… and the power you seek will change you… You will be our hand in the world of flesh and blood, but you will never again be wholly of that world… You will be… between…"
As the darkness began to recede, I felt the weight lifting from my mind. But before I could fully grasp what had been said, the voices spoke one last time.
"Remember, Robb Stark… the roots that bind us are strong… but the winds of fate are stronger still… and there are forces beyond even our sight…"
With that final message, the world snapped back into focus, and I opened my eyes with a gasp.
The Isle of Faces
Robb Stark
I looked around, dazed, and saw the rest of the Green Men kneeling in my direction. I found myself on my back before the weirwood tree.
"All hail to the champion of the Old Gods," Sylvyrn said with happiness, and if I was seeing right, with a lot of devotion.
"How long has it been?" I asked him while standing up.
"No more than an hour, my lord," the only woman in the group replied, and I raised my eyebrow at how differently they were acting now.
"What are the plans for your people, Sylvyrn?" I asked after nodding to the woman with a smile.
"The old and the young will stay here, but some of us will follow you and stay by the champion's side," he said with conviction.
"Thank you, and I promise that you will be treated well by my subjects," I said firmly, making a mental note to keep an eye on them for everyone's sake.
"What does it mean to be their champion?" I asked since I didn't feel much different at the moment.
"We don't know, my lord," Sylvyrn shook his head. "There hasn't been a champion for the Old Gods in millennia."
"My lord…" the timid voice of the woman sounded behind me. "You should take off your shirt," she said with a small blush.
"Huh?" I asked, perplexed. "What do you mean? And what is your name?"
"You can call me Elyndra, my lord," she said timidly, "and I can see something on your neck that wasn't there before." She ended, shyly.
I tried to look down, but my clothing blocked the view. Trusting her, I took off my shirt and marveled at the changes.
Physically, I didn't notice anything—my muscles hadn't grown, nor had anything else—but there was a change. Something like a tattoo traveled from my stomach to my neck in the form of roots.
I couldn't deny they looked badass, but I wasn't sure what purpose the Old Gods had for them.
Shaking my head, I addressed the group.
"Who will follow me north? We need to return soon, as the war will start in earnest within the next couple of weeks," I asked.
"I, and Elyndra, along with twenty of our best warriors, will follow you, and we'll also take three healers with us," said Sylvyrn, bowing his head.
I nodded. "Then prepare. I'll go talk to my father. And thank you for the help, Sylvyrn… I won't let the Old Gods down."
"I'm sure you won't, my lord. Go ahead; we will prepare for our journey and meet you on the shore," he said firmly.
If you want to support me or read up to Five chapters ahead, you can find me on patr*e on . co m (slash) Infinityreads99